Capital® Library™ User Guide

Release 2015.1
February 2016

© 2016 Mentor Graphics Corporation

All rights reserved.

This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this
document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire
notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable
effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make
changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the
reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been
made.

The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in
written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation
of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor
Graphics whatsoever.

MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT,
EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS: The software and documentation were developed entirely at
private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to
FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure by or for the U.S.
Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in
the license agreement provided with the software, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable
mandatory federal laws.

TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of
Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior
written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark, as applicable. The use herein of a third-
party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to
indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics’
trademarks may be viewed at: www.mentor.com/trademarks.

The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of
Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.

Mentor Graphics Corporation

8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777
Telephone: 503.685.7000
Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210
Website: www.mentor.com
SupportNet: supportnet.mentor.com/

Send Feedback on Documentation: supportnet.mentor.com/doc_feedback_form

 Table of Contents

Chapter 1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Introduction to Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Video Test Drive - Capital Library Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Search Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Diagram Language Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Enterprise Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Managing Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation . . . . . . . . . 45
Cron Syntax Usage Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Reloading Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Backing Up, Deleting and Restoring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Backing Up the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deleting the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Importing a Back-up Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Maximum Field Lengths in Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Chapter 2
Configurable User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configurable User Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enabling the Configurable Library GUI Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Launching the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Exporting the User Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Importing the User Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Application Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Applicable Groups (Application Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing the Applicable Groups for an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Criteria Attributes (Application Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Editing the Criteria Attributes for an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Component Table (Application Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Editing the Component Table Columns for an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in Capital Library68
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 3

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Component Tables (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing the Component Table Columns for a Component Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab Pages (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing the Tabs and Fields for Components Belonging to a Component Group . . . . . . . 74
Type Codes (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Chapter 3
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Component Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Backshells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Creating a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Adding a Termination to a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Deleting a Termination from a Backshell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Backshell Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating a Backshell Plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Backshell Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Selection of a Detached Backshell Seal in the Design Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Creating a Detached Backshell Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Cavity Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Creating a Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cavity Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Creating a Cavity Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Cavity Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Creating a Cavity Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Creating a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Creating a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Ring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Stud Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Ring Terminal Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating a Ring Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating a Ring Terminal Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Blocked Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Creating a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dressed Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating a Dressed Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Adding a Dressed Connector Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Deleting a Dressed Connector Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Creating a Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Usage Example - Creating and Using Modular Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Automatically Assigning Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interactively Assigning Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Connector Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Creating a Connector Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
COTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating a COTS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Creating a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Editing a Pin Name on a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Adding a Pin to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Deleting a Pin from a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Deleting a Footprint from a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Formboard Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Creating a Formboard Fixture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Grommets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Creating a Grommet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Heat Shrink Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Creating a Heat Shrink Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Heat Shrink Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Creating an Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Blocked Insulation Displacement Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 5

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Multicore Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating a Twisted Pair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Other Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Creating an Other Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Solder Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Creating a Solder Sleeve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Creating a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Editing the Attributes of a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Creating a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Creating a Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Creating a Tube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Ultrasonic Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Creating an Ultrasonic Weld. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Creating a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Editing the Attributes of a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Common Editing Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Editing the Base Details of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Editing the Extra Details of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Assigning a Graphical Symbol to a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Deleting a Symbol from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Specifying a Customer Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting a Customer Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Specifying a Supplier Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Deleting a Supplier Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding a Sub-Component as Housing to a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding Cavity Sub-Components as Housing to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Deleting a Sub-Component from the Housing of Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Adding a Property to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Editing a Property Value for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Deleting a Property from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Library Part Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Copy Versus Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Creating a Revision of a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Adding a Revision to a Part’s Revision History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Removing a Revision from a Part’s Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

6 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Editing a Cavity Name on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Specifying the Cavity Graphics of a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Adding a Cavity to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Deleting a Cavity from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Specifying Valid Mated Parts for a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Applying Scopes to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit
Together at Connector Cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Copying Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Copying Details from a Component to a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Copying Details from a Component to Other Existing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Deleting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Usage Example - Bulk Creating and Editing of Multiple Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Usage Example - Bulk Deletion of Multiple Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Importing and Exporting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Exporting the Entire Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Exporting Selected Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Importing Component Parts and Codes into the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Refreshing Symbol Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Changing the Background Display Color of Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Searching for Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Searching for Components Using Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Searching for All Components in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Finding Where a Component Is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Chapter 4
Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Creating a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Editing a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Deleting a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Material Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Creating a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Editing a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Deleting a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 7

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Component Type Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Creating a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Editing a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Deleting a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Customer Color Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Creating a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Editing a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Deleting a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Wire Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Creating a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Editing a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Deleting a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Wire Insulation Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Property Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating a Pin Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Editing a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Deleting a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Properties for Type Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Editing a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Deleting a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Manufacturing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Creating a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Editing a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Deleting a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Creating a Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Editing a Scope Code Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Deleting a Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Applying Scope Codes to Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Applying Scope Codes to Projects or Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Part Selection and Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Scoping Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Housing Selection Using Component Scoping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Pitch Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Editing a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Deleting a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Pitch Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Creating a Pitch Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Editing a Pitch Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Deleting a Pitch Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Wire Group Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Creating a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

8 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Editing a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Deleting a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Importing and Exporting Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Exporting all Codes from the Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Importing Codes into the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Refreshing Library Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Finding Which Components Use a Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Chapter 5
Companies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Creating a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Editing a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Deleting a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Creating a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Editing a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Deleting a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Finding Which Components Use a Company Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Chapter 6
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Cavity Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Component Deletion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Component Maintenance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Assembly Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Base Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Cavity Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Cavity Group Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cavity Names Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Customer Tab (Component Details) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Dressed Routes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Extra Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fixture Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Footprints Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Housing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IDC Group Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
In-House Assembly Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Mating Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Multicore Wires Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Multiple Terminations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Pin Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Pin Names Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ring Terminal Group Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 9

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Scope Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Seal Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Single Terminations Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sleeve Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Splice Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Spot Tape Selection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Supplier Tab (Component Details) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Symbol Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Termination Names Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Ultrasonic Welds Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Copy Component Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Create New Part Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Export Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Import Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Library Usages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Part Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Plugins Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Plugin Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Project Usages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Validation Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
View Pin Mapping details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Help Button Landing Pages for Component Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Component Deletion Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Component Maintenance Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Configure Library GUI Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Copy Component Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Create New Part Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Export Library Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Export GUI Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Enterprise Assets Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Housing Scope Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Import Library Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Import GUI Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Library Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Part Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Plugins Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Plugin Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Select Wire Spec by Range Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
View Pin Mapping details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

10 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
Table of Contents

Chapter 7
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Code Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Choose Color Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Color Codes Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Component Type Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box (Configurable Library GUI) . . . . . . . . . . 399
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Material Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Pitch Definitions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Pitch Tables Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Property Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Scope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Usage Report Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Wire Group Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Wire Sizes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Code Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Color Code Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Material Codes Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Property Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Company Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Customers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Suppliers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Help Button Landing Pages for Codes and Companies Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Color Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Component Type Codes Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Component Type Codes Selection Help (Configurable Library GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Customer Color Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Manufacturing Sites Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Material Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Pitch Definitions Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Pitch Tables Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Property Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Properties for Type Code Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Scope Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Usage Report Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Wire Group Definition Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Wire Insulation Thickness Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Wire Sizes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Color Code Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Component Type Codes Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Material Codes Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Property Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 11

February 2016
 Table of Contents

Wire Specification Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Customers Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Suppliers Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Chapter 8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Unable to Edit Displayed Fields for Tab Embedded in Another Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Index
Third-Party Information
End-User License Agreement

12 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 List of Figures

Figure 1-1. Example Component Export Task Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Figure 1-2. Example Symbol Export Task Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 1-3. Example Design Export Task Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 1-4. Example Component Import Task Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 1-5. Example Symbol Import Task Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 1-6. Example Design Import Task Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 2-1. Group Name Field on Base Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 2-2. Value Column for Group Name in Internal Part No. Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 2-3. Criteria Attributes as Displayed in Internal Part No. Table (No Group Name
Specified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 2-4. Internal Part No. Table Columns (No Component Group Specified). . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 2-5. Tabs and Fields in Component Details Section (No Component Selected) . . . . 67
Figure 2-6. Criteria Attributes as Displayed in Internal Part No. Table (Group Name Specified)
70
Figure 2-7. Internal Part No. Table Columns (Component Group of Device Specified) . . . 72
Figure 2-8. Tabs and Fields in Component Details Section (Device Selected). . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 2-9. Component Type Code in Browser Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 3-1. Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 3-2. Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 3-3. Cavity Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 3-4. Cavity Seals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 3-5. Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 3-6. Ring Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 3-7. Dressed Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 3-8. Example Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 3-9. Example Modular Connector Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 3-10. Example Additional Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 3-11. Connector Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 3-12. Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 3-13. Formboard Fixtures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 3-14. Formboard Fixtures on a Formboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 3-15. Grommet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 3-16. Heat Shrink Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 3-17. Insulation Displacement Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 3-18. Possible In-house Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 3-19. Multicore with Outer Sheath. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 3-20. Twisted Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 3-21. Example Other Component: Anti-backout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 3-22. Solder Sleeve with Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 3-23. Solder Sleeve Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 13

February 2016
 List of Figures

Figure 3-24. Butt Ultrasonic Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Figure 3-25. Butt Splice Crimp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 3-26. Spiral Tape with no Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 3-27. Overlapped Taping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 3-28. Space Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 3-29. Male and Female Open Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 3-30. Male Terminal with Seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 3-31. Female Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 3-32. Unsplit Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 3-33. Split Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 3-34. Ultrasonic Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 3-35. When to Create a Part Revision: Recommended Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 3-36. Wire Group Name, Description and Range Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 3-37. Selected Wire Sizes in Wire Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 3-38. 56-Cavity Connector Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 3-39. Blank Row in Configuration List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 3-40. Blank Row in Wire Size Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 3-41. Wire Group Name Drop-down List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 3-42. Updated Row in Wire Size Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 3-43. Wire Size Table with Wire Group Added Twice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 3-44. Possible Combinations of Wire Sizes at Connector Cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 3-45. Using the Copy Components Dialog to Make Bulk Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 4-1. Scopes Dialog Codes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 4-2. Including or Excluding Scopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Figure 4-3. Example Scope Inclusion and Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 4-4. Applying Scopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 4-5. Example of Parts Not Explicitly Excluded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 4-6. DRC Set On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Figure 4-7. Common Scoping Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Figure 4-8. Selecting Housing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 4-9. Including or Excluding Housing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 4-10. Housing Component Scoping Check box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 4-11. Assigning the Desired Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

14 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 List of Tables

Table 1-1. Component Export Task File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Table 1-2. Symbol Export Task File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 1-3. Design Export Task File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 1-4. Component Import Task File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 1-5. Symbol Import Task File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 1-6. Design Import Task File Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 1-7. Cron Syntax Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 1-8. Maximum Field Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 3-1. Component Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 3-2. Library Part Base Information Merging - Database Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Table 3-3. Library Part Base Information Merging - Content Being Imported . . . . . . . . . . 224
Table 3-4. Library Part Base Information Merging - Merged Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Table 3-5. Library Part Child Element Information Merging - Database Content . . . . . . . . 224
Table 3-6. Library Part Child Element Information Merging - Content Being Imported . . 225
Table 3-7. Library Part Child Element Information Merging - Merged Content . . . . . . . . . 225
Table 3-8. Basic Code Merging - Database Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Table 3-9. Basic Code Merging - Content Being Imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Table 3-10. Basic Code Merging - Merged Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Table 3-11. Derived Code Merging - Database Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Table 3-12. Derived Code Merging - Content Being Imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Table 3-13. Derived Code Merging - Merged Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Table 6-1. Component Deletion Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Table 6-2. Component Selection Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Table 6-3. Component Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Table 6-4. Assembly Details Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Table 6-5. Base Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Table 6-6. Wire Color Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Table 6-7. Example Wire Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Table 6-8. Cavity Attributes Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Table 6-9. Cavity Group Details Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Table 6-10. Cavity Names Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Table 6-11. Customer Tab (Component Details) Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table 6-12. Dressed Routes Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Table 6-13. Extra Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Table 6-14. Fixture Details Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Table 6-15. Footprints Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Table 6-16. Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Table 6-17. History Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Table 6-18. Housing Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Table 6-19. IDC Group Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 15

February 2016
 List of Tables

Table 6-20. In-House Assembly Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Table 6-21. Mating Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table 6-22. Multicore Wires Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Table 6-23. Multiple Terminations Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Table 6-24. Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Table 6-25. Pin Attributes Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Table 6-26. Pin Names Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table 6-27. Properties Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Table 6-28. Ring Terminal Group Details Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Table 6-29. Scope Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Table 6-30. Seal Attributes Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Table 6-31. Single Terminations Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Table 6-32. Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Table 6-33. Sleeve Attributes Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Table 6-34. Splice Attributes Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Table 6-35. Spot Tape Selection Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Table 6-36. Supplier Tab (Component Details) Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Table 6-37. Symbol Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Table 6-38. Termination Names Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Table 6-39. Ultrasonic Welds Tab Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Table 6-40. Configure Library GUI Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Table 6-41. Copy Component Details Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Table 6-42. Create New Part Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Table 6-43. Export Library Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Table 6-44. Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Table 6-45. Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Table 6-46. Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Table 6-47. Import Library Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Table 6-48. Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Table 6-49. Library Usages Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Table 6-50. Plugins Dialog Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Table 6-51. Plugin Details Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Table 6-52. Project Usages Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Table 6-53. Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Table 6-54. Validation Report Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Table 6-55. View Pin Mapping details Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Table 7-1. Color Codes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Table 7-2. Component Type Codes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Table 7-3. Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Table 7-4. Customer Color Codes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Table 7-5. Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Table 7-6. Material Codes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Table 7-7. Pitch Definitions Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Table 7-8. Pitch Tables Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Table 7-9. Property Codes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

16 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
List of Tables

Table 7-10. Properties for Type Code Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Table 7-11. Scope Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Table 7-12. Usage Report Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Table 7-13. Wire Group Definition Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Table 7-14. Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Table 7-15. Wire Sizes Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Table 7-16. Color Code Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Table 7-17. Component Type Code Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Table 7-18. Material Code Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Table 7-19. Property Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Table 7-20. Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Table 7-21. Filter and Customers Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Table 7-22. Address & Contact Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Table 7-23. Customer Manufacturing Options Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Table 7-24. Suppliers Dialog Box Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 17

February 2016
 List of Tables

18 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 1
Introduction

This chapter contains high-level information about working with Capital Library.
Introduction to Capital Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Video Test Drive - Capital Library Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Search Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Diagram Language Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Enterprise Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Managing Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation . . . . . . . . . 45
Cron Syntax Usage Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Reloading Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Backing Up, Deleting and Restoring the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Backing Up the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Deleting the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Importing a Back-up Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Maximum Field Lengths in Capital Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Introduction to Capital Library

Capital Library provides component management services for the Capital product suite and
defines the part library data used by other Capital applications, such as Capital Logic, Capital
Integrator and Capital HarnessXC.
For example:

A Capital Logic user can define a connector and then assign a part-number to it. The Capital
system automatically accesses the corresponding Capital Library definition of the component
with that part number and copies the definition back to the Capital Logic user, this reduces the
effort required by the Capital Logic user, reduces the possibility of introducing errors, and
makes it easy for users to refer to standardized parts.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 19

February 2016
Introduction
Introduction to Capital Library

Capital Library provides facilities that allow users to create and manage definitions of the many
types of component (see “Component Groups” on page 83) that are required in an electrical
design definition from the early design phase through to the manufacturing phase. Some of
these facilities help define information about individual components; others help users to
manage the library data by capturing corporate conventions and notations such as Color Codes,
standard Component Type Codes and Wire Sizes.

The following concepts are available for further definition of component parts:

• Part number management; Customer Part Numbers and Supplier Part Numbers can be
managed alongside a corporate Internal Part Number.
• Part relationships; for example, connector-to-seal (see Housing) or wire-to-terminal
associations (see Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component or
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component).
• User-defined properties based on component types allow users to expand the standard
component properties to include properties that are needed to support individual
company processes (see Properties for Type Codes).
In its simplest form, the library can be thought of as a catalog interface that coordinates all of
the information that your company associates with the library parts used in its electrical system
designs.

A part definition includes:

• the collection of data specified for a particular part number

• the reference to a symbol body that is used to graphically represent that part on a
diagram
The collection of data normally specified in a part’s definition includes the properties, property
values, and property attributes defined for that part. When you create a part definition, it must
belong to a component group. See “Component Groups” on page 83 for information about these
groups and links to the editing actions for them.

As you create and maintain components in the library, you will need to use codes. Codes are
pre-configured lists of reusable component attributes - such as color, material, and so on, that
can be selected when creating components. See “Codes” on page 233 for information about the
code types and how to maintain them.

Access rights to the functionality in Capital Library are controlled by Capital User. See your
Capital administrator and / or Capital User User Guide for more information.

Concurrent Component Editing

The library can be accessed by a number of users at any one time. However, only one user can
view or edit a component at that time. If a user is currently viewing a component and another

20 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Introduction to Capital Library

user tries to view that same component in the Component Maintenance Dialog Box the part
number is locked and the Apply button is inactive.

Global Library
In the case where a number of sites use the same library but on different databases, you may
want to interface the libraries in order to receive up-to-date component information. The global
library tool (also referred to as Enterprise Assets) is a licensed facility that enables periodic
updates of components and symbols between sites. One site acts as the master sending out
updated components and other sites act as the receivers. The updates are managed via send and
receive schedules that run at different times throughout the day or month depending on
individual requirements. The send and receive information relies on an integration server being
set up. See “Enterprise Assets” on page 24.

Library Import
Library components can be imported from other sources in an xml file format. See “Importing
and Exporting Components” on page 220.

The Capital tool provides the facility to import components from data sources such as PCB
tools. Component export is also supported to allow users to extract component information from
the Capital Library tool and import it back into other data sources. To create export files and
import files, you need to define your own plug-ins that enable translation of data out of and into
the tool in an acceptable format. For further information about developing plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file, located in the doc\plugin directory of your Capital installation.

Library Data Classes

There are three classes into which all library information is organized:

• Components
The component data class is used to define and organize parts and their attributes. See
“Components” on page 79.
• Codes
Codes define shortcuts to standardized organizational information, for example, color or
material, which are required for many components. Defining this information with a
code (shortcut) reduces the effort required to define new parts. See “Codes” on page 233
• Companies
The companies data class refers to the name and contact information of customers and
suppliers of parts. See “Companies” on page 273.
User Interface
You can re-configure the Capital Library user interface to your own specification. It is possible
to organize the tab pages that are displayed, together with the various contents shown within
them. You can also create your own customized tab pages via the Capital API extensibility
framework and both import and export the customized GUI settings. For further information see
“Configurable User Interface” on page 57.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 21

February 2016
Introduction
Video Test Drive - Capital Library Overview

Related Topics
Search Criteria
Diagram Language Translation
Enterprise Assets

Video Test Drive - Capital Library Overview

The Mentor Leaning Center includes a video in which you learn how to get started with Capital
Library.
You must have Internet access to view the video and a Mentor.com user account.

The video is available in the Capital learning paths:

• Designer - Connectivity (Advanced)

• Designer - Architect and Topology
• Designer - Harness
• Librarian - Parts and Symbols
• Administrator - Projects
One way to access the Mentor Learning Center is clicking the On Demand Training symbol on
the launch pane visible in a Capital application when no diagram is open.

Search Criteria
When you search for a component in the library from the Component Maintenance Dialog Box
or Part Selection Dialog Box, you can restrict the results by entering search criteria in the dialog
fields before clicking the Search button.
Note
Many fields automatically search for and filter possible values as you type in them.

You can enter the following sorts of values:

• Blank field

22 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Diagram Language Translation

Leaving a field blank means that the search results will not be restricted by that field. If
you want to view all of the component parts in the database, leave all of the fields empty
and then click Search.
• Full string
Entering a full string into a field represents that specific string or any longer string
starting with those characters. For example, typing the characters DEVICE_01
represents that precise string and any strings that start with those precise characters.
• Partial string
Entering a partial string into a field represents any string starting with those characters.
For example, typing the characters DEV represents strings that begin with DEV -
regardless of their length. Example results are DEV02, DEVICE_01.
• * (Star Symbol)
Represents any number of characters when used in a string in a field. For example,
entering C-00*E into a field represents values that start C-00, followed at any position
by an E. Example results are C-002-BLUE, C-003-GREEN, C-004-GREY, C-005-
RED.
• ? (Question Mark Character)
Represents any single character when used in a string in a field. For example, entering
A??X (an A, two question marks and an X) into a field represents only 4-character
values that have an A as their first character and an X as their fourth character.
Example results are ABCX, A11X, ABCXAB.
Related Topics
Introduction to Capital Library
Diagram Language Translation
Enterprise Assets
Component Maintenance Dialog Box
Part Selection Dialog Box

Diagram Language Translation

You can display, print and publish diagrams with text rendered in any given language using a
language database stored as part of your system data. This enables you to generate multi-
language service documentation. In Capital Library, you can have translatable strings for
descriptions, property values and descriptions on library codes.
See Diagram Language Translation in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User
Guide for full details.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 23

February 2016
Introduction
Enterprise Assets

Enterprise Assets
Multi-site/enterprise organizations can have a number of sites that use the same library of
components and designs but on different databases. Enterprise Assets functionality provides an
automated mechanism to synchronize component library changes, symbol library and design
data changes between these different geographically-located databases.
Managing Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation . . . . . 45
Cron Syntax Usage Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Managing Updates
One site can act as the master sending out updated components/symbols/designs and other sites
act as the receivers. Alternatively, you can run peer-to-peer synchronization. In both cases, the
updates are managed via send and receive schedules that run at different times throughout the
day or month depending on individual requirements.
Note
In the case of designs, the design and folder structure from the source project is replicated at
the target location.

By maintaining a single, globally-propagated library for electrical parts, an organization can

better control the number of unique parts within its inventory, thus reducing the costs incurred
by having unnecessary parts.

This is licensed functionality and you must have the correct license in order to use it.

The Enterprise Assets framework is built using Capital Integration Server (CIS) so it must be
running on the Capital installation computers at the sites from and to which you want to
propagate the library changes.

Note
In the Component Maintenance Dialog Box, you can use the Modification History field on
the History tab for a component part to enter notes about what changes have been made to
the part and why.

24 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow)

Related Topics
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow)
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task
Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library Data
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task
Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library Data
Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation

Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-

Level Flow)
There is a high-level flow for propagating (sharing) component library changes, symbol library
changes and design data changes between different geographically-located Capital installations.
Prerequisites
Your user account must have the Task Administration permission set in Capital User. See the
Capital User User Guide.

Procedure
1. In Capital Project, ensure that the Enterprise Asset Exchange audit trail event is
selected to run in the System Preferences.

Note
You can use Audit Trail functionality to monitor the sending and receiving of library
changes. See Audit Trail in the Capital Project User Guide for further details).

2. Create a configuration file for the export and import tasks. See “Creating a
Configuration File for an Export Task” on page 26 and “Creating a Configuration File
for an Import Task” on page 35.
3. Ensure Capital Integration Server is running on the Capital installation computers at the
sites from and to which you want to propagate the library and symbol changes. To start
the Capital Integration Server, either click it on the Capital Launcher or run the
CapitalIntegrationServer.exe in the bin directory of the Capital installation.
4. On the computer at the site from which you want to propagate the library changes, create
the export task. See “Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital
Installation” on page 45.
5. On the computer at the site to which you want to propagate the library changes, create
the import task. See “Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital
Installation” on page 45.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 25

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

Results
• The import and export tasks run at the scheduled times and the audit trail records those
events.
• During an export (send) propagation, the default selection of components will include
only those parts that have changed since the last successful propagation (note Enterprise
Assets tracks successful propagations in order to manage this).
Related Topics
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task
Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library Data
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task
Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library Data
Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation

Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

You create a configuration file for an export task when using the Enterprise Assets
functionality.
Procedure
1. In an XML editor, create an xml file with parameter values appropriate to your export
task.
2. For descriptions of the parameters, see:
• “Component Export Task File Parameters” on page 27
• “Symbol Export Task File Parameters” on page 28
• “Design Export Task File Parameters” on page 28
3. For examples of export task configurations files, see:
• “Example Component Export Task Configuration File” on page 30
• “Example Symbol Export Task Configuration File” on page 31
• “Example Design Export Task Configuration File” on page 31

26 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

Table 1-1. Component Export Task File Parameters

Parameter Description
ExportScope Specifies whether the Scope tab settings for components and
the Scoped values for sub-components listed on the Housing
Tab are exported (true) or not (false).
ExportFormatPluginURL A plugin capability for the bridging out of library data is
available. If you use that capability, you specify the URL to the
plugin created for bridging out.
ExportFilterPluginURL Enables you to specify the URL of an export filter plugin. See
“Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library
Data” on page 34.
DestinationImportInstanceN Specify a name for the task. Note that this must match the task
ame name specified when you create the corresponding import task
in the Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box in the
Capital installations.
DestinationCISAddress Specify the IP address or name of the computer where the target
Capital Integration Server is running.
DestinationCISUserName Specify the user name used to connect to the target Capital
Integration Server.
DestinationCISUserPasswor Specify the password used to connect to the target Capital
d Integration Server.
DestinationCISPort Specify the destination port used to communicate with the
target Capital Integration Server.
ExportRevision With this parameter set to true, all revisions of a part are
included in the export. With this option set to false, only the
latest revision of any selected parts are exported.
ExportModificationHistory Specifies whether Modification History notes from the
History tab are exported with the component library parts
(true) or are not exported (false).
LogPartNumber Specifies whether the log file for the export includes the
exported part numbers (true) or not (false).

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 27

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

See “Example Component Export Task Configuration File” on page 30.

Table 1-2. Symbol Export Task File Parameters

Parameter Description
DestinationImportInstanceN Specify a name for the task. Note that this must match the task
ame name specified when you create the corresponding import tasks
in the Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box in the
Capital installations.
DestinationCISAddress Specify the IP address or name of the computer where the target
Capital Integration Server is running.
DestinationCISUserName Specify the user name used to connect to the target Capital
Integration Server.
DestinationCISUserPasswor Specify the password used to connect to the target Capital
d Integration Server.
DestinationCISPort Specify the port used to communicate with the target Capital
Integration Server.
SymbolLibraryToExport Specify the symbol library that you want to export. If you leave
the value blank or do not add this parameter to the file, all
symbol libraries modified after the last successful export are
exported. To export multiple symbol libraries, repeat the
parameter. For example:
<Param name="SymbolLibraryToExport" value="Library1"
/>
<Param name="SymbolLibraryToExport" value="Library2"
/>
LogSymbolNames With this parameter set to true, the log file for the export
includes the exported symbol names. With this option set to
false, the log file does not include the exported symbol names.

See “Example Symbol Export Task Configuration File” on page 31.

Table 1-3. Design Export Task File Parameters

Parameter Description
DestinationImportInstanceName Specify a name for the task. Note that this must match the
task name specified when you create the corresponding
import tasks in the Enterprise Assets Configuration
Dialog Box in the Capital installations.
DestinationCISAddress Specify the IP address or name of the computer where the
target Capital Integration Server is running.

28 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

Table 1-3. Design Export Task File Parameters (cont.)

Parameter Description
DestinationCISUserName Specify the user name used to connect to the target
Capital Integration Server.
DestinationCISUserPassword Specify the password used to connect to the target Capital
Integration Server.
DestinationCISPort Specify the port used to communicate with the target
Capital Integration Server.
IncludeGeneratedWiring With this parameter set to true, the export of Capital
Integrator designs includes synthesized wiring. If set to
false, synthesized wiring is not included but you can re-
synthesize it in Capital Integrator in the target Capital
installation.
KeepDataFile With this parameter set to true, temporary design zip
files, generated in your temporary area during export, are
retained after the export has completed.
KeyStore If the export must be in secure mode, specify the path to
the keystore in the target Capital installation. For
example:
<Param name="KeyStore" value="${capital.home}/
config/.keystore" />
KeyPassword If the export must be in secure mode, specify the
password for the keystore in the target Capital
installation. For example:
<Param name="KeyPassword" value="chsreporter" />
ExportFilterGroup section The parameters in this section control which projects and
designs are exported.
ProjectToExport Specify the name of a project for which you want to
export designs and apply a filter for which designs are
included. For example:
<ProjectToExport name="P1">
Do not use this parameter if you want any Design and
DesignType parameters to apply to all projects. Instead,
just use Design and DesignType parameters in a global
settings section.
See “Example Design Export Task Configuration File”
on page 31 for possible combinations of
ProjectToExport, Design and DesignType parameters.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 29

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

Table 1-3. Design Export Task File Parameters (cont.)

Parameter Description
Design Specify the name of a particular design that you want to
export. All versions of that design are exported. For
example:
<Design name="IntDesName" />
DesignType Specify the type of designs that you want to export. For
example:
<DesignType type="Logical" />
Possible values are: Logical, Integrator, Harness,
Topology.
FolderPath Specify a design folder path within the project that
contains designs to be exported. For example:
<FolderPath name="System1\System2" />
All designs underneath the design folder path
System1\System2 are exported.
See “Example Design Export Task Configuration File” on page 31.
Examples
The following examples are available:

• “Example Component Export Task Configuration File” on page 30

• “Example Symbol Export Task Configuration File” on page 31
• “Example Design Export Task Configuration File” on page 31
Figure 1-1. Example Component Export Task Configuration File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

<FEMParameters>

<Param name="ExportScope" value="true" />

<!-- this is the external export plugin -->

<Param name="ExportFormatPluginURL" value="" />

<!-- export filter plugin URL -->

<Param name="ExportFilterPluginURL" value="" />

<!-- import instance name -->

30 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

<Param name="DestinationImportInstanceName" value="SITE2" />

<!-- destination CIS IP -->

<Param name="DestinationCISAddress" value="MACHINE_NAME_XX" />

<Param name="DestinationCISUserName" value="system" />

<Param name="DestinationCISUserPassword" value="manager" />

<Param name="DestinationCISPort" value="49901" />

<Param name="ExportRevision" value="false" />

<!-- needed for local mode optional -->

<Param name="ExportModificationHistory" value="true" />

<Param name="LogPartNumber" value="true" />

</FEMParameters>

Figure 1-2. Example Symbol Export Task Configuration File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

<FEMParameters>

<Param name="DestinationImportInstanceName" value="SITE2" />

<!-- destination CIS IP -->

<Param name="DestinationCISAddress" value="MACHINE_NAME_XX" />

<Param name="DestinationCISUserName" value="system" />

<Param name="DestinationCISUserPassword" value="manager" />

<Param name="DestinationCISPort" value="49901" />

<Param name="SymbolLibraryToExport" value="Library1" />

<Param name="LogSymbolNames" value="false" />

</FEMParameters>

Figure 1-3. Example Design Export Task Configuration File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 31

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

<FEMParameters>

<-- Destination system import task name -->

<Param name="DestinationImportInstanceName" value="Site1toSite2Designs" />

<!-- Destination system CIS IP address-->

<Param name="DestinationCISAddress" value="MACHINE_NAME_XX" />

<!-- Destination system CIS user name -->

<Param name="DestinationCISUserName" value="system" />

<!-- Destination system CIS password <!--

<Param name="DestinationCISUserPassword" value="manager" />

<!-- destination system CIS port -->

<Param name="DestinationCISPort" value="49901" />

<!-- Whether synthesized wiring is included in export -->

<Param name="IncludeGeneratedWiring" value="false" />

<!-- Whether temporary design zip files are retained -->

<Param name="KeepDataFile" value="false" />

<!-- Path to keystore in the destination system so that export is in secure mode -->

<Param name="KeyStore" value="${capital.home}/config/.keystore" />

<!-- Password for keystore in the destination system so that export is in secure mode -->

<Param name="KeyPassword" value="chsreporter" />

<!-- Following section filters which projects and designs are exported -->

<ExportFilterGroup>

<!-- For project P1, export all Logical designs and all versions of an Integrator design
IntDesName only. -->

<ProjectToExport name="P1">

<Design name="IntDesName" />

32 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

<DesignType type="Logical" />

</ProjectToExport>

<!-- For project P2, export all Harness designs only. -->

<ProjectToExport name="P2">

<DesignType type="Harness" />

</ProjectToExport>

<!-- For project P-Restricted, do not export any designs. You must explicitly enter this
parameter for P-Restricted or else it uses the global settings below. -->

<ProjectToExport name="P-Restricted"/>

<!-- For project P-All, export all designs of all types. -->

<ProjectToExport name="P-All">

<DesignType type="Logical" />

<DesignType type="Integrator" />

<DesignType type="Harness" />

<DesignType type="Topology" />

</ProjectToExport>

<!-- For project P-Folders, export all designs located under the design folder path starting
System1\System2. -->

<ProjectToExport name="P-Folders">

<FolderPath name="System1\System2" />

</ProjectToExport>

<!-- Global settings: The following settings apply to all other projects without a
ProjectToExport parameter. In this example, all designs of all types are exported. Note they are
indented to the same level as ProjectToExport parameters. -->

<DesignType type="Logical" />

<DesignType type="Integrator" />

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 33

February 2016
Introduction
Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library Data

<DesignType type="Harness" />

<DesignType type="Topology" />

</ExportFilterGroup>

</FEMParameters>

Note
Leave the global settings section blank if you do not want to export any other projects.

Related Topics
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow)
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task
Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported Library Data
Enterprise Assets

Using an Export Filter Plugin to Filter the Exported

Library Data
You can develop a plugin that applies a filter during an export task to stop particular properties,
attributes, components or housing definitions from being exported. For example, you may want
to stop the export of components belonging to a particular component group.
Note
For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file, located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation.
In addition, refer to the examples in the
doc\plugin\examples\Java\src\com\example\plugin\library folder.

Procedure
1. After the plugin has been developed and included in your Capital installation, you must
edit the ExportFilterPluginURL parameter in the configuration file for the export task.
2. The parameter enables you to specify the URL of the export filter plugin. If the plugin
has been installed, you can find the URL as follows:
3. Selecting File > Plugins from the Capital Library menu; the Plugins Dialog is displayed.
4. Select the plugin in the Available Plugins table and click Details; the Plugin Details
Dialog Box is displayed. Copy the value in the URL field and paste it into the value
field for the ExportFilterPluginURL parameter in the configuration file.

34 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

5. Save the change in the configuration file; when you run the export task, the filter will be
applied.
Related Topics
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow)
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task

Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

You create create a configuration file for an import task when using the Enterprise Assets
functionality.
Procedure
1. In an XML editor, create an xml file with parameter values appropriate to your import
task.
2. For descriptions of the parameters, see:
• “Component Import Task File Parameters” on page 35
• “Symbol Import Task File Parameters” on page 38
• “Design Import Task File Parameters” on page 38
3. For examples of import task configurations files, see:
• “Example Component Import Task Configuration File” on page 40
• “Example Symbol Import Task Configuration File” on page 41
• “Example Design Import Task Configuration File” on page 41

Table 1-4. Component Import Task File Parameters

Parameter Description
ImportScope Specifies whether the Scope tab settings for components and
the Scoped values for sub-components listed on the Housing
Tab are imported (true) or not (false).
ImportFormatPluginURL A plugin capability for the bridging out and in of library data is
available. If you use that capability, you specify the URL to the
plugin created for bridging in.
ImportFormat Specifies the format of the library data that you are importing.
For example, xml. If the import is a TXT format, then you must
specify TXT.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 35

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

Table 1-4. Component Import Task File Parameters (cont.)

Parameter Description
ImportFilterPluginURL Enables you to specify the URL of an import filter plugin. See
“Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library
Data” on page 44.
ImportMode If OverwritePart is set to true, this specifies how the import
overwrites existing data in the library.
• Merge
Specifies that the data for an internal part number in the
import file is merged with the existing data for that part
number in the library. For further information and usage
examples for Library Data Merging see “Usage Examples
for Library Data Merging” on page 222.
• Truncate
Specifies that components in the library are replaced by
components with the same internal part number in the
import file.
If you specify something else, this will result in an error. If you
do not specify anything for this, Truncate is used by default.
OverwritePart Specifies how the system resolves conflicts between internal
part numbers in the imported data and in the existing library.
The import behavior is as follows:
• If set to true, this parameter specifies that existing
components in the library are overwritten by those with the
same internal part numbers in the import data.
• If set to false, this parameter specifies that components from
the import file with internal part numbers matching
components already in the library are not imported. Other
components in the import file are still imported. Any
dropped components are listed in the import log file.
If you want to compare the use of this parameter (combined
with the ImportMode parameter) to the Parts options on the
Import Library Dialog Box:
• Ignore is equivalent to OverwritePart=false and the
ImportMode parameter is not applicable
• Merge is equivalent to OverwritePart=true and
ImportMode=Merge
• Replace is equivalent to OverwritePart=true and
ImportMode=Truncate

36 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

Table 1-4. Component Import Task File Parameters (cont.)

Parameter Description
DuplicateCodeDesc Specifies how the system resolves conflicts between code
descriptions in the imported data and the existing library data.
The import behavior is as follows:
• If set to true, this parameter specifies that the existing
description in the library will be modified and the code with
the same description in the import data is added to the
library.
For example, the import file contains the color code RD
with a description Red and the database contains a color
code R with a description Red. With this option selected,
the description for the color code R is modified to R_Red
and the color code RD is imported with the description Red.
• If set to false, this option specifies that all existing codes in
the library retain their descriptions and an import file
containing conflicting codes and descriptions will be
rejected.
SourceCISUserName Specify the Capital user name used to connect to the source
Capital Integration Server.
SourceCISUserPassword Specify the Capital user’s password used to connect to the
source Capital Integration Server.
SourceCISAddress Specify the IP address or name of the computer where the
source Capital Integration Server is running.
SourceCISPort Specify the port used to communicate with the source Capital
Integration Server.
ImportTimeStamp If set to true, the last modified time stamp exported from the
source database is imported on the parts. If set to false, a new
time stamp is set on the parts at the import time.
ImportModification History Specifies whether Modification History notes from the
History tab are exported with the component library parts
(true) or not (false).
LogPartNumber Specifies whether the log file for the import includes the
imported part numbers (true) or not (false).

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 37

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

See “Example Component Import Task Configuration File” on page 40.

Table 1-5. Symbol Import Task File Parameters

Parameter Description
SourceCISUserName Specify the user name used to connect to the source Capital
Integration Server.
SourceCISUserPassword Specify the password used to connect to the source Capital
Integration Server.
SourceCISAddress Specify the IP address or name of the computer where the
source Capital Integration Server is running.
SourceCISPort Specify the port used to communicate with the source Capital
Integration Server.
Overwrite If set to true, the import overwrites any symbols that already
exist in the target database. If set to false, the import does not
overwrite any symbols that already exist in the target database.
Any new symbols in the incoming data are added to the target
symbol library.
SymbolLibraryToImport Specifies the symbol library to be imported. If the value is
blank or this parameter is not added to the file, all the libraries
sent by the corresponding export task are imported. To import
multiple symbol libraries, repeat the parameter. For example:
<Param name="SymbolLibraryToImport" value="Library1"
/>
<Param name="SymbolLibraryToImport" value="Library2"
/>

See “Example Symbol Import Task Configuration File” on page 41.

Table 1-6. Design Import Task File Parameters

Parameter Description
SourceCISUserName Specify the user name used to connect to the source Capital
Integration Server.
SourceCISUserPassword Specify the password used to connect to the source Capital
Integration Server.
SourceCISAddress Specify the IP address or name of the computer where the
source Capital Integration Server is running.
SourceCISPort Specify the port used to communicate with the source Capital
Integration Server.

38 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

Table 1-6. Design Import Task File Parameters (cont.)

Parameter Description
Overwrite If set to true, the import overwrites any designs that already
exist in the target database. If set to false, the import does not
overwrite any designs that already exist in the target database.
Either way, any new designs in the incoming data are added to
the target database.
DesignImportOverwriteTim Specifies how the timestamp of an overwritten design is set.
estamp The following values are valid:
• Source
Use the timestamp of the incoming design.
• Current
Update the timestamp with the current time.
• Target
Use the timestamp of the design already in the database.
OverwriteOnModification Specifies whether the import overwrites designs that have been
modified in the target database since the last transfer of designs.
If set to false, it does not overwrite the designs. If set to true, it
does overwrite them.
PreserveSourceDesignImpo Specifies how the import timestamp of an imported design is
rtTimeStamp set. This applies to designs that are new and are not overwriting
existing designs in the target database.
If set to true, imported designs keep their import timestamp
from the source database.
If set to false, the import timestamp updates to the current time
when imported.
KeepDataFile With this parameter set to true, temporary design zip files,
generated in your temporary area during import, are retained
after the import has completed.
KeyStore If the import must be in secure mode, specify the path to the
keystore in the source Capital installation. For example:
<Param name="KeyStore" value="${capital.home}/config/
.keystore" />
KeyPassword If the export must be in secure mode, specify the password for
the keystore in the source Capital installation. For example:
<Param name="KeyPassword" value="chsreporter" />
ImportFilterGroup section The parameters in this section control which projects and
designs are imported.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 39

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

Table 1-6. Design Import Task File Parameters (cont.)

Parameter Description
ProjectToImport Specify the name of a project for which you want to import
designs and apply a filter for which designs are included. For
example:
<ProjectToExport name="P1">
Do not use this parameter if you want any Design and
DesignType parameters to apply to all projects. Instead, just
use Design and DesignType parameters in a global settings
section.
See “Example Design Import Task Configuration File” on
page 41 for possible combinations of ProjectToImport,
Design and DesignType parameters.
Design Specify the name of a particular design that you want to import.
All versions of that design are imported. For example:
<Design name="IntDesName" />
DesignType Specify the type of designs that you want to import. For
example:
<DesignType type="Logical" />
Possible values are: Logical, Integrator, Harness, Topology.
FolderPath Specify a design folder path within the project that contains
designs to be imported. For example:
<FolderPath name="System1\System2" />
All designs underneath the design folder path
System1\System2 are imported.
See “Example Design Import Task Configuration File” on page 41.
Examples
Figure 1-4. Example Component Import Task Configuration File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

<FEMParameters>

<Param name="ImportScope" value="true" />

<!-- this is the external import plugin -->

<Param name="ImportFormatPluginURL" value="" />

<Param name="ImportFormat" value="xml" />

40 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

<!-- import filter plugin URL -->

<Param name="ImportFilterPluginURL" value="" />

<Param name="ImportMode" value="truncate" />

<Param name="OverwritePart" value="true" />

<Param name="DuplicateCodeDesc" value="true" />

<Param name="SourceCISUserName" value="system" />

<Param name="SourceCISUserPassword" value="manager" />

<Param name="SourceCISAddress" value="123.123.123.12" />

<Param name="SourceCISPort" value="49901" />

<Param name="ImportTimeStamp" value="true" />

<Param name="ImportModificationHistory" value="true" />

<Param name="LogPartNumber" value="true" />

</FEMParameters>

Figure 1-5. Example Symbol Import Task Configuration File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

<FEMParameters>

<Param name="SourceCISUserName" value="system" />

<Param name="SourceCISUserPassword" value="manager" />

<Param name="SourceCISAddress" value="123.123.123.12" />

<Param name="SourceCISPort" value="49901" />

<Param name="Overwrite" value="true" />

<Param name="SymbolLibraryToImport" value="Library1" />

</FEMParameters>

Figure 1-6. Example Design Import Task Configuration File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 41

February 2016
Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

<FEMParameters>

<!-- Source system CIS user name -->

<Param name="SourceCISUserName" value="system" />

<!-- Source system CIS password <!--

<Param name="SourceCISUserPassword" value="manager" />

<!-- Source system CIS IP address-->

<Param name="SourceCISAddress" value="MACHINE_NAME_XX" />

<!-- Source system CIS port -->

<Param name="SourceCISPort" value="49901" />

<!-- Whether the import overwrites designs that exist in the target Capital installation already --
>

<Param name="Overwrite" value="true" />

<!-- How the timestamp of an overwritten design is set. -->

<Param name="DesignImportOverwriteTimestamp" value="Source" />

<!-- Whether import overwrites designs that have been modified in target database. -->

<Param name="OverwriteOnModification" value="true" />

<!-- How the import timestamp of a new design is set. -->

<Param name="PreserveSourceDesignImportTimeStamp" value="true" />

<!-- Whether temporary design zip files are retained -->

<Param name="KeepDataFile" value="false" />

<!-- Path to keystore in the source system so that import is in secure mode -->

<Param name="KeyStore" value="${capital.home}/config/.keystore" />

<!-- Password for keystore in the source system so that import is in secure mode -->

<Param name="KeyPassword" value="chsreporter" />

<!-- Following section filters which projects and designs are imported -->

42 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

<ImportFilterGroup>

<!-- For project P1, import all Logical designs and all versions of an Integrator design
IntDesName only. -->

<ProjectToImport name="P1">

<Design name="IntDesName" />

<DesignType type="Logical" />

</ProjectToImport>

<!-- For project P2, import all Harness designs only. -->

<ProjectToImport name="P2">

<DesignType type="Harness" />

</ProjectToImport>

<!-- For project P-Restricted, do not import any designs. You must explicitly enter this
parameter for P-Restricted or else it uses the global settings below. -->

<ProjectToImport name="P-Restricted">

<!-- For project P-All, import all designs of all types. -->

<ProjectToImport name="P-All">

<DesignType type="Logical" />

<DesignType type="Integrator" />

<DesignType type="Harness" />

<DesignType type="Topology" />

</ProjectToImport>

</ProjectToExport>

<!-- For project P-Folders, import all designs located under the design folder path starting
System1\System2. -->

<ProjectToImport name="P-Folders">

<FolderPath name="System1\System2" />

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 43

February 2016
Introduction
Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library Data

</ProjectToImport>

<!-- Global settings: The following settings apply to all other projects without a
ProjectToImport parameter. In this example, all designs of all types are imported. Note they are
indented to the same level as ProjectToImport parameters. -->

<DesignType type="Logical" />

<DesignType type="Integrator" />

<DesignType type="Harness" />

<DesignType type="Topology" />

</ImportFilterGroup>

</FEMParameters>

Note
Leave the global settings section blank if you do not want to import any other projects.

Related Topics
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow)
Creating a Configuration File for an Export Task
Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported Library Data
Enterprise Assets

Using an Import Filter Plugin to Filter the Imported

Library Data
You can develop a plugin that applies a filter during an import task to stop particular properties,
attributes, components or housing definitions from being imported. For example, you may want
to protect particular properties that exist in the target database so that they are not updated by an
import.
Note
For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file, located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation.
In addition, refer to the examples in the
doc\plugin\examples\Java\src\com\example\plugin\library folder.

44 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation

Procedure
1. After the plugin has been developed and included in your Capital installation, you must
edit the ImportFilterPluginURL parameter in the configuration file for the import task.
2. The parameter enables you to specify the URL of the import filter plugin. If the plugin
has been installed, you can find the URL as follows:
3. Selecting File > Plugins from the Capital Library menu; the Plugins Dialog is displayed.
4. Select the plugin in the Available Plugins table and click Details; the Plugin Details
Dialog Box is displayed. Copy the value in the URL field and paste it into the value
field for the ImportFilterPluginURL parameter in the configuration file.
5. Save the change in the configuration file; when you run the import task, the filter will be
applied.
Related Topics
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow)
Creating a Configuration File for an Import Task

Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export

Task in a Capital Installation
This topic details how to create import and export tasks for the Enterprise Assets functionality.
You can import and export component library data, symbol library data or design data.
Prerequisites
• You must have created a configuration file for the task.
• Capital Integration Server must be running on the computer where you are creating the
task.
Procedure
1. In Capital Library, select File > Enterprise Assets Configuration from the menu; the
Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box is displayed and the Scheduled Tasks table
displays the tasks that have already been created.
2. Expand the drop-down list on the or button and select the appropriate option
(Import Library, Import Symbol, Import Design, Export Library, Export Symbol
or Export Design); a row is added to the table.
3. Specify a Name for the task. Note that, for an import task, the task name here must
match the DestinationImportInstanceName parameter specified for the corresponding
export task on the other installation involved in this.
4. Specify a user name and password that will be used to execute the task.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 45

February 2016
Introduction
Cron Syntax Usage Example

5. Click the Import Configuration button; a Enterprise Assets Configuration File

Name dialog box is displayed where you navigate to the configuration file that you want
to use for this task.
6. Select the configuration file and click Save; the configuration details are displayed in the
Configuration window.
7. In the Scheduling Expression field, enter a cron expression to schedule when this task
will run. For example: 0 0/5***? means fire every 5 minutes every day. See “Cron
Syntax Usage Example” on page 46.
8. Click Apply.
Results
• The task will run at the scheduled times.
• If you have configured the audit trail, it records when an Enterprise Assets Exchange
event occurs and records a Symbol Library exported event and Symbol Library
imported event for every symbol library included in the transfer.

Note
You can run a task immediately from the Enterprise Assets Configuration dialog
box by selecting the task in the Scheduled Tasks table and clicking Run Now.

Related Topics
Propagating Enterprise Assets Changes (High-Level Flow)
Enterprise Assets

Cron Syntax Usage Example

Examples of cronexpression syntax, together with explanation of meaning are shown below.

Table 1-7. Cron Syntax Examples

Syntax Explanation
002**? Run at 2am every day
0 15 2 ? * MON-FRI Run at 2:15am every Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday and Friday
0 0 3 ? * SAT Run at 3am every Saturday
0 15 10 1 * ? Run at 10:15am on the 1st day of every month

The syntax of scheduling a task for 12pm on 7/10/2011 is "0 0 12 7 10 ? 2011"

46 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Cron Syntax Usage Example

This is broken down as follows:

CronMaker is a free on-line utility that can be used to build cron expressions. See http://
www.cronmaker.com/ for additional information and help in defining your own cron
expressions.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 47

February 2016
Introduction
Extensibility Plugins

Extensibility Plugins
The following topics explain how to view the details of any extensibility plugins that you have
installed and how to load new plugins or reload modified plugins.
Compiled plugins - written in Java or JavaScript - provide custom actions and are placed into
the \plugins sub-directory of the Capital installation location. These plugins are loaded when an
application is launched, and can be inspected from within an application, see “Viewing the
Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins” on page 48.

Note
For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital
installation.

The function of a custom action is entirely dependent upon the plugin design; refer to the user
documentation supplied with the plugin for information on using the action.

Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Reloading Extensibility Plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility

Plugins
You can view the details of the extensibility plugins that you have installed.
Procedure
1. Select File > Plugins from the menu.
The Plugins Dialog is displayed.
2. Select a plugin in the Available Plugins table and click Details.
The Plugin Details Dialog Box is displayed.
3. View the details and click Close.
Related Topics
Reloading Extensibility Plugins

Reloading Extensibility Plugins

This topic explains how to reload extensibility plugins or load new plugins when they have been
modified in your Capital installation and you do not want to restart the application in which you
are working.

48 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Reloading Extensibility Plugins

Procedure
1. Select File > Plugins from the menu.
The Plugins Dialog is displayed.
2. Click Reload All.
Results
The Available Plugins table is updated and any new or modified plugins are available to use in
your Capital applications.
Related Topics
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 49

February 2016
Introduction
Backing Up, Deleting and Restoring the Library

Backing Up, Deleting and Restoring the

Library
The scenario can occur where you create a back-up copy of your library, then continue editing
the library in your database and then decide that you want to revert to the back-up version of the
library.
In this case, you delete the library in the database and import the back-up copy. The following
topics detail the steps:

Backing Up the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Deleting the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Importing a Back-up Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Backing Up the Library

You can create a back-up copy of your library in XML format.
You can either:

• Export a copy of the library from within Capital Library, using File > Export from the
menu. See “Exporting the Entire Library” on page 220. This is the simplest method.
• Run a premigration utility to export a copy of the library. See below in this topic. You
may want to do this if you automate the back-up process using command line options.
Prerequisites
• The latest service pack is applied to your Capital installation. The latest service packs
can be downloaded from SupportNet.
• Capital Manager is running.
• You have created a repository directory to which the premigration utility can export the
library. It must be accessible with full read write access.
Procedure
Run a command prompt and run the following command:

[Capital_directory]\bin\PreMigrate.exe -partlib -u=[system_user] -

w=[system_user_password] -f=[repository_directory]
Where:
• [Capital_directory] is the path to your Capital installation

50 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Deleting the Library

Note
If your installation uses a CHS_HOME or CAPITAL_HOME environment
variable, you can use %CHS_HOME% or %CAPITAL_HOME% instead of
the directory path.

• [system_user] is the name of a superuser

• [system_user_password] is the password for the superuser
• [repository_directory] is the path to the repository directory
For example:
C:\MentorGraphics\capital\bin\PreMigrate.exe -partlib -u=system -w=manager -
f=C:\MentorGraphics\repository
Results
A sub-directory called Library containing a Library.xml file is created in the repository
directory.
Related Topics
Backing Up, Deleting and Restoring the Library
Deleting the Library
Importing a Back-up Library

Deleting the Library

You can delete the library (components, codes and customers) from your database. When doing
this, you use a Capital Data Migrate utility.
Prerequisites
• The latest service pack is applied to your Capital installation. The latest service packs
can be downloaded from SupportNet.
• Capital Manager is stopped.
Procedure
Run a command prompt and run one of the following commands:

For an Oracle database:

[Capital_directory]\bin\CapitalDataMigrate.exe -
sqlfile=[Capital_directory]\data\sql\oracle\DeleteLibraryParts.sql

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 51

February 2016
Introduction
Importing a Back-up Library

For an embedded database:

[Capital_directory]\bin\CapitalDataMigrate.exe -sqlfile=[Capital_directory]\
data\sql\embedded\DeleteLibraryParts.sql
Where [Capital_directory] is the path to your Capital installation. For example:
C:\MentorGraphics\capital\bin\CapitalDataMigrate.exe -
sqfile=C:\MentorGraphics\capital\ data\sql\embedded\DeleteLibraryParts.sql

Note
If your installation uses a CHS_HOME or CAPITAL_HOME environment
variable, you can use %CHS_HOME% or %CAPITAL_HOME% instead of the
directory path.

Results
The library is deleted from your database.
Related Topics
Backing Up, Deleting and Restoring the Library
Backing Up the Library
Importing a Back-up Library

Importing a Back-up Library

You can import a back-up copy of your library in XML format into your database.
You can either:

• Import a copy of the library from within Capital Library, using File > Import from the
menu. See “Importing Component Parts and Codes into the Library” on page 221. This
is the simplest method.
• Run a migration utility to import the copy of the library. See below in this topic. You
may want to do this if you automate the back-up process using command line options.
Prerequisites
• The latest service pack is applied to your Capital installation. The latest service packs
can be downloaded from SupportNet.
• Capital Manager is running.
• The back-up library XML file is saved in a sub-directory called Library within a
repository directory that the migration utility can access.

52 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Maximum Field Lengths in Capital Library

Procedure
Run a command prompt and run the following command:

[Capital_directory]\bin\Migrate.exe -partlib -u=[system_user] -

w=[system_user_password] -f=[repository_directory]
Where:
• [Capital_directory] is the path to your Capital installation

Note
If your installation uses a CHS_HOME or CAPITAL_HOME environment
variable, you can use %CHS_HOME% or %CAPITAL_HOME% instead of
the directory path.

• [system_user] is the name of a superuser

• [system_user_password] is the password for the superuser
• [repository_directory] is the path to the repository directory
For example:
C:\MentorGraphics\capital\bin\Migrate.exe -partlib -u=system -w=manager -
f=C:\MentorGraphics\repository

Caution
For the -f flag, you must specify the repository directory that contains the Library
sub-directory. Do not specify the Library sub-directory itself.

Results
The components and codes are imported into your database.
Related Topics
Backing Up, Deleting and Restoring the Library
Backing Up the Library
Deleting the Library

Maximum Field Lengths in Capital Library

This table details the maximum permitted number of characters that can be entered for
particular dialog entries within Capital Library.
For further information on the contents of dialogs see the relevant section in Component Dialog
Box and Field References.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 53

February 2016
Introduction
Maximum Field Lengths in Capital Library

Table 1-8. Maximum Field Lengths

Object Field Size
Library Object Part Number 255
Description 1024
Alternative Part Number 255
Replaced By 30
F1 30
F2 30
F3 30
F4 30
Pin Group 255
Color Code 4
Description 30
Material Code 4
Description 30
Type Code 4
Description 30
Wire Spec. Code 20
User Property Type Name 30
Description 255
Value 1024
Wire Group Code Group Name 40
Description 255
Symbol Type 64
Customer Part Number Part Number 30
Supplier Part Number Part Number 30
Housing Definition Cavity 40
Position Blocked 255
Position 40

54 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Introduction
Maximum Field Lengths in Capital Library

Table 1-8. Maximum Field Lengths (cont.)

Object Field Size
Cavities Name 40
Pin Graphic 255
Pin Group 255
Part Number Part Number 30
Analysis Model Attached Model 255
Pin Property Value 255
Dressed Routes Route 10
Cavity 40
Multicore OS Spec 30
OS Color 30
Footprint Name 64
Wire Wire Color 30

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 55

February 2016
Introduction
Maximum Field Lengths in Capital Library

56 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 2
Configurable User Interface

This chapter contains details about configuring the Capital Library user interface.
Configurable User Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enabling the Configurable Library GUI Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Launching the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Exporting the User Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Importing the User Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Application Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Applicable Groups (Application Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing the Applicable Groups for an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Criteria Attributes (Application Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Editing the Criteria Attributes for an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Component Table (Application Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Editing the Component Table Columns for an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in Capital Library
68
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Component Tables (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing the Component Table Columns for a Component Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab Pages (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing the Tabs and Fields for Components Belonging to a Component Group . . . . . . . 74
Type Codes (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Configurable User Interface Overview

In addition to operating with a default set-up, Capital Library also offers the optional capability
to configure the Capital Library user interface to your own specification.
You can configure:

• How the Component Maintenance Dialog Box and Part Selection Dialog Box appear in
Capital Library

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 57

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Enabling the Configurable Library GUI Functionality

• How the Part Selection Dialog Box appears in other applications (such as Capital Logic,
Capital Project, and so on)
These applications include Capital Logic, Capital Topology, Capital Integrator, Capital
HarnessXC and Capital Project. It is possible to organize the tab pages that are displayed,
together with the various contents shown within them. You can also create your own
customized tab pages via the Capital API extensibility framework.

This extended functionality is controlled by licensing.

Library import and export is unaffected by any customized configuration settings. Even if
certain fields have been disabled from displaying on a page their corresponding attributes will
not be ignored while importing or exporting a library.

To maintain library integrity, simultaneous editing of the Configurable Library user interface is
not permitted.

Caution
If the Capital Library user interface is configured to a customized specification, then
subsequent sections of this user guide may appear incorrect or differ significantly in
appearance to the user interface layout.

Related Topics
Enabling the Configurable Library GUI Functionality
Launching the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box
Exporting the User Interface Configuration
Importing the User Interface Configuration
Application Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box

Enabling the Configurable Library GUI

Functionality
Before you can use the Configurable Library GUI functionality, the appropriate permission
must be set. Access rights to the functionality in Capital Library are controlled by Capital User.
See your Capital administrator and / or Capital User User Guide for more information.

58 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Launching the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Launching the Configure Library GUI Dialog

Box
This topic explains how to launch the Configurable Library GUI dialog box, from which you
can customize all library related user interfaces for all applications.
Once the appropriate permission has been selected in Capital User, the menu option will be
enabled by default for system level users, but will not appear for other users. The dialog box
offers the capability to configure each user interface separately, and distinctly for each
application. A system lock ensures that only one user is able to modify an application specific
configuration at a time.

Procedure
Select Actions > Configure Library GUI from the menu; the Configure Library GUI Dialog
Box is displayed.

Related Topics
Enabling the Configurable Library GUI Functionality

Exporting the User Interface Configuration

This topic explains how to export the library user interface configuration in XML format.
Procedure
1. Select File > Export GUI Configuration from the menu. The Export GUI
Configuration Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the application(s) for which you wish to export a user interface configuration.
Alternatively tick the Select All option to import the user interface configuration to all
Capital applications.
3. Specify the library configuration file to be exported to an application.
4. Click Export Configuration to begin exporting the customized library user interface.
Related Topics
Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box

Importing the User Interface Configuration

This topic explains how to import a library user interface configuration in XML format.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 59

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Importing the User Interface Configuration

Procedure
1. Select File > Import GUI Configuration from the menu. The Import GUI
Configuration Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the library configuration file name to be imported into an application.
3. Click Import Configuration to begin importing the customized library user interface.
Related Topics
Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box

60 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Application Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box

Application Nodes in the Configure Library UI

Dialog Box
These nodes expand to allow you to configure how library dialog box interfaces are displayed in
the different applications.
You can configure:

• How the Component Maintenance Dialog Box and Part Selection Dialog Box interfaces
appear in Capital Library
• How the Part Selection Dialog Box interface appears in other applications (such as
Capital Logic, Capital Project, and so on)
Applicable Groups (Application Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing the Applicable Groups for an Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Criteria Attributes (Application Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Editing the Criteria Attributes for an Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Component Table (Application Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Editing the Component Table Columns for an Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in Capital Library
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Applicable Groups (Application Level)

These settings enable you to specify which component group types are available for selection
from the Component Maintenance Dialog Box (in Capital Library) and Part Selection Dialog
Box (in each application). For example, wires, clips, grommets and connectors are used within
the Capital HarnessXC application but not in Capital Logic.
The available component groups will be listed wherever you can select a component group:

For example:

• In the Group Name field on the Base Tab of the Component Details Section.
Figure 2-1. Group Name Field on Base Tab

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 61

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Editing the Applicable Groups for an Application

• In the Value column for the Group Name attribute in the Internal Part No. table of the
Internal tab in the Component Selection Section (when Advanced Search has been
selected).
Figure 2-2. Value Column for Group Name in Internal Part No. Table

Note
In addition, you can specify tabs/fields that appear for components of each group.
See “Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box” on page 69
for further information.

Related Topics
Editing the Applicable Groups for an Application
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box

Editing the Applicable Groups for an Application

You can edit the component group types available for selection in each application.
See “Applicable Groups (Application Level)” on page 61 for more information about this
concept.

Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the application name node for
which you want to specify applicable component groups and select the Applicable

62 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Criteria Attributes (Application Level)

Groups node; an Applicable Groups window is displayed on the right of the dialog
box.
3. Select the applicable component groups for the application:
• To add a group, select it in the Available window and click Add.
• To remove a group, select it in the Selected window and click Remove.
• The Add All and Remove All buttons are available to speed up selection.
4. Click Apply.
Results
• The specified component groups are displayed as nodes underneath the application node
in the browser tree of the Configure Library GUI dialog box. These component group
nodes enable you to specify the tabs/fields that appear for components belonging to that
group. See “Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box” on
page 69.
• The Part Selection Dialog Box in the appropriate application will display only the
selected component groups. If you edited this under the Library node, the Component
Maintenance Dialog Box will also display only those component groups.
Related Topics
Applicable Groups (Application Level)
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box

Criteria Attributes (Application Level)

For a particular application, you can specify the attributes that are available as search criteria
when searching for a component in the Part Selection Dialog Box or Component Maintenance
Dialog Box without a component group name specified.
These attributes can be selected in the Attribute Name column of the Internal Part No. table of
the Internal tab in the Component Selection Section (when Advanced Search has been
selected).

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 63

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Editing the Criteria Attributes for an Application

Figure 2-3. Criteria Attributes as Displayed in Internal Part No. Table (No Group
Name Specified)

Note
It is possible to specify the attributes that are available as search criteria when a component
group name has been specified. See “Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level)” on
page 69.

Related Topics
Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component Group

Editing the Criteria Attributes for an Application

For a particular application, you can specify the attributes that are available as search criteria
when searching for a component in the Part Selection Dialog Box or Component Maintenance
Dialog Box (in Capital Library) without a component a component group name specified.
See “Criteria Attributes (Application Level)” on page 63 for an explanation of this concept.

Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the application name node for
which you want to edit the criteria attributes and select the Criteria Attributes node; a
Removed Search Criteria Attributes table is displayed on the right of the dialog box.
It shows the attributes that are not available as search criteria.

64 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Component Table (Application Level)

3. Edit the table as required:

• To add another attribute to this table (and therefore make it not available), click Add
restriction ( ); an attribute is added. Double-click that attribute and select the
appropriate one from the drop-down list.
• To remove an attribute from the table (and therefore make it available), select it and
click Remove restriction(s) ( ).

• To revert to the default selections, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).

4. Click OK or Apply.
Results
For that application, the attributes in the Removed Search Criteria Attributes table will not be
available as search criteria when searching for a component in the Part Selection dialog box or
Component Maintenance dialog box (in Capital Library) without a component group name
specified.
Note
It is possible to specify the attributes that are available as search criteria when a component
group name has been specified. See “Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level)” on
page 69.

Related Topics
Criteria Attributes (Application Level)
Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level)

Component Table (Application Level)

These settings enable you to specify which columns are visible (and their order) in the Internal
Part No. table of the Internal tab in the Component Selection section of the Component
Maintenance Dialog Box (in Capital Library) and Part Selection Dialog Box (in each
application). These are the default columns displayed when you do not specify a component
Group Name when performing a search.
Figure 2-4. Internal Part No. Table Columns (No Component Group Specified)

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 65

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Editing the Component Table Columns for an Application

Related Topics
Editing the Component Table Columns for an Application
Component Maintenance Dialog Box
Part Selection Dialog Box

Editing the Component Table Columns for an

Application
You can edit which columns are visible (and their order) in the Internal Part No. table of the
Internal tab in the Component Selection section of the Component Maintenance dialog box
(in Capital Library) and Part Selection dialog box (in each application). These are the default
columns displayed when you do not specify a component Group Name when performing a
search.
Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the application name node for
which you want to edit the visible columns and select the Component Table node; the
currently visible columns are displayed on the right of the dialog box.
3. Right-click on any of the column headers to display a drop-down list of all available
columns and edit them:
• To make a column visible, select it in the list.
• To hide a column, deselect it in the list.
• To change the order of columns, drag the column headers.

Note
Full details of the content of these columns are given in the Base Tab and Extra
Tab reference sections.

4. Click Ok or Apply; the specified component type identifiers will be made visible
against a component within the component maintenance form or part selection dialog
box.
Results
• The Internal Part No. table on the Part Selection dialog box in the appropriate
application will display only the specified columns. If you edited this under the Library
node, the Internal Part No. table on the Component Maintenance dialog box will also
display only those columns.

66 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application Level)

Note
The component group nodes in the browser tree enable you to specify the columns
that appear for components belonging to particular component groups. See
“Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box” on page 69.

Related Topics
Component Table (Application Level)
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box

Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application

Level)
These settings enable you to specify the tabs and fields that are displayed in the Component
Details section of the Component Maintenance dialog box and Part Selection dialog box (in
Capital Library) when no component has been selected in the Component Selection section.
Figure 2-5. Tabs and Fields in Component Details Section (No Component
Selected)

Related Topics
Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in Capital Library
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 67

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in Capital Library

Part Selection Dialog Box

Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the

Component Details Section in Capital Library
You can specify the tabs and fields that are displayed in the Component Details section of the
Component Maintenance dialog box and Part Selection dialog box (in Capital Library) when no
component has been selected in the Component Selection section.
Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the Library name node and
select the Tab Pages node; the currently visible tabs and their fields are displayed on the
right of the dialog box. The top half of each tab displays the currently visible fields. The
bottom half displays the hidden fields.
3. Edit the visibility and position of the fields.
Results
• Th Component Details section of the Component Maintenance dialog box and Part
Selection dialog box display only the specified tabs and fields when a component when
no component has been selected in the Component Selection Section.

Note
The component group nodes in the browser tree enable you to specify the fields that
appear on the various tabs for components belonging to particular component
groups. See “Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box” on
page 69.

Related Topics
Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application Level)
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box
Component Maintenance Dialog Box
Part Selection Dialog Box

68 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Component Group Nodes in the Configure Library UI Dialog Box

Component Group Nodes in the Configure

Library UI Dialog Box
These nodes expand to allow you to configure how library dialog box interfaces are displayed in
the different applications for components belonging to specific component groups.
You can configure:

• How the Component Maintenance Dialog Box and Part Selection Dialog Box interfaces
appear in Capital Library
• How the Part Selection Dialog Box interface appears in other applications (such as
Capital Logic, Capital Project, and so on).
Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Component Tables (Component Group Level). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing the Component Table Columns for a Component Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Tab Pages (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing the Tabs and Fields for Components Belonging to a Component Group . . . . . 74
Type Codes (Component Group Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog
Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level)

For a particular application, you can specify the attributes that are available as search criteria
when searching for a component in the Part Selection dialog box or Component Maintenance
dialog box with a component group name specified.
For example, when searching for a wire, the No. Cavities/Pins attribute is not relevant so is not
available for selection.

These attributes can be selected in the Attribute Name column of the Internal Part No. table of
the Internal tab in the Component Selection Section (when Advanced Search has been
selected and when a Group Name value has been specified). In the following example, No.
Cavities/Pins is not available in the drop-down list because a Group Name of Wire has been
specified.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 69

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component Group

Figure 2-6. Criteria Attributes as Displayed in Internal Part No. Table (Group
Name Specified)

Note
It is possible to specify the attributes that are available as search criteria when a component
group name is not specified. See “Criteria Attributes (Application Level)” on page 63.

Related Topics
Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component Group
Part Selection Dialog Box
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component

Group
For a particular application, you can specify the attributes that are available as search criteria
when searching for a component in the Part Selection dialog box or Component Maintenance
dialog box with a component group name specified.
See “Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level)” on page 69 for an explanation of this
concept.

Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.

70 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Component Tables (Component Group Level)

2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the application name node and
component group node for which you want to edit the criteria attributes and select the
Criteria Attributes node; a Removed Search Criteria Attributes table is displayed on
the right of the dialog box. It shows the attributes that are not available as search criteria.
3. Edit the table as required:
• To add another attribute to this table (and therefore make it not available), click Add
restriction ( ); an attribute is added. Double-click that attribute and select the
appropriate one from the drop-down list.
• To remove an attribute from the table (and therefore make it available), select it and
click Remove restriction(s) ( ).

• To revert to the default selections, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).

4. Click OK or Apply.
Results
For that application, the attributes in the Removed Search Criteria Attributes table will not be
available as search criteria when searching for a component in the Part Selection dialog box or
Component Maintenance dialog box (in Capital Library) with that component group name
specified.
Note
It is possible to specify the attributes that are available as search criteria when a component
group name is not specified. See “Criteria Attributes (Application Level)” on page 63.

Component Tables (Component Group Level)

For components belonging to a particular component group, these settings enable you to specify
which columns are visible (and their order) in the Internal Part No. table of the Internal tab in
the Component Selection section of the Component Maintenance dialog box (in Capital
Library) and Part Selection dialog box (in each application).
For example, if you edit these settings for the component group Device under the Logical
Design node, the specified columns are displayed when you search based on the group name
Device from within Capital Logic.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 71

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Editing the Component Table Columns for a Component Group

Figure 2-7. Internal Part No. Table Columns (Component Group of Device
Specified)

Related Topics
Editing the Component Table Columns for a Component Group
Component Maintenance Dialog Box
Part Selection Dialog Box

Editing the Component Table Columns for a

Component Group
For components belonging to a particular component group, you can specify which columns are
visible (and their order) in the Internal Part No. table of the Internal tab in the Component
Selection section of the Component Maintenance dialog box (in Capital Library) and Part
Selection dialog box (in each application).
For example, if you edit these settings for the component group Device under the Logical
Design node, the specified columns are displayed when you search based on the group name
Device from within Capital Logic.

Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the application name node and
component group node for which you want to edit the visible columns. Select the
Component Table node; the currently visible columns are displayed on the right of the
dialog box.
3. Right-click on any of the column headers to display a drop-down list of all available
columns and edit them:
• To make a column visible, select it in the list.
• To hide a column, deselect it in the list.
• To change the order of columns, drag the column headers.

72 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Tab Pages (Component Group Level)

Note
Full details of the content of these columns are given in the Base Tab and Extra
Tab reference sections.

4. Click Ok or Apply; the specified component type identifiers will be made visible
against a component within the component maintenance form or part selection dialog
box.
Results
• When you perform a search for components belonging to that component group, the
Internal Part No. table on the Part Selection Dialog Box in the appropriate application
will display only the specified columns. If you edited this under the Library node, the
Internal Part No. table on the Component Maintenance Dialog Box will also display
only those columns.

Note
The application nodes in the browser tree enable you to specify the columns that
appear by default (without a component Group Name selected). See “Editing the
Component Table Columns for an Application” on page 66.

Related Topics
Component Tables (Component Group Level)
Editing the Component Table Columns for an Application

Tab Pages (Component Group Level)

For components belonging to a particular component group, these settings enable you to specify
the tabs and fields that are displayed in the Component Details section of the Component
Maintenance dialog box (in Capital Library) and Part Selection dialog box (in each application).
For example, if you edit these settings for the component group Device under the Logical
Design node, the specified tabs and fields are displayed when you select a device in the Internal
Part No. table of the Internal tab in Capital Logic.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 73

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Editing the Tabs and Fields for Components Belonging to a Component Group

Figure 2-8. Tabs and Fields in Component Details Section (Device Selected)

Related Topics
Editing the Tabs and Fields for Components Belonging to a Component Group
Component Maintenance Dialog Box
Part Selection Dialog Box

Editing the Tabs and Fields for Components

Belonging to a Component Group
For components belonging to a particular component group, you can specify the tabs and fields
that are displayed in the Component Details section of the Component Maintenance dialog box
(in Capital Library) and Part Selection dialog box (in each application).
For example, if you edit these settings for the component group Device under the Logical
Design node, the specified tabs and fields are displayed when you select a device in the Internal
Part No. table of the Internal tab in Capital Logic.

Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.

74 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Type Codes (Component Group Level)

2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the appropriate application node
and component group node. Select the Tab Pages node; the currently visible tabs and
their fields are displayed on the right of the dialog box. The top half of each tab displays
the currently visible fields. The bottom half displays the hidden fields.
3. Edit the visibility and position of the fields.
Results
• The Component Details section of the Component Maintenance dialog box and Part
Selection dialog box display only the specified tabs and fields when a component
belonging to that component group is selected in the Internal Part No. table.

Note
The application level nodes in the browser tree enable you to specify the tabs and
fields that are displayed when no component is selected in the Internal Part No.
table. See “Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in
Capital Library” on page 68.

Related Topics
Tab Pages (Component Group Level)
Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in Capital Library
Component Maintenance Dialog Box
Part Selection Dialog Box

Type Codes (Component Group Level)

Component type codes provide a method of categorizing components beyond that offered by the
system-defined component groups. You create them manually.
See “Component Type Codes” on page 239 for more information about creating them.

They are not listed in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box automatically but you can add
them to the browser tree.

When a type code is added to the browser tree, you can configure Component Tables
(Component Group Level) and Tab Pages (Component Group Level) for it (just as you can for a
component group).

Caution
Only type codes with an associated group name can be configured. You add a type code to
the browser tree below the node for its associated component group name.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 75

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Figure 2-9. Component Type Code in Browser Tree

In this example, the component type code LRU has been added below the Device component
group.

Related Topics
Component Type Codes
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser

Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box
You can add a node for a component type code to the browser tree in the Configure Library GUI
dialog box.
This enables you to configure Component Tables (Component Group Level) and Tab Pages
(Component Group Level) for that component type code (just as you can for a component
group).

Caution
Only type codes with an associated group name can be configured. You add a type code to
the browser tree below the node for its associated component group name.

Procedure
1. Select Actions > Configure Library GUI; the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the browser tree on the left of the dialog box, expand the appropriate application node
and component group node.

Note
The component group node must be the component group that is associated with the
component type code.

3. Right-click the Type Codes node and select Add type code; the Component Type
Codes Selection Dialog Box (Configurable Library GUI) is displayed. It lists the
component type codes associated with the component group.

76 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Configurable User Interface
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

4. In the Component Type Codes table, select the component type that you want to add to
the browser tree and click OK.
Results
• The component type is added as a node below the Type Codes node.
• You can configure Component Tables (Component Group Level) or that component
type code (just as you can for a component group). Follow the Editing the Component
Table Columns for a Component Group instructions (navigating to the appropriate
component type node).
• You can configure Tab Pages (Component Group Level) for that component type code
(just as you can for a component group). Follow the Editing the Component Table
Columns for a Component Group instructions (navigating to the appropriate component
type node).
• You can remove a component type from the browser tree by right-clicking it and
selecting Remove.
• You can copy a component type node and its configuration to under a similar component
group node below a different application node. For example, you could copy it from the
Device node listed under Logical Design to the Device node under the Integrator Design
node. To do this, right-click the component type node and select Copy. Then, right-click
the component group node under the other application node and select Paste.
Related Topics
Type Codes (Component Group Level)
Component Type Codes

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 77

February 2016
Configurable User Interface
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

78 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 3
Components

This chapter contains information about creating and maintaining components in the library:
Component Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Backshells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Creating a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Adding a Termination to a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Deleting a Termination from a Backshell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Backshell Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating a Backshell Plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Backshell Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Selection of a Detached Backshell Seal in the Design Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Creating a Detached Backshell Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Cavity Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Creating a Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cavity Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Creating a Cavity Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Cavity Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Creating a Cavity Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Creating a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Creating a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Ring Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Blocked Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Creating a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dressed Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating a Dressed Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 79

February 2016
Components

Adding a Dressed Connector Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Deleting a Dressed Connector Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Creating a Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Usage Example - Creating and Using Modular Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Automatically Assigning Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interactively Assigning Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Connector Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Creating a Connector Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
COTS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Creating a COTS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Creating a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Editing a Pin Name on a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Adding a Pin to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Deleting a Pin from a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Deleting a Footprint from a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Formboard Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Creating a Formboard Fixture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Grommets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Creating a Grommet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Heat Shrink Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Creating a Heat Shrink Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Heat Shrink Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Creating an Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Blocked Insulation Displacement Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

80 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components

Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Multicore Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating a Twisted Pair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Other Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Creating an Other Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Solder Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Creating a Solder Sleeve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Creating a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Editing the Attributes of a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Creating a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Creating a Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Creating a Tube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Ultrasonic Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Creating an Ultrasonic Weld. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Creating a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Editing the Attributes of a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Common Editing Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Editing the Base Details of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Editing the Extra Details of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Assigning a Graphical Symbol to a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Deleting a Symbol from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Specifying a Customer Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting a Customer Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Specifying a Supplier Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Deleting a Supplier Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding a Property to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Editing a Property Value for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Deleting a Property from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 81

February 2016
Components

Library Part Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Editing a Cavity Name on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Specifying the Cavity Graphics of a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Adding a Cavity to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Deleting a Cavity from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Specifying Valid Mated Parts for a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Applying Scopes to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit
Together at Connector Cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Copying Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Copying Details from a Component to a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Copying Details from a Component to Other Existing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Deleting Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Usage Example - Bulk Creating and Editing of Multiple Component Details. . . . . . . . 218
Usage Example - Bulk Deletion of Multiple Component Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Importing and Exporting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Exporting the Entire Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Exporting Selected Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Importing Component Parts and Codes into the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Refreshing Symbol Library Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Changing the Background Display Color of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Searching for Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Searching for Components Using Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Searching for All Components in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Finding Where a Component Is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

82 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Component Groups

Component Groups
Capital Library provides a structure for logically grouping components of the same type such as
wires, connectors, devices and so on. The following component groups are available.
Some of these groups are only applicable to particular tools – for example an engineer working
on the logical design is unlikely to care about taping of the harness and he could not model it in
Capital Logic or Capital Integrator. However, a harness engineer working in Capital HarnessXC
will need to select tapes, so the librarian must ensure that all the necessary tape definitions are
recorded in the library.

Each of the groups has its own specialized attributes and these are divided into a series of
attribute sub-groups that are displayed on tabs in the user interface.

For example: A connector has a tab for mating that allows the librarian to specify which other
connectors can be mated with the connector. A terminal has a tab for specifying which wires
can fit.

Some of the tabs are common to all component groups. See “Common Editing Actions” on
page 184 for information about the uses of these tabs.

Table 3-1. Component Groups

Component Group Name Description
Assembly A collection of mechanical and/or electrical parts joined
together (and treated as a single entity) to perform a specific
electrical function and subject to disassembly without
degradation of any of the parts. See “Assemblies” on page 87
for information about creating and editing assemblies.
Backshell A backshell is housing on a connector that covers the rear
portion where the cable conductors connect to the connector
contacts. It provides bundle strain relief and/or protection
(physical, environmental or electromagnetic). See “Backshells”
on page 91 for information about creating and editing
backshells.
Backshell Plug A connector accessory used to plug an unused open cavity of a
backshell seal; typically a backshell seal may have several
backshell plugs for each derivative harness. See “Backshell
Plugs” on page 95 for information about creating and editing
backshell plugs.
Backshell Seal A single-part connector accessory used to block some cavities
of a connector and provide integrated sealing for all remaining
connector cavities and their terminating wires. See “Backshell
Seals” on page 96 for information about creating and editing
backshell seals.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 83

February 2016
Components
Component Groups

Table 3-1. Component Groups (cont.)

Component Group Name Description
Cavity Group A container part for a set of cavity components (terminals,
cavity seals and cavity plugs) that can be assigned to one or
more connector cavities in a single action. See “Cavity Groups”
on page 99 for information about creating and editing cavity
groups.
Cavity Plug A connector accessory inserted into a connector's unused cavity
to provide environmental protection. See “Cavity Plugs” on
page 102 for information about creating and editing cavity
plugs.
Cavity Seal A connector accessory (part or material) used to seal the gap
between a terminated wire and its cavity to provide
environmental protection. See “Cavity Seals” on page 104 for
information about creating and editing cavity seals.
Clip A non-electrical component used to retain a bundle of wires or
a harness to a physical location. See “Clips” on page 106 for
information about creating and editing clips.
Connector An electro-mechanical component that provides a separable
interface (coupling) between two sub-systems of an electronic
system. See “Connectors” on page 108 for information about
creating and editing connectors.
Connector Seal A connector accessory fitted to the face of a connector to
provide sealing (note – connector face seals are usually built-in
to connectors and do not need to be separately specified). See
“Connector Seals” on page 129 for information about creating
and editing connector seals.
Device A component with electrical behavior that is connected to other
devices by wires. See “Devices” on page 133 for information
about creating and editing devices.
Formboard Fixtures Formboard fixtures are used during the manufacturing of
harnesses to support or help route the wiring during assembly.
Fixtures can range from simple hooks and nails through to
complex parts designed specifically to match the harness
bundle profile See “Formboard Fixtures” on page 142 for
information about creating and editing fixtures.
Grommet An insulating washer inserted through a hole in another
component to prevent a wire or bundle from touching the sides
of the component. See “Grommets” on page 145 for
information about creating and editing grommets.

84 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Component Groups

Table 3-1. Component Groups (cont.)

Component Group Name Description
Heat Shrink Sleeve A bundle protection that protects a harness against moisture
ingress; it is fitted oversize and heat is applied to shrink it tight.
See “Heat Shrink Sleeves” on page 146 for information about
creating and editing heat shrink sleeves.
IDC Connector A connector that permits an electrical connection to be made at
any point along the length of a wire without the need to cut or
terminate the wire. An electrical connection is made by forcing
the wire between the sharp edges of the IDC’s metallic
contacts. The contacts remove, cut or perforate the wire’s
insulation and hold the wire tightly in place. See “Insulation
Displacement Connector (IDC)” on page 148 for information
about creating and editing them.
In-House Assembly A specialized assembly part used in Capital Harness Classic
and Capital HarnessXC; it is similar to Assembly, but it
implements different costing algorithms. See “In-House
Assembly” on page 155 for information about creating and
editing in-house assemblies.
Multicore Wire A single cable comprised of multiple wires but treated as one
part. See “Multicore Wire” on page 158 for information about
creating and editing multicore wires.
Other A general-purpose category for components that do not
conform to any of the predefined categories. Examples are
waterproof connector boots, packaging components and
stiffening rods. See “Other Component” on page 163 for
information about creating and editing other components.
Solder Sleeve A component used to electrically join two or more conductors;
it consists of a tubular sleeve in which the wires are located.
Heat is applied to fuse it. See “Solder Sleeves” on page 165 for
information about creating and editing solder sleeves.
Splice A component used to electrically join two or more conductors.
See “Splices” on page 168 for information about creating and
editing splices.
Tape A bundle protection component used for continuous wrapping
of several wires or tubes, or applied at particular locations (spot
tape) for joining fixings to a bundle. See “Tapes” on page 171
for information about creating and editing tapes.
Terminal A component attached to a conductor to facilitate electrical/
mechanical connection (current flow) with a connector. See
“Terminals” on page 175 for information about creating and
editing terminals.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 85

February 2016
Components
Component Groups

Table 3-1. Component Groups (cont.)

Component Group Name Description
Tube A bundle protection component that surrounds the bundle. It
can be split or unsplit. See “Tubes” on page 177 for
information about creating and editing tubes.
Ultrasonic Weld An ultrasonic weld is a manufacturing process that incurs a
cost. It is not a component. The process electrically joins two or
more conductors. During harness design, you can specify that
this process is used at a particular location. See “Ultrasonic
Welds” on page 179 for information about creating and editing
ultrasonic welds.
Wire A bare or insulated conductor. See “Wires” on page 182 for
information about creating and editing wires.

86 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Assemblies

Assemblies
The component group Assembly is used when a component is made up of several sub-
components but is purchased under one part number (the assembly part number). The sub-
components do not appear on a bill-of-materials (BOM).
A good example is a cable assembly.

Figure 3-1. Assembly

The assembly could comprise of a single connector moulded on to the end of two wires of a
particular length. The other ends of the wires would be cut blunt.

When this is used on a harness, the wires are not required to appear on a BOM but are required
to be on the cut sheet so that the wires are the correct length, have the correct strip length and a
cut back for the outer sheath. It is also necessary to specify that the wires at the assembly end do
not require terminals.

If the wires came pre-cut and terminated, then these wires would not be required to appear on
the cut sheet either.

The following topics explain how to create and edit assemblies:

Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Creating an Assembly
You can create an assembly.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 87

February 2016
Components
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly

3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Assembly, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities (if required).
5. Click the Assembly Details Tab where you enter the sub-components in the assembly.
a. Click New on the Assembly Details Tab. A row is added to the Sub-Component
table.
b. Specify the Sub-Component, the Quantity and Amount.
c. Click Apply; the details of the sub-component are added to the Sub-Component
table and the values specified on the Base Tab are added to the Internal Part No.
table.
d. Repeats steps a to c to for each sub-component in the assembly.
Results
• The assembly is now created.

Note
You can edit the assembly later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components”
on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the assembly from the library only when it
has a Status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration

Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly

You can add a sub-component to an existing assembly.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.

88 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly

2. Enter the internal part number of the assembly in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the assembly in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the assembly.
4. Click the Assembly Details Tab.
5. Click New; a row is added to the Sub-Component table.
6. Specify a Sub-Component, the Quantity and Amount.
7. Click Apply; the details of the sub-component are added to the Sub-Component table.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each sub-component to be added.
Related Topics
Creating an Assembly
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration

Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly

You can delete (remove) a sub-component from an existing assembly.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the assembly in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the assembly in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the assembly.
4. Click the Assembly Details Tab.
5. Select the sub-component in the Sub-Component table.
6. Click Delete; the sub-component is dimmed-out.
7. Click Apply; the sub-component is removed from the Sub-Component table.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 89

February 2016
Components
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly

Related Topics
Creating an Assembly
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration

90 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Backshells

Backshells
A backshell is housing on a connector that covers the rear portion where the cable conductors
connect to the connector contacts. It provides bundle strain relief and/or protection (physical,
environmental or electromagnetic).
Figure 3-2. Backshell

The following topics explain how to create and edit backshells:

Creating a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Adding a Termination to a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Deleting a Termination from a Backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Creating a Backshell
You can create a backshell.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Backshell, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Terminations.
5. Click Apply; the specified values are added to the Internal Part No. table and the
terminations are added to the Termination Names Tab.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 91

February 2016
Components
Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell

Results
• The backshell is now created.
• You can now start Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell and Adding a
Termination to a Backshell.

Note
You can edit the backshell later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components”
on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the backshell from the library only when it
has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell
Adding a Termination to a Backshell
Deleting a Termination from a Backshell

Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell

You can edit the name of a termination on a backshell.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the backshell in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the backshell in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the backshell.
4. Click the Termination Names Tab.
5. Select the termination name in the Termination Name table; the values for that name are
displayed in the fields below the table.
6. Edit the name in the Name field.
7. Click Apply; the termination name is updated in the Termination Name table.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each termination name to be edited.
Related Topics
Creating a Backshell
Adding a Termination to a Backshell

92 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Adding a Termination to a Backshell

Deleting a Termination from a Backshell

Adding a Termination to a Backshell

You can add a termination to a backshell.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the backshell in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the backshell in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the backshell.
4. Click the Termination Names Tab.
5. Click New; a message asks you to confirm the addition. Click Yes; a new row is added
to the Termination Name table.
6. Specify the name in the Name field.
7. Click Apply; the row in the Termination Name table is updated and the No.
Terminations on the Base Tab increases accordingly.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each termination that you want to add.
Related Topics
Creating a Backshell
Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell
Deleting a Termination from a Backshell

Deleting a Termination from a Backshell

You can delete (remove) a termination from a backshell.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the backshell in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the backshell in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the backshell.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 93

February 2016
Components
Deleting a Termination from a Backshell

4. Click the Termination Names Tab.

5. Select the termination in the Termination Name table; the fields below the table display
the values for the termination.
6. Click Delete; the row for the termination is dimmed.
7. Click Apply; the row for the termination is removed from the Termination Name table
and the No. Terminations on the Base Tab decreases accordingly.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each termination that you want to delete.
Related Topics
Creating a Backshell
Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell
Adding a Termination to a Backshell

94 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Backshell Plugs

Backshell Plugs
A backshell plug is a connector accessory used to plug an unused, open cavity of a backshell;
typically a backshell may have several backshell plugs for each derivative harness. Backshell
plugs can be added manually as extra components at a cavity or selected automatically by the
system. Backshell plugs can be used for both integral and detached backshell seals.
In the Capital HarnessXC application, a backshell plug will be selected from the housing
definitions of the main node component if an integral backshell seal is used.

The following topic explains how to create backshell plugs:

Creating a Backshell Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Creating a Backshell Plug

You can create a backshell plug.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Backshell Plug, Type Code, Color Code,
and Material Code.
5. Click Apply; the specified values are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The backshell plug is now created.

Note
You can edit the backshell plug later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the backshell plug from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 95

February 2016
Components
Backshell Seals

Backshell Seals
A backshell seal is a component used to seal all of the cavities of a connector at once. It plugs
some cavities of the connector and seals all of the remaining connector cavities and their
terminating wires.
You can create a detached backshell seal. That is, an optional component added as an extra
component at a node. It has its own part number that appears on the BOM and is usually defined
in the housing definitions of the connector. There is a component group called Backshell Seal
for detached backshell seals.

Note
Cavities can be ‘pre-cut’ or not. This will have implications for labor costing calculations
because of the time taken to insert the wires into the cavities. For detached backshell seals,
this is specified on the Seal Attributes Tab.

The range of wire CSAs for which a detached backshell seal is suitable must be specified on its
Seal Attributes tab.

Selection of a Detached Backshell Seal in the Design Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Creating a Detached Backshell Seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Selection of a Detached Backshell Seal in the

Design Applications
The selection of detached backshell seals is performed by the system during processing options
(or composite breakdown for a composite harness) in applications such as Capital HarnessXC
and Capital ModularXC:
• The detached backshell seal will be selected from the housing definitions of the main
node component based on the priority (factor).
• The selection will use the CSA range specified in the attributes of the backshell seal.
• A warning is issued if no suitable detached backshell seal can be selected.

Note
If a backshell seal has been manually placed at a node, then an extra one will not be
selected but a warning will be given.

Creating a Detached Backshell Seal

You can create a detached backshell seal.

96 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal

Caution
Although we are creating a detached backshell seal. The group name for it is simply called
Backshell Seal.

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Backshell Seal, Type Code, Color Code,
and Material Code.
5. Click the Seal Attributes Tab.
6. Specify values in the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total. C.S.A. and Pre Cut fields.
7. Click Apply; the values specified on the Base tab are added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
Results
• The backshell seal is now created.
• You can now start Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal.

Note
You can edit the backshell seal later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the backshell seal from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal

Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal

You can edit (modify) the seal attributes of an existing backshell seal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 97

February 2016
Components
Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal

2. Enter the internal part number of the backshell seal in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the backshell seal in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the backshell seal.
4. Click the Seal Attributes Tab.
5. Edit the values in the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total. C.S.A. and Pre Cut fields as
required.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Detached Backshell Seal

98 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Cavity Groups

Cavity Groups
A cavity group is a container part number for a set of cavity components (terminals, cavity seals
and cavity plugs), that can be assigned to one or more connector cavities in a single action.
You assign a cavity group to connector cavities on the Housing Tab for the connector.

The benefit of using a cavity group in the housing definition of a connector is that any changes
made to the components in the group are replicated automatically to all connector cavities that
use the cavity group.

The following topics explain how to create and edit cavity groups:

Creating a Cavity Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a Cavity Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Creating a Cavity Group

You can create a cavity group.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Cavity Group, Type Code, Color Code,
and Material Code.
5. Click the Cavity Group Details Tab where you specify the connector cavity components
in a cavity group.
a. Click New; a row is added to the Sub-Component table.
b. Specify a connector cavity component in the Sub-Component field.
c. Click Apply; the Sub-Component table displays the sub-component details in the
row and the values specified on the Base Tab are added to the Internal Part No. table.
d. Repeats steps a to d for each connector cavity component that you want to add.
Results
• The cavity group is now created.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 99

February 2016
Components
Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity Group

Note
You can edit the cavity group later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the cavity group from the library
only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity Group
Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a Cavity Group

Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity

Group
You can add a connector cavity component (sub-component) to an existing cavity group.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the cavity group in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the cavity group in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the cavity group.
4. Click the Cavity Group Details Tab.
5. Click New; a row is added to the Sub-Component table.
6. Specify a connector cavity component in the Sub-Component field.
7. Click Apply; the Sub-Component table displays the sub-component details in the row.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each connector cavity component to be added.
Related Topics
Creating a Cavity Group
Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a Cavity Group

Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a

Cavity Group
You can delete (remove) a connector cavity component (sub-component) from an existing
cavity group.

100 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a Cavity Group

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the cavity group in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the cavity group in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the cavity group.
4. Click the Cavity Group Details Tab.
5. Select the connector cavity component in the Sub-Component table and click Delete; the
connector cavity component is dimmed.
6. Click Apply; the connector cavity component is removed from the Sub-Component
table.
Related Topics
Creating a Cavity Group
Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity Group

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 101

February 2016
Components
Cavity Plugs

Cavity Plugs
A cavity plug is a connector accessory that can be inserted into an unused connector cavity to
create a dust cap and provide environmental protection.
Figure 3-3. Cavity Plugs

The following topic explains how to create cavity plugs:

Creating a Cavity Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Creating a Cavity Plug

You can create a cavity plug.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Cavity Plug, Type Code, Color Code, and
Material Code.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. table.
Results
• The cavity plug is now created.

102 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Creating a Cavity Plug

Note
You can edit the cavity plug later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the cavity plug from the library
only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 103

February 2016
Components
Cavity Seals

Cavity Seals
A cavity seal is a connector accessory used to seal the gap between a terminated wire and its
cavity to provide environmental protection.
Figure 3-4. Cavity Seals

Creating a Cavity Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Creating a Cavity Seal

You can create a cavity seal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Cavity Seal, Type Code, Color Code, and
Material Code.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The cavity seal is now created.
• For the cavity seal, you can now start Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for
a Component and Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a
Component.

Note
You can edit the cavity seal later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the cavity seal from the library
only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

104 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Creating a Cavity Seal

Related Topics
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component
Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 105

February 2016
Components
Clips

Clips
A clip is added to a harness so that it can be attached to the vehicle body.
Figure 3-5. Clip

The following topic explains how to create a clip:

Creating a Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Creating a Clip
You can create a clip.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Clip, Type Code, Color Code, and
Material Code.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. table.
Results
• The clip is now created.

106 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Creating a Clip

Note
You can edit the clip later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components” on
page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the clip from the library only when it has a
status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 107

February 2016
Components
Connectors

Connectors
There are various ways to create and edit connectors in the library.
Creating a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Ring Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Blocked Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Creating a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dressed Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Creating a Dressed Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Adding a Dressed Connector Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Deleting a Dressed Connector Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Creating a Modular Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Usage Example - Creating and Using Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Automatically Assigning Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interactively Assigning Modular Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Creating a Connector
You can create a connector.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Connector, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The connector is now created.

108 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Creating a Connector

• For the connector, you can now start performing the actions listed as Related Topics
below.

Note
You can edit the connector later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components”
on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the connector from the library only when it
has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Specifying the Cavity Graphics of a Connector
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component
Specifying Valid Mated Parts for a Connector
Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector
Adding a Cavity to a Component
Deleting a Cavity from a Component
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 109

February 2016
Components
Ring Terminals

Ring Terminals
A ring terminal is a type of connector that is shaped like an “O” and fits over a stud making a
very secure connection.
Ring terminals are applied to designs in the same manner as connectors. However, ring
terminals only have one cavity and therefore cavity name information is not required.

Figure 3-6. Ring Terminal

Note
Terminal attributes including Strip Length, Mult Strip Length, Add On and Knock Off can
also easily be defined and, if not visible by default, should be enabled for view on the Base
Tab using the Configurable User Interface.

Stud Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Ring Terminal Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating a Ring Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Creating a Ring Terminal Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Stud Pin
You can define stud pins for a device together with the set of ring terminals that are compatible
with each stud. Within the design tools (that is, Capital Logic and Capital Integrator), you can
mate one or more ring terminals to a stud pin and when you assign a library part, the system
offers only the compatible parts.
You specify whether a pin is a stud pin on the Pin Names tab for a device.

You specify the valid matings on the Housing tab for the device.

110 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Ring Terminals

Related Topics
Creating a Ring Terminal
Creating a Ring Terminal Group
Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device
Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin

Ring Terminal Group

You can create a group of ring terminals that can be selected when specifying the valid ring
terminals for a stud pin. This means you do not have to enter the individual ring terminals
separately.
Related Topics
Creating a Ring Terminal
Creating a Ring Terminal Group
Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device
Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin

Creating a Ring Terminal

You can create a ring terminal for mating with stud pins on devices.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name as Terminal, Type Code as TERM, Color
Code, Material Code, No. Cavities as 1 and also any terminal information including
Strip Length, Mult Strip Length, Add On and Knock Off.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The ring terminal is now created.
• You can edit the ring terminal later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components”
on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 111

February 2016
Components
Ring Terminals

required and clicking Apply. You can delete the ring terminal from the library only
when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.
• You can specify it as a valid mate for a stud pin on a device.
Related Topics
Creating a Ring Terminal Group
Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device
Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin

Creating a Ring Terminal Group

You can create a group of ring terminals that can be selected when specifying the valid ring
terminals for a stud pin.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name as Ring Terminal Group, Type Code as
TERM, Color Code and Material Code.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the Ring Terminal Group Details Tab, add ring terminals to the group:
a. Click New below the table; a blank row is added to the table.
b. In the Sub-Component field, specify the part number of the ring terminal. You can
click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to access the Part Selection
Dialog Box where you search for and select a ring terminal.
c. Specify a Factor for the ring terminal. That is, a priority number to indicate which
one should be selected as the default when the group is selected elsewhere in the
Capital applications. Higher numbers have the highest priority; for example, 15 is
higher than 2.
d. Click Apply; the row in the table updates with the ring terminal details.
e. Repeat steps a to d for each ring terminal to be added.
Results
• The ring terminal group is now created.

112 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Ring Terminals

• You can edit the ring terminal group later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the ring terminal group from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.
• You can specify it as a valid group of ring terminals for mating with a stud pin on a
device.
Related Topics
Creating a Ring Terminal
Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device
Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin

Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device

You indicate whether a pin is a stud pin on the Pin Names tab for a device.
Prerequisites
The device is selected in the Internal Part Number table at the top of the Component
Maintenance dialog.

Procedure
1. Click the Pin Names Tab; its table lists the pins on the device.
2. Select the pin that you want to make a stud pin; its details are displayed in the fields
below the table.
3. Select the Stud Pin option and click Apply; a tick appears in the Stud column of the
table row for the pin.
Results
• You can specify the valid ring terminals for mating with the stud pin in the housing for
the device.
• If the device has a footprint, you cannot map the stud pin in the footprint.
Related Topics
Creating a Ring Terminal
Creating a Ring Terminal Group
Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 113

February 2016
Components
Ring Terminals

Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin

On the Housing tab for a device, you can specify the ring terminals that can mate with a stud
pin. When doing this, you select a ring terminal group and/or individual ring terminals.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the connector.
4. Click the Housing Tab; it lists the sub-components that have already been added to its
housing definition.
5. Click New below the table; a new table row is added.
6. In the Sub-Component field, specify the part number of a ring terminal or ring terminal
group. You can click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to access the Part
Selection Dialog Box where you search for and select a part number; the Status and
Group Name fields update automatically.
7. Enter a Quantity of 1 and specify the name of the Stud Pin.
8. Click Apply; the table row updates with the specified values.
9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 for each valid mating of a stud pin to a ring terminal or ring terminal
group.
Results
• When you use the device and stud pin in Capital Logic or Capital Integrator, you can
mate one or more of the valid ring terminals to the stud pin.
• In the design applications, only the valid ring terminal parts are available when you use
the Part Selection dialog box to select a part for a ring terminal connected to a stud pin.

Note
If no valid ring terminals have been defined for the stud pin in Capital Library, all
ring terminal parts are available in the Part Selection dialog box.

Related Topics
Creating a Ring Terminal
Creating a Ring Terminal Group
Specifying a Stud Pin on a Device

114 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Blocked Connectors

Blocked Connectors
A blocked connector has one or more blocked cavities. Blocked cavities do not contain
terminals and cannot be used in other applications.
For example, a cavity can be blocked by a plug or a six-way connector can be mated with a five-
way connector so that one cavity cannot be used.

If a cavity is used in a footprint pin mapping or a mating relationship, you cannot block it.

If a symbol is associated with a connector, you cannot block any cavities on that connector.

Related Topics
Creating a Blocked Connector
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector

Creating a Blocked Connector

You can create a blocked connector and specify the blocked cavities.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Connector, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
6. On the Cavity Names Tab, specify the blocked cavities:
a. In the Cavity Name table, click a cavity to be blocked and select the Blocked option.
b. Click Apply; a tick is displayed in the Blocked column for that cavity and the No.
Cavities is reduced.
c. Repeat steps a to c for each blocked cavity.
7. Click Apply.
Results
• The blocked connector is now created.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 115

February 2016
Components
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector

Note
You can edit the blocked connector later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the blocked connector from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Blocked Connectors
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector

Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector

You can unblock a cavity in a blocked connector.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the connector.
4. Click the Cavity Names Tab and select the blocked cavity in the Cavity Name table.
Unselect the Blocked option.
5. Click Apply; the tick is removed from the Blocked column for that cavity and the No.
Cavities is increased.
6. Repeat steps 4 to 5 for each cavity to be unblocked.
Related Topics
Blocked Connectors
Creating a Blocked Connector
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector

Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector

You can block a cavity in a blocked connector.

116 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Dressed Connectors

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the connector.
4. Click the Cavity Names Tab and select the cavity in the Cavity Name table. Select the
Blocked option.
5. Click Apply; a tick is added to the Blocked column for that cavity and the No. Cavities
is reduced.
6. Repeat steps 4 to 5 for each cavity to be blocked.
Related Topics
Blocked Connectors
Creating a Blocked Connector
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Connector

Dressed Connectors
A dressed connector can accommodate different wire lengths.
This can be required when:

• The connector can be orientated on the harness such that wires terminating at different
cavities require different add-on or knock-off length values.
• The connector can have wires entering by several directions (routes) that require varying
wire lengths (for example, a fuse box).
In both cases, the connector’s associated wire lengths are affected. Each method of entry to the
connector is designated a route name that has an associated cavity and add-on or knock-off
value.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 117

February 2016
Components
Creating a Dressed Connector

Figure 3-7. Dressed Connector

Related Topics
Creating a Dressed Connector
Adding a Dressed Connector Route
Deleting a Dressed Connector Route

Creating a Dressed Connector

You can create a dressed connector and specify the routes into it.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Connector, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities.
5. Click the Dressed Routes Tab where you specify the routes into the connector and their
associated values.
a. On the Dressed Routes Tab, click New; a row is added to the Route table.

118 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Adding a Dressed Connector Route

b. Specify values for the Route, Cavity, Wire Addon and Wire Knock Off.
c. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Route table and the specified
values on the Base Tab are displayed in the Internal Part No. table.
d. Repeat steps a to d to for each route into the connector.
Results
• The dressed connector is now created.

Note
You can edit the dressed connector later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the dressed connector from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Dressed Connectors
Adding a Dressed Connector Route
Deleting a Dressed Connector Route

Adding a Dressed Connector Route

You can add a dressed route to an existing connector.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the connector in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the connector in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the connector.
4. Click the Dressed Routes Tab; it lists the existing routes into the connector and their
associated values.
a. On the Dressed Routes Tab, click New; a row is added to the Route table.
b. Specify values for the Route, Cavity, Wire Addon and Wire Knock Off.
c. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Route table.
d. Repeat steps a to c for each route to be added.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 119

February 2016
Components
Deleting a Dressed Connector Route

Related Topics
Dressed Connectors
Creating a Dressed Connector
Deleting a Dressed Connector Route

Deleting a Dressed Connector Route

You can delete (remove) a dressed route from an existing connector.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the connector in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the connector in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the connector.
4. Click the Dressed Routes Tab; it lists the existing routes into the connector and their
associated values.
5. Click Delete Route; a message asks which route you want to delete.
6. Enter the route name and click OK, the route is dimmed in the Route table.
7. Click Apply; the route is removed from the Route table.
Related Topics
Dressed Connectors
Creating a Dressed Connector
Adding a Dressed Connector Route

Modular Connector
A modular connector is a family of sub-connectors.

120 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Modular Connector

For example:

Figure 3-8. Example Modular Connector

This example modular connector has eight insert cavities, each of which can accommodate two-
or three-terminal sub-connectors.

The eight cavities are modeled as positions. Positions are abstract location zones on a connector
to which sub-components can be assigned. The positions can be defined using numeric,
alphabetic or alpha-numeric values. For the above example, the positions could be defined as
follows:

Figure 3-9. Example Modular Connector Positions

Additional positions can be created to model the insertion of sub-connectors spanning two
cavities:

Figure 3-10. Example Additional Positions

It is not possible to place a three-way sub-connector in position 1 if a 4-way sub-connector has

been inserted into position 9, effectively sitting in positions 1 and 2. In this application suite,

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 121

February 2016
Components
Creating a Modular Connector

this concept is called blocking, and blocking information is used to restrict the possible
combinations of sub-connectors to those that can physically be built in the factory.

Related Topics
Creating a Modular Connector
Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position
Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position

Creating a Modular Connector

You can create a modular connector and assign sub-connectors (sub-components) to positions
in it.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No. for the modular connector.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Connector, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities.
5. Click the Housing Tab where you specify the sub-connectors and positions to which
they are assigned.
a. On the Housing Tab, click New; a row for a sub-component is added to the Housing
table.
b. Specify a sub-connector in the Sub-Component field.
c. Enter a Quantity of 1 to indicate that only one of these sub-connectors will fit in the
position that you will specify.
d. Select the Mode of Position.
e. In the First Position field, specify the position into which the sub-connector is
placed, using numeric, alphabetic or alpha-numeric values.

Note
The Last Position field is only applicable to cavities; positions are not supported.

f. Specify the Positions Blocked by placing the sub-connector in that position.

122 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position

g. Click Apply; the values specified for the sub-connector are displayed in the Housing
table and the values specified on the Base Tab are displayed in the Internal Part No.
table.
h. Repeat steps a to g to for each sub-connector.
Results
• The modular connector is now created.

Note
You can edit the modular connector later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the modular connector from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Modular Connector
Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position
Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position

Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular

Connector Position
You can assign a sub-connector (sub-component) to a position in an existing modular
connector.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the modular connector in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the modular connector in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the modular connector.
4. Click the Housing Tab; it displays the sub-connectors that have been assigned to
positions in the modular connector.
5. On the Housing Tab, click New; a row for a sub-component is added to the Housing
table.
6. Specify a sub-connector in the Sub-Component field.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 123

February 2016
Components
Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position

7. Enter a Quantity of 1 to indicate that only one of these sub-connectors will fit in the
position that you will specify.
8. Select the Mode of Position.
9. In the First Position field, specify the position into which the sub-connector is placed,
using numeric, alphabetic or alpha-numeric values.
10. Specify the Positions Blocked by placing the sub-connector in that position.
11. Click Apply; the values specified for the sub-connector are displayed in the Housing
table.
12. Repeat steps 5 to 11 for each sub-connector to be added.
Related Topics
Modular Connector
Creating a Modular Connector
Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position

Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular

Connector Position
You can delete (remove) a sub-connector (sub-component) from a position in an existing
modular connector.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the modular connector in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays the modular connector.
3. Select the modular connector in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the modular connector.
4. Click the Housing Tab; it displays the sub-connectors that have been assigned to
positions in the modular connector.
5. Click on the sub-connector in the Housing table and click Delete; the sub-connector is
dimmed in the Housing table.
6. Click Apply; the sub-connector is removed from the Housing table.
Related Topics
Modular Connector
Creating a Modular Connector

124 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Example - Creating and Using Modular Connectors

Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position

Usage Example - Creating and Using Modular

Connectors
This usage example firstly describes how to create modular connector and then two alternative
methods (automatic and interactive) for using them on designs.
Procedure
1. It is often the librarian's task to study different modular connectors and define them in
Capital Library by following the steps detailed below in the housing definition tab of the
library part for the modular connector/outer shell.
2. Add all the sub-connectors that can fit in one way or another into the shell.
3. Add terminals, in case this connector can take both wires with terminals and sub-
connector modules.
4. Specify the range of positions (locations) that each sub-connector can be placed at.
5. Specify the positions (locations) that are "blocked" when each sub-connector is placed.
6. Specify the cavities that terminals can terminate at on the modular connector.
Results
The modular connector is created, as specified and available for use in your designs. There are
two ways to represent modular connectors on the design, depending on how the data is
presented on the wiring side, which can vary depending on your flow. These are detailed in
Automatically Assigning Modular Connectors and Interactively Assigning Modular
Connectors.

Automatically Assigning Modular Connectors

This topic describes cases where the wiring side has the sub connectors represented on the
diagram, and perhaps also the modular connector as well.
Procedure
1. All connectors are synchronized into Capital HarnessXC, and with the sub-connectors
and the modular connector present on the design, you can right click on one of the sub-
modules and select "Associate Connector".

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 125

February 2016
Components
Interactively Assigning Modular Connectors

2. Next select one of the available connector positions to place the sub-module into (if the
library definition dictates that there is more than one fitting location for this sub-
module).

3. The sub-connector can also be moved automatically to the location of its parent
connector.

4. If there is no matching housing definition for any of the modular connectors placed on
the design, then a warning message is displayed.

Interactively Assigning Modular Connectors

This topic describes how to manually create sub-modules from the modular connector
definition.

126 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Interactively Assigning Modular Connectors

Procedure
1. Select the Modular tab on the parent connector and enter a name for each sub-connector
from the list on the left hand side.

2. Part selection is automatically filtered based on the housing definition for the modular
parent.

3. Once all the required sub-connectors are defined on the parent, they are laid out on the
diagram at the end of zero-length bundles from their parent; you can then change the

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 127

February 2016
Components
Interactively Assigning Modular Connectors

layout to match the desired look. Styling can also be configured to show special graphics
to indicate the modular nature of the connector - as shown below.

4. Finally, the Bill of Materials will show all sub-connectors as well as the parent as per
their respective library definitions, which can be overridden on the instance in the design
if you so choose.

128 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Connector Seals

Connector Seals
A connector seal is a connector accessory fitted to the face of a connector to provide sealing. It
prevents penetration of moisture that leads to contact corrosion and generates an initial tension
between two halves of a connector.
Figure 3-11. Connector Seal

The following topic explains how to create connector seals:

Creating a Connector Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Creating a Connector Seal

You can create a connector seal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Connector Seal, Type Code, Color Code,
and Material Code.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The connector seal is now created.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 129

February 2016
Components
Creating a Connector Seal

Note
You can edit the connector seal later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the connector seal from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

130 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
COTS Cables

COTS Cables
Commercially Off the Shelf cables are purchased in their made-up form containing multi-
conductors with one or more pre-connected connectors.

Creating a COTS Cable

You can create a COTS cable by designing it in a Capital Logic design and saving it as an
assembly with connectivity in your Capital Library database. Once it has been saved in the
database, the COTS cable can be inserted into other designs.
Procedure
1. Create an assembly in Capital Library:
a. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main
Menu. The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
b. Enter an Internal Part No.
c. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part
No. table.
d. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Assembly, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code.
e. Click Apply.
2. Design the COTS cable in a Capital Logic design.

Note
You may want to create a project with specific domain access that your librarian
uses to create COTS cables for saving as assemblies in Capital Library.

3. With the Capital Logic design open, select Actions > Library Part > Save design into
Assembly; the Part Selection dialog box displays.
4. Search for the assembly part that you created in Capital Library, select it and click
Insert; a message displays and asks whether you want to update the part in the library.
5. Click Proceed.
Results
The library part for the assembly updates with the COTS cable details and connectivity.
If the assembly part already has any details, the system removes them and replaces them with
the details and connectivity from the design.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 131

February 2016
Components
Creating a COTS Cable

Note
The Capital Library database logs the connectivity so you do not have to keep the design.
However, you may want to keep it for the purpose of updating the COTS cable design later
and re-saving it to the assembly part.

You can insert the COTS cable into Capital Logic designs.
You can export the COTS cable from the library database and import into another Capital
database.
Caution
During a component import, Merge mode is used in case of part number conflicts, except in
the following scenarios:

If the incoming part is a COTS cable, this results in a COTS cable with assembly details and
connectivity from the imported part. If the incoming part is an assembly and the existing part is
a COTS cable, the system removes the connectivity and updates just the assembly details.

Related Topics
COTS Cables
Importing and Exporting Components

132 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Devices

Devices
A device is a component with electrical behavior that is connected to other devices by wires.
It can be anything in a vehicle, for example, a radio, a light, a fuse box:

Figure 3-12. Fuse Box

The following topics explain how to create and edit devices:

Creating a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Editing a Pin Name on a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Adding a Pin to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Deleting a Pin from a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Deleting a Footprint from a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Creating a Device
You can create a device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 133

February 2016
Components
Editing a Pin Name on a Device

2. Enter an Internal Part No.

3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Device, Type Code, Color Code, Material
Code, Strip Length, Mult Strip Length, Add On, Knock Off and No. Pins.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The device is now created.
• For the device, you can now start performing the actions listed as Related Topics below.

Note
You can edit the device later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components” on
page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the device from the library only when it has
a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing a Pin Name on a Device
Adding a Pin to a Device
Deleting a Pin from a Device
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins

Editing a Pin Name on a Device

You can edit (modify) a pin name on an existing device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.
4. Click the Pin Names Tab.
5. Select the pin name in the Pin Name table; the values for that name are displayed in the
fields below the table.

134 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Adding a Pin to a Device

6. Edit the name in the Name field.

7. Click Apply; the pin name is updated in the Pin Name table.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each pin name that you want to edit.
Related Topics
Creating a Device
Adding a Pin to a Device
Deleting a Pin from a Device
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins

Adding a Pin to a Device

You can add a pin to an existing device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.
4. Click the Pin Names Tab.
5. Click New; a message asks you to confirm the addition. Click Yes; a new row is added
to the Pin Name table.
6. Specify the name in the Name field.
7. Click Apply; the row in the Pin Name table is updated and the No. Pins on the Base Tab
increases accordingly.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each pin that you want to add.
Related Topics
Creating a Device
Editing a Pin Name on a Device
Deleting a Pin from a Device
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 135

February 2016
Components
Deleting a Pin from a Device

Deleting a Pin from a Device

You can delete (remove) a pin from an existing device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.
4. Click the Pin Names Tab.
5. Select the pin in the Pin Name table; the fields below the table display the values for the
pin.
6. Click Delete; the row for the pin is dimmed.
7. Click Apply; the row for the pin is removed from the Pin Name table and the No. Pins
on the Base Tab decreases accordingly.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each pin that you want to delete.
Related Topics
Creating a Device
Editing a Pin Name on a Device
Adding a Pin to a Device
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins

Editing the Attributes of Device Pins

You can edit (modify) the attributes of an existing pin on a device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.

136 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Footprint

4. Click the Pin Attributes Tab; the Pin Attributes table displays the attributes for the pins
on the device.
5. Edit the attributes for the pins in the table.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Device
Editing a Pin Name on a Device
Adding a Pin to a Device
Deleting a Pin from a Device

Footprint
Footprints enable you to map device pins to a connector’s cavities.
A device footprint is a specific pin/cavity mapping pattern that is identified by a single name.
By specifying more than one footprint for a device, you can vary the connection configuration
for different applications of the same device.

For example, a device may require a different pin mapping (footprint) when it is used in a
vehicle model designed for the US market, compared to when it is used in the same vehicle
model designed for the European market. One footprint could therefore represent the US
mapping and a second footprint could represent the European pin mapping.

For any device with multiple footprints, one footprint must be labeled as the default. The default
is automatically used for the device when it is placed in a design.

There are two types of footprint:

• Harness Connector
A device can have multiple harness connector footprints.
• Device Connector
A device can have only one device connector footprint.
Related Topics
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint
Deleting a Footprint from a Device

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 137

February 2016
Components
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device

Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device

You can add (define) a harness connector footprint for an existing device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.
4. Click the Footprints Tab; it displays the existing footprints for the device.
5. Click the New Footprint ( ) button above the Footprint list; a message tells you to
ensure that pin names are updated with symbol pin names.

Note
It is optional whether you associate a symbol to the device. The message applies
only if you have a symbol associated.

6. Click Yes; the footprint is added to the Footprint list.

7. Edit the footprint name (by double-clicking it) and ensure the Footprint Type column
( ) displays the harness connector symbol (you can change this by clicking the icon
in the column).
8. Add the footprint connectors to the Connector table (the table in the middle of the tab, its
header displays the footprint name and Harness Connector):
a. Click the New Footprint Pin Mapping ( ) button at the top of the connector table;
the connector is added to the table.
b. Edit the connector name as required.
c. Double-click the Part Number cell and either manually enter a connector part
number or click the ellipsis (...) button to select a part number; cavities from the
connector are automatically mapped to device pins.
d. Repeat steps a to c for each connector to be added to the footprint.
9. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Footprint
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device
Deleting a Footprint from a Device

138 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device

Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device

You can add (define) a device connector footprint to an existing device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.
4. Click the Footprints Tab; it displays the existing footprints for the device.
5. Click the New Footprint ( ) button above the Footprint list; a message tells you to
ensure that pin names are updated with symbol pin names.

Note
It is optional whether you associate a symbol to the device. The message applies
only if you have a symbol associated.

6. Click Yes; the footprint is added to the Footprint list.

7. Edit the footprint name as required and specify that it is a device connector footprint ( ).
8. Add the footprint connectors to the Connector table (the table in the middle of the tab, its
header displays the footprint name and Device Connector):
a. Click the New Footprint Pin Mapping ( ) button at the top of the connector table;
the connector is added to the table.
b. Edit the connector name as required.
c. Double-click the Part Number cell and either manually enter a connector part
number or click the ellipsis (...) button to select a part number; cavities from the
connector are automatically mapped to device pins.
d. Repeat steps a to c for each connector to be added to the footprint.
9. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Footprint
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint
Deleting a Footprint from a Device

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 139

February 2016
Components
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint

Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New

Footprint
You can copy an existing footprint on a device to use a template for creating a new footprint on
the same device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.
4. Click the Footprints Tab, select the existing footprint in the Footprint list and click Copy
Footprint ( ); the new footprint with a unique name is added to the Footprint list.
Note that the copy can only be a harness connector footprint ( ).

5. Edit the footprint name, connectors and mappings.

6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Footprint
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device
Deleting a Footprint from a Device

Deleting a Footprint from a Device

You can delete (remove) a device connector footprint or harness connector footprint from an
existing device.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the device in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the device in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the device.
4. Click the Footprints Tab; it displays the existing footprints for the device.

140 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Footprint from a Device

5. Select the footprint in the Footprint list and click Delete Footprint ( ); the footprint is
deleted.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Footprint
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 141

February 2016
Components
Formboard Fixtures

Formboard Fixtures
Formboard fixtures are used during the manufacturing of harnesses to support or help route
wiring during assembly. Fixtures can range from simple hooks and nails, through to complex
parts designed specifically to match the harness bundle profile.
If you want to implement the formboard features within Capital HarnessXC, you can define
fixture information that can be associated to the harness formboard diagram. The group name
Fixture is available for fixture information.

Figure 3-13. Formboard Fixtures

Figure 3-14. Formboard Fixtures on a Formboard

The fixture attributes define a number of instances:

• Bundles Supported
How many bundles will be supported by the fixture?

142 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Creating a Formboard Fixture

• Shaft Diameter
What is the shaft diameter of the fixture?
• Min/Max bundle width
This is the minimum or maximum allowable width of a bundle that will be supported by
the fixture.
• Min/Max wire count
This is the minimum or maximum number of wires that can be supported by the fixture.
• Auto Selectable?
If this box is selected, the fixture may be automatically selected by the system during
calculations.
The following topic explains how to create and edit formboard fixtures:

Creating a Formboard Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Creating a Formboard Fixture

You can create a formboard fixture.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Fixture, Type Code, Color Code, and
Material Code.
5. Click the Fixture Details Tab.
6. Edit the number of Bundles Supported, Shaft Diameter, Min. Bundle Width, Max.
Bundle Width, Min. Wire Count, Max. Wire Count and whether the fixture is Auto
Selectable.
7. Click Apply; the specified values on the Base Tab are displayed in the Internal Part No.
Table.
Results
• The formboard fixture is now created.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 143

February 2016
Components
Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture

• You can now start Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture.

Note
You can edit the formboard fixture later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the formboard fixture from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture

Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture

You can edit (modify) the attributes of an existing formboard fixture.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the formboard fixture in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the formboard fixture in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details section display the details for the formboard fixture.
4. Click the Fixture Details Tab; it displays the attributes for the formboard fixture.
5. Edit the number of Bundles Supported, Shaft Diameter, Min. Bundle Width, Max.
Bundle Width, Min. Wire Count, Max. Wire Count and whether the fixture is Auto
Selectable.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Formboard Fixture

144 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Grommets

Grommets
A grommet is an eyelet placed in a hole in a panel or in another component to protect or insulate
the cable passing through it. It prevents the cable from touching the sides of the hole.
Figure 3-15. Grommet

The following topic explains how to create grommets:

Creating a Grommet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Creating a Grommet
You can create a grommet.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Grommet, Type Code, Color Code, and
Material Code.
5. Click Apply; the specified values are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The grommet is now created.

Note
You can edit the grommet later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components”
on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the grommet from the library only when it
has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 145

February 2016
Components
Heat Shrink Sleeves

Heat Shrink Sleeves

A heat shrink sleeve is a tube of material that shrinks when heated. These sleeves are used to
insulate wires, connections, joints and terminals.
Figure 3-16. Heat Shrink Sleeve

The following topics explain how to create and edit heat shrink sleeves:

Creating a Heat Shrink Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Heat Shrink Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Creating a Heat Shrink Sleeve

You can create a heat shrink sleeve.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Heat Shrink Sleeve, Type Code, Color
Code, and Material Code.
5. Click the Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab.
6. Specify the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total C.S.A., Min. Single Wire C.S.A., Max.
Single Wire C.S.A., Min. No. Wires (Total), Max. No. Wires (Total) and whether the
heat shrink sleeve is Auto Selectable.
7. Click Apply; the specified values on the Base tab are displayed in the Internal Part No.
Table.
Results
• The heat shrink sleeve is now created.

146 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Heat Shrink Sleeve

Note
You can edit the heat shrink sleeve later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the heat shrink sleeve from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Heat Shrink Sleeve

Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Heat Shrink

Sleeve
You can edit (modify) the sleeve attributes of an existing heat shrink sleeve.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the heat shrink sleeve in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the heat shrink sleeve in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the heat shrink sleeve.
4. Click the Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab; it displays the sleeve attributes for the heat shrink
sleeve.
5. Edit the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total C.S.A., Min. Single Wire C.S.A., Max. Single
Wire C.S.A., Min. No. Wires (Total), Max. No. Wires (Total) and whether the heat
shrink sleeve is Auto Selectable as required.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Heat Shrink Sleeve

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 147

February 2016
Components
Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)

Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)

An insulation displacement connector (IDC) permits an electrical connection to be made at any
point along the length of a wire without the need to cut or terminate the wire.
An electrical connection is made by forcing the wire between the sharp edges of the IDC’s
metallic contacts. The contacts remove, cut or perforate the wire’s insulation and hold the wire
tightly in place.

Figure 3-17. Insulation Displacement Connectors

The following topics explain how to create and edit IDCs in the library:

Creating an Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Blocked Insulation Displacement Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Creating an Insulation Displacement Connector

(IDC)
You can create an IDC.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.

148 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes

4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of IDC Connector, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The IDC is now created.
• You can now start configuring the IDC as required. Following the instructions in the
related topics below.

Note
You can edit the IDC later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components” on
page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the IDC from the library only when it has a
status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group

Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector

(IDC) Attributes
You can specify IDC attributes for an existing IDC. These attributes indicate the test block,
whether the connector is open, the number of locks on it and which connector cavities are
grouped together to share an electrical connection.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the IDC in the Internal Part No. field and press Return.
The Internal Part No. Table displays the IDC.
3. Select the IDC in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details Section
section display the details for the IDC.
4. Click the IDC Group Tab.
5. Specify the IDC cavities that share an electrical connection.
a. Click New; a row is added to the Cavity table.
b. Specify a Cavity that will share an electrical connection.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 149

February 2016
Components
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group

c. Repeat steps a to c for each cavity that shares an electrical connection.

6. Specify the Test Block, No. Locks, Max. Bundle Diameter and “Connector Open?” as
required.
7. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating an Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group

Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group

You can add a cavity to the cavity group that shares an electrical connection in an existing IDC.
See “Cavity Groups” on page 99 for an explanation of that concept.

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the IDC in the Internal Part No. field and press Return.
The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the IDC in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details Section
section display the details for the IDC.
4. Click the IDC Group Tab; it displays the cavities currently in the cavity group.
5. Add the required cavities to the group.
a. Click New; a row is added to the Cavity table.
b. Specify a cavity that will share an electrical connection.
c. Repeat steps a to c for each cavity to be added.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating an Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)
Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group

150 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group

Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group

You can delete (remove) a cavity from the cavity group that shares an electrical connection in
an existing IDC.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the IDC in the Internal Part No. field and press Return.
The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the IDC in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component Details Section
section display the details for the IDC.
4. Click the IDC Group Tab; it displays the cavities currently in the cavity group.
5. Select the cavity in the Cavity table and click Delete; the cavity is dimmed.
6. Click Apply; the cavity is removed from the Cavity table.
Related Topics
Creating an Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC)
Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group

Blocked Insulation Displacement Connectors

A blocked insulation displacement connector (IDC) has one or more blocked cavities. Blocked
cavities do not contain terminals and cannot be used in other applications.
For example, a cavity can be blocked by a plug, or a six-way connector can be mated with a
five-way connector so that one cavity cannot be used.

If a cavity is used in a Footprint pin mapping or a mating relationship, you cannot block it.

If a symbol is associated with a connector, you cannot block any cavities on that connector.

Related Topics
Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 151

February 2016
Components
Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector

Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement

Connector
You can create a blocked insulation displacement connector (IDC) and specify the blocked
cavities.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of IDC Connector, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities.
5. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. table.
6. On the Cavity Names Tab, specify the blocked cavities:
a. In the Cavity Name table, click a cavity to be blocked and select the Blocked option.
b. Click Apply; a tick is displayed in the Blocked column for that cavity and the No.
Cavities is reduced.
c. Repeat steps a to c to for each blocked cavity.
Results
• The blocked IDC is now created.

Note
You can edit the blocked IDC later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the blocked IDC from the library
only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Blocked Insulation Displacement Connectors
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector

152 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector

Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation

Displacement Connector
You can unblock a cavity in a blocked insulation displacement connector (IDC).
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the connector.
4. Click the Cavity Names Tab and select the blocked cavity in the Cavity Name table.
Unselect the Blocked option.
5. Click Apply; the tick is removed from the Blocked column for that cavity and the No.
Cavities is increased.
6. Repeat steps 4 to 5 for each cavity to be unblocked.
Related Topics
Blocked Insulation Displacement Connectors
Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector

Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation

Displacement Connector
You can block a cavity in a blocked insulation displacement connector (IDC).
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the blocked connector in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the connector.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 153

February 2016
Components
Blocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector

4. Click the Cavity Names Tab and select the cavity in the Cavity Name table. Select the
Blocked option.
5. Click Apply; a tick is added to the Blocked column for that cavity and the No. Cavities
is reduced.
6. Repeat steps 4 to 5 for each cavity to be blocked.
Related Topics
Blocked Insulation Displacement Connectors
Creating a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector
Unblocking a Cavity in a Blocked Insulation Displacement Connector

154 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
In-House Assembly

In-House Assembly
The component group In-House Assembly is used when several component are bought in and
assembled together in-house to create one part. Each of the sub-components that make up the
in-house assembly appear on a bill-of-materials (BOM), the main part number for the in-house
assembly does not.
In Capital HarnessXC and Capital ModularXC, you can add an in-house assembly as an Other
Component.

Figure 3-18. Possible In-house Assembly

The following topics explain how to create and edit in-house assemblies:

Creating an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Creating an In-House Assembly

You can create an in-house assembly.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
4. Specify the Group Name of In-House Assembly, Type Code, Color Code and Material
Code on the Base Tab.
5. Click the In-House Assembly Tab where you specify the sub-components in the in-
house assembly.
a. Click New on the In-House Assembly Tab; a row is added to the Sub-Component
table.
b. Specify the Sub-Component and Quantity.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 155

February 2016
Components
Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly

c. Click Apply; the details of the sub-component are added to the Sub-Component
table.
d. Repeats steps a to d to for each sub-component in the assembly.
Results
• The in-house assembly is now created.

Note
You can edit the in-house assembly later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the in-house assembly from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly
Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly
Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House Assembly

Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly

You can add a sub-component to an existing in-house assembly.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the in-house assembly in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the in-house assembly in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the in-house assembly.
4. Click the In-House Assembly Tab; it displays the sub-components in the assembly.
5. Click New; a row is added to the Sub-Component table.
6. Specify the Sub-Component and Quantity.
7. Click Apply; the details of the sub-component are added to the Sub-Component table.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each sub-component in the assembly.
Related Topics
Creating an In-House Assembly

156 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House Assembly

Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House Assembly

Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House

Assembly
You can delete (remove) a sub-component from an existing in-house assembly.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the in-house assembly in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the in-house assembly in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the in-house assembly.
4. Click the In-House Assembly Tab; it displays the sub-components in the assembly.
5. Select the sub-component in the Sub-Component table and click Delete; the sub-
component is dimmed.
6. Click Apply; the sub-component is removed from the Sub-Component table.
Related Topics
Creating an In-House Assembly
Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 157

February 2016
Components
Multicore Wire

Multicore Wire
A multicore cable is a single cable comprised of multiple wires. These wires can be covered by
a sheath. If it is a coax or oval multicore it has a shield that can be grounded with a shield
terminator.
Example of multicores:

Figure 3-19. Multicore with Outer Sheath

Figure 3-20. Twisted Pair

The following topics explain how to create and edit multicore wires:

Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Creating a Twisted Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath

You can create a multicore wire with an outer sheath.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Multicore Wire, Type Code, Color Code
and Material Code.
5. Click the Multicore Wires Tab where you specify attributes for the multicore wire’s
outer sheath and specify the inner cores (conductors) in the multicore.
6. Specify a Sheath Type of Sheath, the OS Color and the OS Spec.
7. Add the inner cores.

158 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Creating a Twisted Pair

a. Either:
o Right-click on a node in the Multicore Structure and select the New option
o Select a node in the Multicore Structure and click New below the table
An inner core node is added below the selected node and a row for the inner core’s
attributes is added to the Inner Cores table.
b. Specify the Sheath Type of the inner core (Single for a single conductor, Sheath for
a sheath, Twisted for a twisted group of conductors).
c. Select the Conductor Role, Color, Material Code and Specification.
d. Click Apply; the row in the Inner Cores table displays the specified values.
e. Repeat steps a to d for each inner core.
Results
• The multicore wire is now created.

Note
You can edit the multicore wire later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the multicore wire from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Creating a Twisted Pair
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire

Creating a Twisted Pair

You can create a twisted pair (multicore wire).
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Multicore Wire, Type Code, Color Code
and Material Code.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 159

February 2016
Components
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire

5. Click the Multicore Wires Tab where you specify attributes for the multicore wire’s
outer sheath and to specify the inner cores (conductors) in the multicore.
6. Specify a Sheath Type of Twisted and the OS Spec. of the twisted pair.
7. Add the inner cores.
a. Either:
o Right-click on a node in the Multicore Structure and select the New option
o Select a node in the Multicore Structure and click New below the table
An inner core node is added below the selected node and a row for the inner core’s
attributes is added to the Inner Cores table.
b. Specify the Sheath Type of the inner core and edit the Conductor Role, Color,
Material Code and Specification as required.
c. Click Apply; the row in the Inner Cores table displays the specified values.
d. Repeat steps a to c for each inner core.
Results
• The twisted pair is now created.

Note
You can edit the twisted pair later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the twisted pair from the library
only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire

Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire

You can add an inner core to an existing multicore wire, whether it is a twisted pair or has an
outer sheath.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.

160 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire

2. Enter the internal part number of the multicore wire in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the multicore wire in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the multicore wire.
4. Click the Multicore Wires Tab; it displays the inner cores in the multicore wire.
5. Add the inner core.
a. In the Multicore Structure, select the inner core node under which you want to add
an inner core.
b. Either:
o Right-click on the node and select the New option
o Click New below the Inner Cores table
An inner core node is added below the selected node and a row for the inner core’s
attributes is added to the Inner Cores table.
c. Specify the Sheath Type of the inner core and edit the Conductor Role, Color,
Material Code and Specification as required.
d. Click Apply; the row in the Inner Cores table displays the specified values.
e. Repeat steps a to d to d for each inner core that you want to add.
Related Topics
Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath
Creating a Twisted Pair
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire

Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire

You can delete (remove) an inner core from an existing multicore wire, whether it is a twisted
pair or has an outer sheath.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the multicore wire in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 161

February 2016
Components
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire

3. Select the multicore wire in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the multicore wire.
4. Click the Multicore Wires Tab; it displays the inner cores in the multicore wire.
5. Select the inner core node that you want to delete in the Multicore Structure.
6. Either:
• Right-click on the node and select the Delete option
• Click Delete below the Inner Cores table
The inner core node in the Multicore Structure and the row in the Inner Cores table are
removed.
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6 for each inner core that you want to delete.
8. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath
Creating a Twisted Pair
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire

162 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Other Component

Other Component
The component group Other is a general-purpose category for components that do not conform
to any of the predefined component groups. Examples are waterproof connector boots,
packaging components and stiffening rods.
Note
You can also use this component group to create components such as anti-backouts, covers,
locks and grease that you want to use as sub-components in Housing.

Figure 3-21. Example Other Component: Anti-backout

The following topics explain how to create and edit components with a Group Name of Other:

Creating an Other Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Creating an Other Component

You can create an other component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. Specify the Group Name of Other, Type Code, Color Code, and Material Code on the
Base Tab.
5. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The other component is now created.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 163

February 2016
Components
Creating an Other Component

• You can now start configuring the other component as required, following the
instructions in the related topics below.

Note
You can edit the other component later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the other component from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration
Other Component

164 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Solder Sleeves

Solder Sleeves
A solder sleeve joins two or more conductors electronically. It consists of a tubular sleeve in
which the conductors are located and heat is applied to fuse the assembly.
Solder sleeves are used to:

• attach a ground wire to the shielding braid of a shielded cable by means of a heat shrink
sleeve having an integral solder ring
Figure 3-22. Solder Sleeve with Ground

• splice two or more conductors together in a parallel configuration

Figure 3-23. Solder Sleeve Examples

The following topics explain how to create and edit solder sleeves:

Creating a Solder Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Creating a Solder Sleeve

You can create a solder sleeve.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 165

February 2016
Components
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Solder Sleeve, Type Code, Color Code,
and Material Code.
5. Click the Sleeve Attributes Tab.
6. Specify the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total C.S.A., Min. Single Wire C.S.A., Max.
Single Wire C.S.A., Min. No. Wires (Total), Max. No. Wires (Total) and whether the
solder sleeve is Auto Selectable.
7. Click Apply; the specified values on the Base tab are displayed in the Internal Part No.
Table.
Results
• The solder sleeve is now created.

Note
You can edit the solder sleeve later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the solder sleeve from the library
only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve

Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve

You can edit (modify) the sleeve attributes of an existing solder sleeve.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the solder sleeve in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the solder sleeve in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the solder sleeve.

166 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve

4. Click the Sleeve Attributes Tab; it displays the sleeve attributes for the solder sleeve.
5. Edit the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total C.S.A., Min. Single Wire C.S.A., Max. Single
Wire C.S.A., Min. No. Wires (Total), Max. No. Wires (Total) and whether the solder
sleeve is Auto Selectable as required.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Solder Sleeve

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 167

February 2016
Components
Splices

Splices
Splices are used to electrically join two or more conductors.
Figure 3-24. Butt Ultrasonic Splice

Figure 3-25. Butt Splice Crimp

The following topics explain how to create and edit splices:

Creating a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Editing the Attributes of a Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Creating a Splice
You can create a splice.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Splice, Type Code, Color Code, Material
Code and No. Cavities, Strip Length, Mult Strip Length and “Include On BOM”.
5. Click the Splice Attributes Tab.

168 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Editing the Attributes of a Splice

Specify the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total C.S.A., Min. Single Wire C.S.A., Max.
Single Wire C.S.A., L/R C.S.A. Ratio, Min. No. Wires (Total), Max. No. Wires (Total),
Max. No. Wires (Per Side) and whether the splice is Auto Selectable.
6. Click the Cavity Names Tab.
Specify any cavity names as required. If none are defined here, then splices are created
with default cavity names L, R and X.
7. Click Apply; the specified values on the Base tab are displayed in the Internal Part No.
Table.
Results
• The splice is now created.

Note
You can edit the splice later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components” on
page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the splice from the library only when it has
a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing the Attributes of a Splice
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component
Adding a Cavity to a Component
Deleting a Cavity from a Component

Editing the Attributes of a Splice

You can edit (modify) the attributes of an existing splice.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the splice in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the splice in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component Details Section
section display the details for the splice.
4. Click the Splice Attributes Tab; it displays the attributes for the splice.
5. Edit the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total C.S.A., Min. Single Wire C.S.A., Max. Single
Wire C.S.A., L/R C.S.A. Ratio, Min. No. Wires (Total), Max. No. Wires (Total), Max.
No. Wires (Per Side) and whether the splice is Auto Selectable as required.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 169

February 2016
Components
Editing the Attributes of a Splice

6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Splice
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component
Adding a Cavity to a Component
Deleting a Cavity from a Component

170 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Tapes

Tapes
A tape is a bundle protection component used for continuous wrapping of several wires or
applied at particular locations (spot tape) for joining fixings to a bundle. Within Capital Library,
you can specify the thickness and width of tape and/or specify the spot tape attributes for it.
Continuous taping can be:

• Spiral tape with no gap

• Overlapped tape
• Spiral tape with gaps
• Space tape
When applying continuous taping in the design applications (not in Capital Library), you
specify the number of turns of tape and distance between items. The distance between items for
tape applications represents the distance from the left hand side of the first piece of tape to the
left hand side of the second piece of tape.

For example:

For spiral tape with no gap, the distance in percentage would be 100%, or in relation to the
width of the tape, would be 25mm (where the width of the tape itself is 25mm).

Figure 3-26. Spiral Tape with no Gap

For spiral taping with a gap, the distance is the tape width plus the desired gap. For example, the
distance between items for spiral tape 25mm wide with a gap of 25mm would be 50mm or
150%.

For overlapped taping, the distance is the tape width minus the length of the overlap. For
example, the distance between items for 25mm tape with an overlap of 50% would be 12.5mm
in relation with the width of the tape.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 171

February 2016
Components
Creating a Tape

Figure 3-27. Overlapped Taping

Space tape is multiple applications of spot tape.

When applying space tape in the design applications (not in Capital Library), you specify
distance from a connector and distance between items. The distance between items represents
the distance between pieces of space tape, for example 100mm.

Figure 3-28. Space Tape

The following topics explain how to create and edit tapes in the library:

Creating a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Creating a Tape
You can create a tape.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.

172 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape

3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Tape, Type Code, Color Code, Material
Code, Status, Unit of Measure, Wall Thickness and Tape Width.
5. Click Apply; the specified values on the Base tab are displayed in the Internal Part No.
Table.
Results
• The tape is now created.
• If required for the tape, you can now start Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape.

Note
You can edit the tape later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components” on
page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the tape from the library only when it has a
status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape

Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape

You can specify (edit) the attributes for tape when it is applied as spot tape at different
insulation layers.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the tape in the Internal Part No. field and press Return.
The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the tape in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details Section
section display the details for the tape.
4. Click the Spot Tape Selection Tab; it displays the spot tape attributes for the tape.
5. Specify the spot tape attributes of a required insulation layer.
a. Click New; a row is added to the Spot Tape Attributes table.
b. Specify the Layer to which the row applies and the Overlaps for when the tape is
used at the insulation layer.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 173

February 2016
Components
Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape

c. Specify the Min. Total C.S.A., Max. Total C.S.A., Min. Single Wire C.S.A., Max.
Single Wire C.S.A., Min. No. Wires (Total), Max. No. Wires (Total) and whether
the spot tape is Auto Selectable as required.
d. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Spot Tape Attributes table.
e. Repeat steps a to d for each insulation layer at which the tape can be applied as spot
tape.
Related Topics
Creating a Tape

174 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Terminals

Terminals
A terminal is a component attached to a conductor to facilitate electrical/mechanical connection
(current flow) with another conductor or terminal.
Figure 3-29. Male and Female Open Terminals

Figure 3-30. Male Terminal with Seal

Figure 3-31. Female Terminal

The following topics explain how to create and edit terminals:

Creating a Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Creating a Terminal
You can create a terminal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 175

February 2016
Components
Creating a Terminal

2. Enter an Internal Part No.

3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Terminal, Type Code, Color Code,
Material Code and No. Cavities.
5. Click Apply; the specified values are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
Results
• The terminal is now created.
• For the terminal, you can now start performing the actions detailed in the related topics
below.

Note
You can edit the terminal later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components”
on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the terminal from the library only when it
has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component
Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration

176 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Tubes

Tubes
A tube is a bundle protection component that surrounds the bundle. It can be split or unsplit.
Figure 3-32. Unsplit Tube

Figure 3-33. Split Tube

Creating a Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Creating a Tube
You can create a tube.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Tube, Type Code, Color Code, Material
Code, Wall Thickness, Bore Size and whether the tube is Slit or Convoluted.
5. Click Apply; the specified values on the Base tab are added to the Internal Part No.
Table.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 177

February 2016
Components
Creating a Tube

Results
• The tube is now created.

Note
You can edit the tube later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components” on
page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the tube from the library only when it has a
status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

178 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Ultrasonic Welds

Ultrasonic Welds
An ultrasonic weld is a manufacturing process that incurs a cost. It is not a component. The
process electrically joins two or more conductors. During harness design, you can specify that
this process is used at a particular location.
Figure 3-34. Ultrasonic Weld

The following topics explain how to create and edit ultrasonic welds:

Creating an Ultrasonic Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Creating an Ultrasonic Weld

You can create an ultrasonic weld.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Ultrasonic Weld, Type Code, Color Code,
and Material Code.
5. Click the Ultrasonic Welds Tab, where you specify the combinations of wires that can
enter the ultrasonic weld from the left, center and right directions.
a. In the Orientation field, specify a direction for which you want to specify a
combination of wires.
b. Click New; a row is added to the appropriate section of the Wire Combination table.
c. Specify the Material Code and Specification of a wire that can enter the weld from
that direction.
d. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Wire Combination table.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 179

February 2016
Components
Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

e. Repeat steps b to d for each wire that can enter the weld from the selected
Orientation.
f. Repeat steps a to e for each direction for which you want to specify a combination of
wires.
Results
• The ultrasonic weld is now created.

Note
You can edit the ultrasonic weld later by searching for it (see “Searching for
Components” on page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details
section as required and clicking Apply. You can delete the ultrasonic weld from the
library only when it has a status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition
Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

You can specify (add) a wire that can enter an ultrasonic weld.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the ultrasonic weld in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the ultrasonic weld in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the ultrasonic weld.
4. Click the Ultrasonic Welds Tab, where you specify the combinations of wires that can
enter the ultrasonic weld from the left, center and right directions.
a. In the Orientation field, specify a direction for which you want to specify a wire.
b. Click New; a row is added to the appropriate section of the Wire Combination table.
c. Specify the Material Code and Specification of the wire that can enter the weld from
that direction.
d. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Wire Combination table.

180 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

e. Repeat steps b to d for each wire that can enter the weld from the selected
Orientation.
f. Repeat steps a to e to for each direction for which you want to add wires.
Related Topics
Creating an Ultrasonic Weld
Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

You can delete (remove) a wire from an ultrasonic weld definition.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the ultrasonic weld in the Internal Part No. field and
press Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search
criteria.
3. Select the ultrasonic weld in the Internal Part No. table; the tabs in the Component
Details Section section display the details for the ultrasonic weld.
4. Click the Ultrasonic Welds Tab, where you specify the combinations of wires that can
enter the ultrasonic weld from the left, center and right directions.
5. Select the wire in the Wire Combination table.
6. Click Delete; the wire is dimmed.
7. Click Apply; the wire is removed from the Wire Combination table.
Related Topics
Creating an Ultrasonic Weld
Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 181

February 2016
Components
Wires

Wires
You can create and edit wires in Capital Library.
Creating a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Editing the Attributes of a Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Creating a Wire
You can create a wire.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter an Internal Part No.
3. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
4. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name of Wire, Type Code, Color Code, Material
Code, Wire Color, Specification and “Outside Diameter, defined”.
5. Click Apply; the specified values on the Base tab are added to the Internal Part No.
Table.
Results
• The wire is now created.

Note
You can edit the wire later by searching for it (see “Searching for Components” on
page 229), editing the fields on the tabs of the Component Details section as
required and clicking Apply. You can delete the wire from the library only when it has a
status of Obsolete. See “Deleting Components” on page 217.

Related Topics
Editing the Attributes of a Wire

Editing the Attributes of a Wire

You can edit (modify) the attributes of an existing wire.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.

182 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Editing the Attributes of a Wire

2. Enter the internal part number of the wire in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the wire in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details Section
section display the details for the wire.
4. Click the Base Tab; it displays the attributes for the wire.
5. Edit the Wire Color, Specification and “Outside Diameter, defined” as required.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Wire

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 183

February 2016
Components
Common Editing Actions

Common Editing Actions

There are editing actions that are common to multiple component groups.
The following topics explain how to perform those actions.

Editing the Base Details of a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Editing the Extra Details of a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Assigning a Graphical Symbol to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Deleting a Symbol from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Specifying a Customer Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting a Customer Part Number for a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Specifying a Supplier Part Number for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Deleting a Supplier Part Number for a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Adding a Property to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Editing a Property Value for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Deleting a Property from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Library Part Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Specifying the Cavity Graphics of a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Adding a Cavity to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Deleting a Cavity from a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Specifying Valid Mated Parts for a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Applying Scopes to a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . 207
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component . . . . . . . . . . 208
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit
Together at Connector Cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

184 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Editing the Base Details of a Component

Editing the Base Details of a Component

You can edit (update) the base details of an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Base Tab.
5. Edit the fields as required.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Editing the Extra Details of a Component

Editing the Extra Details of a Component

You can edit (update) the extra details of an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Extra Tab.
5. Edit the fields as required.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Editing the Base Details of a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 185

February 2016
Components
Assigning a Graphical Symbol to a Component

Assigning a Graphical Symbol to a Component

This topic explains how to assign (add) a graphical symbol, previously created in Capital
Symbol, to an existing component. This symbol can then be used to represent the component in
design diagrams. You can assign multiple symbols to a single component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Symbol Tab; it displays the symbols that have been assigned to the
component.
5. Click New; a new row is added to the Symbol Name table.
6. Specify the symbol’s Mode, select the Symbol Library that contains the symbol and
select the Symbol Name; the symbol is previewed on the tab.

Note
The list displayed in the Symbol Name field is restricted to only those symbols that
match the specified Mode, Symbol Library and the number of cavities on the
component.

7. Specify whether this is the Default symbol used for the component.
8. Click Apply; the Symbol Name table displays the specified symbol’s name and the
cavity names on the Cavity Names Tab change to those from the symbol.
Related Topics
Deleting a Symbol from a Component

Deleting a Symbol from a Component

You can delete (remove) a graphical symbol from an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.

186 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Specifying a Customer Part Number for a Component

3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Symbol Tab; it displays the symbols that have been assigned to the
component.
5. Select the symbol in the Symbol Name table and click Delete; the symbol name is
dimmed.
6. Click Apply; the symbol is removed from the Symbol Name table.
Related Topics
Assigning a Graphical Symbol to a Component

Specifying a Customer Part Number for a

Component
You can specify a customer part number for an existing component. You can specify multiple
customer part numbers for a component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Customer Tab (Component Details); it displays the customer part numbers that
have been specified for the component.
5. Click New; a row is added to the Customer Part Number table.
6. Specify the Customer Part Number and Customer Name.
7. Click Apply; the specified values are added to the Customer Part Number table.
Related Topics
Deleting a Customer Part Number for a Component

Deleting a Customer Part Number for a Component

You can delete (remove) a customer part number from an existing component.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 187

February 2016
Components
Specifying a Supplier Part Number for a Component

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Customer Tab (Component Details); it displays the customer part numbers that
have been specified for the component.
5. Select the customer part number in the Customer Part Number table and click Delete.
6. The customer part number is dimmed.
7. Click Apply; the customer part number is removed from the Customer Part Number
table.
Related Topics
Specifying a Customer Part Number for a Component

Specifying a Supplier Part Number for a

Component
You can specify a supplier part number for an existing component. You can specify multiple
supplier part numbers for a component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Supplier tab in the Component Details section; it displays the customer part
numbers that have been specified for the component.
5. Click New; a row is added to the Supplier Part Number table.
6. Specify the Supplier Part Number and Supplier Name. See Supplier Tab (Component
Details) for details of the other fields.
7. Click Apply; the specified values are added to the Supplier Part Number table.

188 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Supplier Part Number for a Component

Related Topics
Deleting a Supplier Part Number for a Component

Deleting a Supplier Part Number for a Component

You can delete (remove) a supplier part number from an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Supplier Tab (Component Details); it displays the supplier part numbers that
have been specified for the component.
5. Select the supplier part number in the Supplier Part Number table and click Delete.
6. The supplier part number is dimmed.
7. Click Apply; the supplier part number is removed from the Supplier Part Number table.
Related Topics
Specifying a Supplier Part Number for a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 189

February 2016
Components
Housing

Housing
A single (main) component may require a number of sub-components, possessing specific
attributes, when it is applied to a design. These sub-components are referred to as housing.
For example, the definition of housing sub-components can specify the cavity and terminal
requirements of connectors, such as plugs and seals.

Note
You can also specify anti-backouts, covers, locks and grease as sub-components. In this
case, they must have been created as components themselves in the library, using the
Component Group Other. See “Other Component” on page 163.

Connectors and insulation displacement connectors (IDCs) support the scoping of cavity
components. This allows the selection of cavity components in Capital HarnessXC (and Capital
Harness Classic when running on Oracle) to be restricted to only the cavity components scoped
to the customer and/or manufacturing site specified for the harness. You specify the scope of a
component by specifying the customers and manufacturing sites that use that sub-component.

The following topics explain how to add and edit housing for components:

Adding a Sub-Component as Housing to a Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Adding Cavity Sub-Components as Housing to a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Deleting a Sub-Component from the Housing of Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Adding a Sub-Component as Housing to a Component

You can add a sub-component to the housing of a main component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Housing Tab; it displays the sub-components that have been added to the
housing for the component.
5. Click New; a new row is added to the Housing table.
6. Specify the Sub-Component, Usage and Quantity.

190 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Housing

7. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Housing table.
Related Topics
Housing
Adding Cavity Sub-Components as Housing to a Component
Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component
Deleting a Sub-Component from the Housing of Component

Adding Cavity Sub-Components as Housing to a

Component
You can add a cavity sub-component to the housing of a main component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Housing Tab; it displays the sub-components that have been added to the
housing for the component.
5. Click New; a new row is added to the Housing table.
6. Specify the Sub-Component, Usage and Quantity.
7. Select a Mode of Cavity and specify the First Cavity/First Position and Last Cavity/Last
Position as required.

Note
The Positions Blocked field is enabled only when a Mode of Cavity is selected.
You can specify the positions on a parent component that become unusable once this
sub-component has been assigned.

8. Click Apply; the specified values are displayed in the Housing table. If the sub-
component applies to multiple cavities, a row is added for each specified cavity.
Related Topics
Housing
Adding a Sub-Component as Housing to a Component
Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 191

February 2016
Components
Housing

Deleting a Sub-Component from the Housing of Component

Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for

a Component
You can specify the scope of a sub-component in the housing of an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Housing Tab; it displays the sub-components that have been added to the
housing for the component.
5. Select the sub-component in the Housing table and click the ellipsis (...) button to the
right of the Scoped field; the Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
6. In the Available window, select the scope codes that you want to apply to the component
and click Add; the scope codes are added to the Selected window.
7. In the Selected window, specify whether you want the component to be available or not
when the scope is applied to a design. To do this, click on the icon next to the component
category:
If a tick ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this indicates that this component can
be used when this scope is applied to a design. In this case, this component cannot be
used when any scopes of the same category listed in the Available window are applied to
a design.
If a no entry icon ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this indicates that this
component cannot be used when this scope is applied to a design. In this case, this
component can be used when any scopes of the same category listed in the Available
window are applied to a design.
Related Topics
Housing
Adding a Sub-Component as Housing to a Component
Adding Cavity Sub-Components as Housing to a Component
Deleting a Sub-Component from the Housing of Component

192 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Adding a Property to a Component

Deleting a Sub-Component from the Housing of

Component
You can delete (remove) a sub-component from the housing of an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Housing Tab; it displays the sub-components that have been added to the
housing for the component.
5. Select the sub-component in the Housing table and click New; the sub-component is
dimmed.
6. Click Apply; the sub-component is removed from the Housing table.
Related Topics
Housing
Adding a Sub-Component as Housing to a Component
Adding Cavity Sub-Components as Housing to a Component
Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component

Adding a Property to a Component

You can add (specify) a user-defined property for an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Properties Tab; it displays the properties that have been specified for the
component.
5. Click New; a new row is added to the Property table.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 193

February 2016
Components
Editing a Property Value for a Component

6. Specify a Property and its Value.

7. Click Apply; the specified values are added to the Property table.
Related Topics
Editing a Property Value for a Component
Deleting a Property from a Component

Editing a Property Value for a Component

You can edit (modify) the value of a user-defined property for an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Properties Tab; it displays the properties that have been specified for the
component.
5. Select the property in the Property table; the existing values for it are displayed in the
fields below the table.
6. Edit the Value as required.
7. Click Apply; the specified value is updated in the Property table.
Related Topics
Adding a Property to a Component
Deleting a Property from a Component

Deleting a Property from a Component

You can delete (remove) a user-defined property from an existing component.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.

194 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Property from a Component

3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Properties Tab; it displays the properties that have been specified for the
component.
5. Select the property in the Property table and click Delete.
6. The property is dimmed.
7. Click Apply; the property is removed from the Property table.
Related Topics
Adding a Property to a Component
Editing a Property Value for a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 195

February 2016
Components
Library Part Revision

Library Part Revision

A library part revision is a new part (with a new part number) that replaces an obsolete part
number or an obsolete part definition (for example, a definition where pin names have changed
but the part has been used with the old pin names on a released design).
It is important to remember that the library data for any design object with a part number is a
snapshot-in-time from the library. To update these objects to use the latest definition from the
library, use actions such as Batch Update Library Parts or Update Part (Capital Logic), noting
that these actions are not available if the design is released (or read-only).

Within Capital Logic, you can run design rule checks to see whether part numbers (and their
data) are up-to-date with changes in the library. If the data for a part number is not up-to-date,
you have a choice to either update the part or leave it ‘as is’ in the design.

If a part needs to be revised in the library, you give it a new part number and use the History tab
to associate the previous part number with the new one. See “Creating a Revision of a Part” on
page 197.

Figure 3-35. When to Create a Part Revision: Recommended Flow

In the above figure, the New flow describes the flow for creating new library parts where the
status of the part transitions from New to Current after it has been validated.

The Change flow describes when you should create a revision of a part and when you can
modify an existing part. In summary, if you plan to modify the part structure (pin count, pin
names, multicore structure, type, and so on) and the part has been used in a design, then you
should create a revision. All other changes (attribute, property or footprint changes can be made

196 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Library Part Revision

without creating a revision. When making changes to an existing library part, you can capture
the changes using the History tab (an extensibility plugin can be used to enable the automatic
capture of before/after value changes.

When you synchronize design data between Capital HarnessXC and other design applications,
the system performs various checks on library part data in the designs. If the pin count or pin
names have been updated for a part in the library, a new revision is required for use elsewhere.
However, other updates do not require a creation of a new revision (changes to attributes/
properties/housing).

Copy Versus Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Creating a Revision of a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Adding a Revision to a Part’s Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Removing a Revision from a Part’s Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Copy Versus Revise

If you copy a library part, supplier part numbers, customer part numbers and history data are not
replicated to the new part.
If you create a revision of a library part, supplier part numbers and customer part numbers are
still not replicated to the new part. However, history data provides a link to the original part.

Creating a Revision of a Part

You can create a revision of an existing library part.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the part or Search Criteria in the Internal Part No. field
and click Search.
The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the part for which you are creating a revision.
4. Enter a new, unique part number into the Internal Part No. field.
5. Click Revise. The new part is created and selected in the Internal Part No. Table, and the
History Tab displays both the new part (flagged as Latest) and the earlier revision(s).
6. Click Apply.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 197

February 2016
Components
Library Part Revision

Related Topics
Library Part Revision
Adding a Revision to a Part’s Revision History
Removing a Revision from a Part’s Revision History

Adding a Revision to a Part’s Revision History

You can add a revision to a part’s revision history.
See “Library Part Revision” on page 196 for information about why you might want to do this.

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the part or Search Criteria in the Internal Part No. field
and click Search.
The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the part whose revision history you want to edit.
4. Click the History Tab.
5. Click the New button; a new line is added to the Revision History table.
6. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Associate Part field, and select the part
you want to use as a revision from the Part Selection Dialog Box.
7. Click Apply.

Note
If the selected part already features in the revision history of another part, upon
clicking Apply, a message is displayed to warn you. Click Yes to continue with the
part addition, or click No to cancel the addition.

Related Topics
Library Part Revision
Creating a Revision of a Part
Removing a Revision from a Part’s Revision History

Removing a Revision from a Part’s Revision History

This topic details how to remove a revision from a part’s revision history.

198 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the part or Search Criteria in the Internal Part No. field
and click Search.
The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the part whose revision history you want to edit.
4. Click the History Tab.
5. Select the part you want to remove in the Revision History table.
6. Click the Delete button. The part is removed from the table.
7. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Library Part Revision
Creating a Revision of a Part
Adding a Revision to a Part’s Revision History

Editing a Cavity Name on a Component

You can edit (modify) a cavity name on an existing connector, IDC connector or splice.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the wire in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details Section
section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Cavity Names Tab; where you specify the cavity names.
5. Select the cavity name in the Cavity Name table; the values for that name are displayed
in the fields below the table.
6. Edit the name in the Name field.
7. Click Apply; the cavity name is updated in the Cavity Name table.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each cavity name that you want to edit.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 199

February 2016
Components
Specifying the Cavity Graphics of a Connector

Related Topics
Adding a Cavity to a Component
Deleting a Cavity from a Component

Specifying the Cavity Graphics of a Connector

This topic explains how to specify the cavity graphics of an existing component belonging to
one of the following component groups: Connector and IDC Connector. That is, specify the
graphics that you want to display with the cavities on the component when used in a diagram.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Cavity Attributes Tab.
5. For each cavity Name, select the Graphic Type.
6. Click Apply.

Adding a Cavity to a Component

You can add a cavity to an existing connector, IDC connector or splice.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Cavity Names table, where the existing cavities are listed.
5. Click New; a message asks you to confirm the addition. Click Yes; a new row is added
to the Cavity Name table.
6. Specify the name in the Name field.

200 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Cavity from a Component

7. Click Apply; the row in the Cavity Names table is updated and the No. Cavities on the
Base Tab increases accordingly.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each cavity that you want to add.
Related Topics
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component
Deleting a Cavity from a Component

Deleting a Cavity from a Component

You can delete (remove) a cavity from an existing connector, IDC connector or splice.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Cavity Names Tab, where the existing cavities are listed.
5. Select the cavity in the Cavity Name table; the fields below the table display the values
for the cavity.
6. Click Delete; the row for the cavity is dimmed.
7. Click Apply; the row for the cavity is removed from the Cavity Name table and the No.
Cavities on the Base Tab decreases accordingly.
8. Repeats steps 5 to 7 for each cavity that you want to delete.
Related Topics
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component
Adding a Cavity to a Component

Specifying Valid Mated Parts for a Connector

This topic explains how to specify the valid connectors that can mate (connect) with an existing
component belonging to one of the following component groups: Connector and IDC
Connector. This topic also explains how to map the cavities when the connectors are mated.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 201

February 2016
Components
Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Mating Tab.
5. Click New; a row is added to the Mating Parts list.
6. Specify the Mating Part and click Apply; a message asks whether you want to
automatically map cavities.
If you do, click Yes; the system maps cavities based on name and the mappings are
displayed in the Mapped Cavity table.
If not, click No; and map them manually, as follows.
a. Select the cavity that you want to map in the Mapped Cavity table.
b. Specify the Cavity on the mating part to which you want to map it.
c. Click Apply; the mapped cavity is added to the Mapped Cavity table.
d. Repeat steps a to c for each cavity that you want to map.
7. Repeat steps 5 to 6 for each connector that you want to specify as a valid mated part.
Related Topics
Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector

Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector

You can delete (remove) a valid mated connector from an existing component belonging to one
of the following component groups: Connector and IDC Connector.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.

202 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Applying Scopes to a Component

4. Click the Mating Tab; it lists the valid mated parts.

5. Select the mated part in the Mating Parts list and click Delete; the mated part is dimmed.
6. Click Apply; the mated connector is removed from the Mating Parts list.
Related Topics
Specifying Valid Mated Parts for a Connector

Applying Scopes to a Component

You can apply scope codes to a component.
See “Scope Code” on page 254 for further information about scope codes. There is also a
“Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping” on page 256.

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Scope Tab; the Available window displays the scope codes that are available.
5. In the Available window, select the scope codes that you want to apply to the component
and click Add; the scope codes are added to the Selected window.
6. In the Selected window, specify whether you want the component to be available or not
when the scope is applied to a design. To do this, click on the icon next to the component
category:
If a tick ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this indicates that this component can
be used when this scope is applied to a design. In this case, this component cannot be
used when any scopes of the same category listed in the Available window are applied to
a design.
If a no entry icon ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this indicates that this
component cannot be used when this scope is applied to a design. In this case, this
component can be used when any scopes of the same category listed in the Available
window are applied to a design.
7. Click Apply.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 203

February 2016
Components
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component

Note
You can use extensibility (a plugin) to manage component scoping. If a plugin is
available then it will override the default rules, and will determine part suitability
based on project, design and library scoping but using the business logic defined within
the plugin. For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see
the PluginDevelopment.pdf file that is located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital
installation.

Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a

Component
You can specify the single wire sizes that can connect at the cavities or terminals of an existing
cavity seal, IDC connector or terminal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Single Terminations Tab; it displays the wire sizes (with their material code)
that can terminate at the component.
5. On the Single Terminations tab, click New; a row is added to the Wire Size table.
6. Specify the Material Code for the wire size(s) and material configuration that you are
adding.
7. Specify either a single wire size or multiple wire sizes for multiple cavities:
• If you adding a single wire, specify the Specification for it in the Wire Specification
section.
• If you are adding multiple wire sizes for multiple cavities, specify either Outside
Diameter or C.S.A. in the Range Specification section and then the minimum or
maximum size.
8. Click Apply; the specified wire size and material configurations are added to rows in the
Wire Size table.
9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until you have specified all of the single wire sizes and material
combinations that can terminate at the component.
10. Click Apply.

204 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component

Related Topics
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component

Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire

Combinations for a Component
You can specify the combinations of wire sizes that can connect simultaneously at the cavities
or terminals of an existing cavity seal, IDC connector or terminal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Multiple Terminations Tab; it displays the combination of wire sizes (with
their material codes) that can terminate at the component.
5. Click New under the Configuration List; a row with a name for a combination
(configuration) of wire sizes is added to the Configuration List.
6. Click New under the Wire Size table; a row is added to the right of the Wire Size table.
7. Specify a Material Code and Specification for a wire in the configuration.
8. Repeat steps 6 to 7 for each wire size in a configuration. When you click New again, the
last row is updated with the specified values for it.
9. Click Apply; the last row is updated with the specified values for it.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 for each configuration.
Related Topics
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component
Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration

Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration

You can delete (remove) a configuration (combination of wire sizes) from the Multiple
Terminations tab for an existing cavity seal, IDC connector or terminal.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 205

February 2016
Components
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Multiple Terminations Tab; it displays the combination of wire sizes (with
their material codes) that can terminate at the component.
5. Select the configuration in the Configuration List; the Wire Size table displays the wire
sizes in that configuration.
6. Select a row in the Wire Size table and click Delete; the row is dimmed.
7. Repeat steps 6 for each row on the right of the table.
8. Click Apply; the configuration is removed from the table.
Related Topics
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component
Multiple Terminations Tab

Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on

a Component
You can specify the single wire sizes that fit the cavities of an existing component belonging to
one of the following component groups: Assembly, Connector, IDC Connector, In-House
Assembly, Other, and Terminal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab; it displays the wire sizes (with their material
code) that fit the cavities on the component.
5. On the Single Wire Fits Cavity tab, click New; a row is added to the Cavity table.

206 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component

6. Specify the cavity or cavities.

7. Specify the Material Code and the Specification.
8. Click Apply; the specified wire size and material configuration is added to the row in
the Cavity table and the CSA and Outside Diameter update.
9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until you have specified all of the single wire sizes and material
combinations that fit the cavities of the component.

Note
You can specify a range or wire sizes simultaneously. See “Specifying a Range of
Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component” on page 207.

Related Topics
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component

Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit

Cavities on a Component
You can specify a range of single wire sizes that fit the cavities of an existing component
belonging to one of the following component groups: Assembly, Connector, IDC Connector,
In-House Assembly, Other, and Terminal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab; it displays the wire sizes (with their material
code) that fit the cavities on the component.
5. Click Add Wire Range; the Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box is displayed.
6. Specify the Cavity Name, Material Code, Range Specification and “From / To” values.
7. Click OK; the Cavity table displays the wire sizes in the range in rows for the specified
cavities.
8. Click Apply.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 207

February 2016
Components
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component

Related Topics
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component

Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit

Cavities on a Component
You can specify the combinations of wires sizes that fit simultaneously at the cavities of an
existing component belonging to one of the following component groups: Assembly,
Connector, IDC Connector, In-House Assembly, Other, and Terminal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.
4. Click the Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab; it displays the combination of wire sizes (with
their material codes) that fit the cavities of the component.
5. Click New Configuration; the Specify Cavity dialog box is displayed.
If you want to use this multiple wire configuration for a specific cavity, enter the cavity
name in the Cavity Name field. Alternatively, leave the field blank so that the multiple
wire configuration is applicable to all cavities on the connector.

Note
If you enter a value in the Cavity Name field, it must match a cavity name. You
cannot enter multiple cavities. If different cavities on one connector require different
configurations, you must enter a configuration for each individual cavity.

Click OK; either a blank row or a row with the cavity name for the configuration of wire
sizes is added to the Configuration List.
6. Specify the combination of wire sizes that terminate at the cavities.
a. Select the blank row in the Configuration List.
b. Click the New button below the Wire Size table; a row is added to the table.
c. If specifying an individual wire, enter the Material Code, Specification, CSA and
Outside Diameter for the wire.
If specifying a wire group, select it from the Wire Group Name drop-down list; the
wire group name is added to the row in the Wire Size table.

208 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration

Note
If you add a wire group, the row represents only one wire.

For example, if your wire group contains two wire sizes TWC 11/.2 (0.25,
1.064190) and TWC 18/.3 (1.25,1.8615660), the row is specifying that either a wire
TWC 11/.2 (0.25, 1.064190) or a wire TWC 18/.3 (1.25,1.8615660) can fit at the
cavities. It is not specifying that both fit together. You therefore have to add a second
row for the wire group to the wire size table if you want both wire sizes to fit
together. See “Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of
Wire Sizes that Fit Together at Connector Cavities” on page 210.

d. Repeat steps a to c for each wire group or wire size that fits in the cavity or cavities.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each configuration.

Note
When working with wire groups, you can click the Wire Group Combination
button to view the possible combinations of wire sizes that fit at the cavities.

8. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit
Together at Connector Cavities

Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration

This topic explains how to delete (remove) a configuration (combination of wire sizes) from the
Multiple Wire Fits Cavity tab for an existing component belonging to one of the following
component groups: Assembly, Connector, IDC Connector, In-House Assembly, Other, and
Terminal.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the internal part number of the component in the Internal Part No. field and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the Internal Part No. Table; the tabs in the Component Details
Section section display the details for the component.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 209

February 2016
Components
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit Together at

4. Click the Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab; it displays the combination of wire sizes (with
their material codes) that fit the cavities of the component.
5. Select the configuration in the Configuration List; the Wire Size table displays the wire
sizes in that configuration.
6. Select a row in the Wire Size table and click Delete; the row is dimmed.
7. Repeat steps 6 for each row in the Wire Size table.
8. Click Apply; the configuration is removed from the Configuration List.
Related Topics
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab

Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity -

Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit Together at
Connector Cavities
This usage example demonstrates how to specify that a pair of wire sizes fit together in the
cavities of a connector. It uses wire group definitions and the Multiple Wire Fits Cavity tab of
the Component Maintenance dialog box for a connector.
Note
This usage example is based on quick start data supplied with the software. The library data
dictates the wire sizes that are available for selection when doing this.

Using wire group definitions can greatly reduce the number of mouse clicks required when
adding a configuration of wire sizes to each cavity of a connector.

Procedure
1. Create the Wire Group Definitions applicable for the cavities:
a. Select Codes > Wire Group Definition from the Components Main Menu. The
Wire Group Definition Dialog Box is displayed.
b. Click New.
c. Enter a Name and Description for the wire group. In this case, enter the name
PAIR_MWFC and description Wire pair for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity.
d. In this example, you do not want to limit the wires available for selection to a
particular Range Specification so select Wire Sizes; the Available grid in the Wire
Sizes section lists all wire sizes in the library that you can select for the wire group.

210 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit Together at

Figure 3-36. Wire Group Name, Description and Range Specification

e. In the Available grid of the Wire Sizes section, select the wire sizes that you want to
include in the wire group and click Add; the wire sizes are added to the Selected
grid. In this example, you add the wire sizes in the following screenshot.
Figure 3-37. Selected Wire Sizes in Wire Group

f. Click Apply.

Note
If you wanted to use different wire group definitions for different cavities on the
connector, you would repeat steps b to f for each wire group definition. In this
example, you will use this wire group definition for all cavities on a connector.

2. Create a connector with the required number of cavities:

a. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main
Menu. The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
b. Enter an Internal Part No. In this case, ConnMWFC.
c. On the Internal tab, click New; the new part number is added to the Internal Part
No. Table.
d. On the Base Tab, specify the Group Name (Connector), Type Code (CONN), Color
Code (B), Material Code (PVC) and No. Cavities (56).

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 211

February 2016
Components
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit Together at

Figure 3-38. 56-Cavity Connector Definition

e. Click Apply; the values specified are added to the Internal Part No. Table.
3. Create a multiple wire fits cavity configuration. This specifies a combination of wire
sizes and wire material that fit simultaneously at the cavities of the connector.

Note
On the Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab, you can specify single wire sizes that fit the
connector cavities for situations where only one wire terminates at them.

However, in this example, we are concentrating on a situation where multiple wires

terminate at the cavities. In this case, only the combinations that you specify are
allowed. Any other combinations will trigger a design rule check in Capital Logic and
Capital HarnessXC.

To do this:
a. Click the Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab for the connector and click the New
Configuration button; the Specify Cavity dialog box is displayed.
b. For the purpose of this example, leave the field blank so that the configuration is
applicable to all cavities on the connector.

Note
If you wanted to use this multiple wire configuration for a specific cavity, you
would enter the cavity name in the Cavity Name field. You cannot enter
multiple cavities. If different cavities on one connector require different
configurations, you must enter a configuration for each individual cavity.

Click OK; a blank row is added to the Configuration List.

212 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit Together at

Figure 3-39. Blank Row in Configuration List

c. Specify that a combination of the two wires in the wire group that you created fit at
the cavities.
i. Select the blank row in the Configuration List.
ii. Click the New button below the Wire Size table; a row is added to the table.
Figure 3-40. Blank Row in Wire Size Table

iii. From the Wire Group Name drop-down list, select the PAIR_MWFC wire
group.
Figure 3-41. Wire Group Name Drop-down List

The wire group name is added to the row in the Wire Size table.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 213

February 2016
Components
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit Together at

Figure 3-42. Updated Row in Wire Size Table

Note
This row represents only one wire. It is specifying that either a wire TWC
11/.2 (0.25, 1.064190) or a wire TWC 18/.3 (1.25,1.8615660) can fit at the
cavities. It is not specifying that both fit together. You therefore have to add a
second row for the wire group to the wire size table.

iv. Repeat steps i to iii to add the wire group again.

Figure 3-43. Wire Size Table with Wire Group Added Twice

d. Click the Wire Group Combination button to view the possible combinations of
wire sizes that fit at the cavities.

214 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit Together at

Figure 3-44. Possible Combinations of Wire Sizes at Connector Cavities

This shows that there are three possible combinations of the two wires from the wire
group that can fit at the cavities.
e. Click Apply at the bottom of the Component Maintenance Dialog Box.

Note
When this connector is used in Capital Logic or Capital HarnessXC, the Wire
fits cavity mismatch design rule check identifies if an incompatible
combination of wire sizes terminate at a cavity. See Design Rule Check Descriptions
in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide.

Related Topics
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 215

February 2016
Components
Copying Components

Copying Components
You can copy details (attributes) from one component to another.
The following topics provide more detail:

Copying Details from a Component to a New Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Copying Details from a Component to Other Existing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Copying Details from a Component to a New

Component
You can copy details (attributes) from one component to a new component that you create
during the copy process.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Copy Component Details from the Components Main Menu.
The Copy Component Details Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Copy From section, specify the Part Number of the source component.
3. Click New; the Create New Part Dialog Box is displayed.
4. Specify the Part Number and Group Name of the new component. Click Add; the new
part number is added to the Copy To table.
5. In the Copy Selected Object section, specify the attributes that you want to copy to the
new object.
6. Click Apply; the new object is created. A progress bar and message indicate when the
copy is complete.
7. Click OK.
Related Topics
Copying Details from a Component to Other Existing Components

Copying Details from a Component to Other

Existing Components
You can copy details (attributes) from one component to other existing components.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Copy Component Details from the Components Main Menu.
The Copy Component Details Dialog Box is displayed.

216 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Deleting Components

2. In the Copy From section, specify the Part Number.

3. In the Copy To table, specify the components to which you want to copy details.
a. Click Add; the Part Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
b. Search for the component parts.
c. Select the target components in the table.
d. Click Insert; the selected components are added to the Copy To table.
e. Repeat steps a to d until all of the components to which you want to copy details are
listed in the Copy To table.
4. Click Apply; a progress bar and message indicate when the copy is complete.
5. Click OK.
Related Topics
Copying Details from a Component to a New Component

Deleting Components
You can delete obsolete components from the library.
Note
Only components with a status of Obsolete can be deleted. You can delete components only
if your user account has the Delete Components permission.

Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Details from the Components Main Menu. The
Component Deletion Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the Log File and click Search; obsolete components that can be deleted are
displayed in the “Components for Deletion” table.
3. Select the components that you do not want to delete and click Remove From List;
those components are removed from the “Components for Deletion” table.
4. Click Delete; a message asks you to confirm the deletion of the components listed in the
“Components for Deletion” table. Click OK; the components are deleted from the
library.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 217

February 2016
Components
Usage Example - Bulk Creating and Editing of Multiple Component Details

Usage Example - Bulk Creating and Editing of

Multiple Component Details
Capital Library enables the creation and editing of multiple parts using the Copy Component
Details dialog. You are able to copy one or more attributes from a source component to any
number of target components.
This is useful in scenarios such as where a part family of two hundred components has been
created and you realize that you have omitted or incorrectly entered an attribute used by each of
the two hundred components. Rather than update each component individually, the Copy
Component Details dialog allows you apply bulk changes to multiple objects.

In the following example you wish to update multiple devices with a property rating = 10A and
an attribute "weight" with value 0.5.

Figure 3-45. Using the Copy Components Dialog to Make Bulk Changes

Procedure
1. Create a device part number, for example 'MGC-100' (or use an existing device) with the
property 'rating' = 10 and attribute weight = 0.5.

218 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Example - Bulk Deletion of Multiple Component Details

2. In the Copy Component Details dialog, Copy From panel, select the part number MGC-
100.
3. In the Copy To panel, press the Add button to search and select one or more target
components. You can also use the Filter functionality to narrow your search definition
for the target components. You can also create one or more New Components.
4. In the Copy Selected Object panel, select the attribute 'Weight' and 'Properties' and press
Apply. The system will copy weight and property to multiple selected devices.

Note
You can also rapidly change the status of multiple components to obsolete/current
using this procedure.

Usage Example - Bulk Deletion of Multiple

Component Details
In situations where existing library parts need to be removed in bulk, for example in test
environments, deleting the parts one by one may not be the best solution.
As with the bulk editing of component details Capital offers a quick way of achieving this
operation in batch in Capital Library.

Procedure
1. Select one component and change its status to Obsolete.
2. In the Copy Component Details dialog search for this component to use as the change
source.
3. For target components, search and select all other components in library.
4. In the Copy Selected Objects panel, select only the Status attribute. Press Apply.
5. Once done, in Component Deletion Dialog Box, select delete all obsoleted components.

Note
There are certain special cases to consider regarding used parts.

Some of the components marked for deletion (Obsolete) may be used in other
components (Housing Definition) or in designs in the database. If such a situation is
present, then the Component Deletion facility will identify these cases in the
"Components in Use" section so you can resolve them before deletion is possible.

Usages can be resolved by removing the obsolete part from the design/component where
it is used, or by deleting the design/component altogether.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 219

February 2016
Components
Importing and Exporting Components

Importing and Exporting Components

You can export and import component parts in an XML, or custom specified, format.
Note
The Import/Export interface supports the use of custom plugin adaptors to enable the import
and export of component libraries and objects, for example PCB definitions, in formats
other than the default XML formatted supported by Capital. When in use it consumes a license
(extensibility).

The following topics provide more detail:

Exporting the Entire Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Exporting Selected Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Importing Component Parts and Codes into the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Exporting the Entire Library

You can export the entire library, including all component parts and codes, in XML, or custom
specified, format so that it can be imported into another installation of this application suite.
Note
Export of a component is not permitted if the currently logged-in user does not have read-
write access to the domain assigned to that component.

Procedure
1. Select File > Export from the menu; the Export Library Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the Export File, Log File and select Export entire library. Select “Include
scoping?” as required.
3. Click Export; a progress bar and message indicates when the export is complete.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Exporting Selected Component Parts

Exporting Selected Component Parts

You can export selected component parts in XML format so that they can be imported into
another installation of this application suite.

220 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Importing Component Parts and Codes into the Library

Note
Export of a component is not permitted if the currently logged-in user does not have read-
write access to the domain assigned to that component.

Procedure
1. Select File > Export from the menu; the Export Library Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the Export File and Log File. Select “Include scoping?” and “Export All
Revisions” as required.
3. Add the components to the Selected Component Parts table.
a. Click Add; the Part Selection Dialog Box is displayed.
b. Search for the component parts that you want to export.
c. Select the components to be exported in the table.
d. Click Insert; the selected components are added to the Selected Component Parts
table.
e. Repeat steps a to d to until all of the components that you want to export are listed in
the Selected Component Parts table.
4. Click Export; a progress bar and message indicates when the export is complete.
5. Click OK.
Related Topics
Exporting the Entire Library

Importing Component Parts and Codes into the

Library
You can import component parts and codes into the library from an XML, or custom specified,
file.
Note
This functionality is not available in a UNIX environment if you are running a dual
installation of Capital Harness Classic and Capital. If you have legacy data from Capital
Harness Classic stored in a Capital Library Archive file (*.cla) that you want to import, unzip
the .cla file and import the XML file contained therein. Any data from a component
management system other than Capital Library must adhere to the Capital component database
structure and format.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 221

February 2016
Components
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

Procedure
1. Select File > Import from the menu; the Import Library Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the Library file and whether you want the import to Replace, Merge or Ignore
parts with duplicate internal part numbers.
3. Select “Modify existing code descriptions”, “Import scoping” and “Import modification
history” as required.
4. Specify the name and location of the Log file that you want the import process to create.
5. Click Import; a progress bar and message indicates when the import is complete.
6. Click OK.

Note
When importing a component, if it already exists in the library with a domain
specified, but the currently logged-in user does not have read-write access to that
domain, the component is not overwritten, and details are written to the log file.

Related Topics
Exporting the Entire Library
Exporting Selected Component Parts

Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

The following examples describe the merging of library data components when library data is
imported.
Library data is categorized into:

• Codes (color, material, component type codes and so on)

• Parts (Connector, Device, Clip and so on)
Library parts data consists of the following:

• Part base information (attributes such as part number, color code, number of cavities and
so on)
• Child element collections information (customer part numbers, housing definition and
so on)

Library Part Information Merging

Part information merging happens at two distinct levels - attribute merging and child elements
merging. In certain cases, merging may not be possible for specific child element collections. In
these instances import is always carried out in truncate mode irrespective of the mode selected

222 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

at the time of import. For further information see “Exceptions to Child Element Collections
Merging” below.

Library Part Base Information Merging

Here is an example for library part base information merging. In this example it is important to
note the following:

• The description is preserved following import.

• Existing attributes are overwritten with incoming attribute information.
• The number of cavities has decreased. Existing cavity information is replaced by the
incoming cavity information.
Additionally, fields which allow multiple entries such as Supplier and Mating Part Numbers
perform in the following way:

• Supplier Part Number changes, for example ABC, import XYZ

o Merged result is two Supplier Part records for that component, one is ABC the other
XYZ
o Truncated result is one Supplier Part record called XYZ
• Mating Part Name change, for example P_123 import P_456
o Merged result is two Mating Part records for that component, one is P_123 the other
P_456
o Truncated result is one Mating Part record called P_456

Note
Attributes for which there is no incoming library data are preserved. They will
not be overwritten and the data already available in the database will be referred
to.

Table 3-2. Library Part Base Information Merging - Database Content

Part Description Group Status Type Color Material Num
Number Name Code Code Code Cavities
CN101 Connector Connector Current CONN B TWC 10
Part

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 223

February 2016
Components
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

Table 3-3. Library Part Base Information Merging - Content Being Imported
Part Description Group Status Type Color Material Num
Number Name Code Code Code Cavities
CN101 -(NA) Connector New CONN B PVC 5

Table 3-4. Library Part Base Information Merging - Merged Content

Part Description Group Status Type Color Material Num
Number Name Code Code Code Cavities
CN101 Connector Connector New CONN B PVC 5
Part

Library Part Child Element Information Merging

Here is an example for child element information (housing definitions) merging. In this
example it is important to note the following:

• There are now three housing definitions:

o Old
o Merged
o New
• The usage value for OT103 has been preserved as the user has not entered any data in
the imported data field, i.e. - (N/A)
• Position value for OT103 has been overwritten as the user has explicitly stated that this
field should be blank, i.e. - (Blank)
• Scoping information has been lost for OT103
• All available attributes for OT103 have been overwritten

Table 3-5. Library Part Child Element Information Merging - Database Content

Sub- Group Quantit Cavity Position Usage Factor Scoped

componen Name y
t
OT103 Other 1 - (blank) 1 Mandatory 1 Yes

224 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

Table 3-6. Library Part Child Element Information Merging - Content Being
Imported
Sub- Group Quantit Cavity Position Usage Factor Scoped
componen Name y
t
OT103 Other 1 2 - (blank) - (NA) 1 No

Table 3-7. Library Part Child Element Information Merging - Merged Content
Sub- Group Quantit Cavity Position Usage Factor Scoped
componen Name y
t
OT103 Other 1 2 - (blank) Mandatory 1 No

Exceptions to Child Element Collections Merging

In certain cases, merging may not be possible for specific child element collections. In these
instances import is always carried out in truncate mode irrespective of the mode selected at the
time of import.

The following is list of such exceptions to child element collections merging:

• Cavities/Pins/Terminations
• Symbols
• Single Terminations
• Multiple terminations
• Single wire fits cavity
• Multiple wire fits cavity
• Inner cores of a multicore
• Mating
• Footprint mapping
Footprint Merging
Harness connector footprints are never removed from a target device in the database.

If the incoming device has additional footprints with different names, the footprint is added to
the target device. The target device retains the original default footprint definition, that is, the
incoming footprint is not made default. If required, you must make this change manually.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 225

February 2016
Components
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

If the incoming device has a footprint with a name identical to one on the target device and the
mapping is identical, no changes are made.

If the incoming device has a footprint with an identical name and the mapping is different, the
entire footprint is replaced with the incoming definition.

If the incoming component has a device connector footprint with a different name to the device
connector footprint on the target component, the existing footprint is replaced with the
incoming footprint.

If there is a name clash between a harness connector footprint and a device connector footprint,
the existing footprint definition is retained but its name is changed, for example, to <current-
name>_<unique-number>. The incoming footprint definition is added with its name.

Mating Definition Merging

Mating definitions are never removed from the target connector, instead new mating definitions
are appended to the target connector.

However, if an incoming mating definition (to an already existing connector) has a different
mapping, then it overwrites the target mating definition.

Symbol Definition Merging

If an incoming component has references to additional symbols, these references are added to
the target device (even if the symbol does not exist at the moment).

Codes Merging
Codes import is always carried out in truncated mode irrespective of the mode selected at the
time of invoking library import. Codes are classified into the following two types:

• Basic codes (color, material, etc.,) merging

• Derived codes (combination of component type and user property and so on) merging
Basic Codes Merging
Here is an example for basic code (component type code) merging. Basic codes include color,
material and so on:

Table 3-8. Basic Code Merging - Database Content

Component Type Code Description Group Name
CVSL Seal Type Cavity Seal

226 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

Table 3-9. Basic Code Merging - Content Being Imported

Component Type Code Description Group Name
CVSL Seal Code Connector Seal

Table 3-10. Basic Code Merging - Merged Content

Component Type Code Description Group Name
CVSL Seal Code Connector Seal

Derived Codes Merging

Here is an example for derived codes (properties for type codes) merging. Derived codes are
formed by combinations of multiple basic codes merging. In this example it is important to note
the following:

• Codes import always occurs in truncated mode.

• In attribute merging, only those attributes for which there is no incoming data are
preserved. You cannot import data with all attributes absent as there are some attributes
which are mandatory. However the library schema will ensure this.
• There are some exceptions to child element collections merging. See “Exceptions to
Child Element Collections Merging” above..
• After merging, validation is run to cross check data consistency and invalid data is
scrubbed if required. Scrubbed entries are entered in the library log file. For example,
the value of the attribute "number of cavities" and the actual cavities size should be
matched after importing a connector in merged mode.

Note
Attributes for which there is no incoming library data are preserved. They will not be
overwritten and the data already available in the database will be referred to.

Table 3-11. Derived Code Merging - Database Content

Component Type Code Property Code Description Pin Property
CONN Prop1 Connector Property Yes

Table 3-12. Derived Code Merging - Content Being Imported

Component Type Code Property Code Description Pin Property
CONN Prop1 IDC Connector No

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 227

February 2016
Components
Refreshing Symbol Library Data

Table 3-13. Derived Code Merging - Merged Content

Component Type Code Property Code Description Pin Property
CONN Prop1 IDC Connector No

Related Topics
Import Library Dialog Box

Refreshing Symbol Library Data

You can refresh the symbol library data used by Capital Library so that it includes any, and all,
recent symbol library changes made in Capital Symbol sessions.
Procedure
Select Actions > Refresh Symbol Libraries from the menu; the data used by Capital Library is
updated.

Changing the Background Display Color of

Symbols
You can toggle the background color in windows where symbols are displayed in Capital
Library.
Procedure
Select Actions > Toggle Color Map from the menu to select either white (unchecked), or black
(checked) backgrounds.

Note
The background color change only affects on-screen viewing; it does not affect
printing a symbol from elsewhere in Capital.

228 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Searching for Components

Searching for Components

There are various ways to search for components in the library.
The following topics provide details:

Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Searching for Components Using Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Searching for All Components in the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Searching for Components Using Internal Part

Number
You can search for components in the library using their internal part numbers.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the Search Criteria in the Internal Part No. field on the Internal tab and press
Return. The Internal Part No. Table displays components with internal part numbers
matching your search criteria.
Related Topics
Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number
Searching for Components Using Component Details
Searching for All Components in the Library

Searching for Components Using Customer Part

Number
You can search for components in the library using the customer part numbers.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 229

February 2016
Components
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number

2. Click the Customer tab.

3. Enter the Search Criteria in the Customer Part No. field on the Customer tab and press
Return. The Customer Part No. table displays components with customer part numbers
matching your search criteria.
Related Topics
Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number
Searching for Components Using Component Details
Searching for All Components in the Library

Searching for Components Using Supplier Part

Number
You can search for components in the library using the supplier part numbers.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click the Supplier tab.
3. Enter the Search Criteria in the Supplier Part No. field on the Supplier tab and press
Return. The Supplier Part No. table displays components matching your search criteria.
Related Topics
Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number
Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number
Searching for Components Using Component Details
Searching for All Components in the Library

Searching for Components Using Component

Details
You can search for components in the library using component details.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter the Search Criteria in the Internal Part No. field as required.

230 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Components
Searching for All Components in the Library

3. Specify values on the Component Details Section tabs and click Search. The Internal
Part No. Table displays components with internal part numbers and component details
matching your search criteria.

Note
When you specify values for multiple fields on the Component Details section tabs,
these values have an OR relationship. For example, if you are searching for wires
and specify a customer on the Customer Tab (Component Details) and a specification on
the Base Tab, a wire needs to match only one of those fields to be returned in the search
results.

Related Topics
Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number
Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number
Searching for All Components in the Library

Searching for All Components in the Library

You can search for all components in the library.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Leave the Internal Part No. field blank on the Internal tab and press Return. The
Internal Part No. Table displays all components in the library.
Related Topics
Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number
Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number
Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number
Searching for Components Using Component Details

Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part

Selection Dialog Box
You can use the Part Selection dialog box to select one or more component part numbers when
editing a field on another dialog box that requires a component part number to be entered.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 231

February 2016
Components
Finding Where a Component Is Used

Procedure
1. In the Part Selection Dialog Box, enter your search criteria on the tabs as required and
click Search.
The search results are returned in the table at the top of the facility.
2. Select the part numbers that you want to use in the table and click Insert.
The Part Selection dialog box closes and the selected component part definitions are
added to the field that you are editing.

Finding Where a Component Is Used

You can find where a component has been used either in conjunction with another component in
the library or in projects.
Procedure
1. Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main Menu.
The Component Maintenance Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Enter a part number for component in the Internal Part No., Customer Part No. or
Supplier Part No. field in the Component Selection section and press Return. The
Internal Part No. Table, Customer Part No. table or Supplier Part No. table displays
components matching your search criteria.
3. Select the component in the table; the tabs in the Component Details Section section
display the details for the component.
4. Click Library Usage / Project Usages and select whether you want to view library usages
or project usages:

5. The Library Usages Dialog Box or Project Usages Dialog Box is displayed where the
usages of the component are listed in a table.

232 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 4
Codes

Codes are pre-configured lists of reusable component attributes - such as color, material, and so
on, that can be selected when creating components.
Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Creating a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Editing a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Deleting a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Material Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Creating a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Editing a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Deleting a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Component Type Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Creating a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Editing a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Deleting a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Customer Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Creating a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Editing a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Deleting a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Wire Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Creating a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Editing a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Deleting a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Wire Insulation Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Property Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating a Pin Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Editing a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Deleting a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Properties for Type Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Creating a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Editing a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Deleting a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Manufacturing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 233

February 2016
Codes

Creating a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Editing a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Deleting a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Creating a Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Editing a Scope Code Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Deleting a Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Applying Scope Codes to Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Applying Scope Codes to Projects or Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Part Selection and Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Scoping Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Housing Selection Using Component Scoping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Pitch Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Editing a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Deleting a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Pitch Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Creating a Pitch Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Editing a Pitch Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Deleting a Pitch Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Creating a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Editing a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Deleting a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Importing and Exporting Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Exporting all Codes from the Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Importing Codes into the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Refreshing Library Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Finding Which Components Use a Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

234 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Color Codes

Color Codes
Color codes are used to define component colors, and link an identifying code to a description
of the color.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete color codes.

Creating a Color Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Editing a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Deleting a Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Creating a Color Code

You can create a new color code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Color Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Color Codes
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Color Code and Description.

Note
You can define the precise color using either swatches, HSB or RGB values by
clicking the ellipsis (...) next to the Color Definition field.

4. Click Apply; the new color code is added to the Color Codes table.
Related Topics
Editing a Color Code
Deleting a Color Code

Editing a Color Code

You can edit an existing color code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Color Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Color Codes
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Color Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to edit.
3. Edit the contents of the Description field as required.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 235

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Color Code

Note
The Color Code field cannot be edited.

4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Color Code
Deleting a Color Code

Deleting a Color Code

You can remove a color code from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a color code if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Color Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Color Codes
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Color Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a color code, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore until
you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Editing a Color Code

236 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Material Codes

Material Codes
Material codes are used to define component materials, and link an identifying code to a
description of the material.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete material codes.

Creating a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Editing a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Deleting a Material Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Creating a Material Code

You can create a new material code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Material Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Material
Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Material Code and Description.
4. Click Apply; the new material code is added to the Material Codes table.
Related Topics
Editing a Material Code
Deleting a Material Code

Editing a Material Code

You can edit an existing material code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Material Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Material
Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Material Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to edit.
3. Edit the contents of the Description field as required.

Note
The Material Code field cannot be edited.

4. Click Apply.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 237

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Material Code

Related Topics
Creating a Material Code
Deleting a Material Code

Deleting a Material Code

You can remove a material code from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a material code if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Material Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Material
Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Material Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a material code, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore
until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Material Code
Editing a Material Code

238 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Component Type Codes

Component Type Codes

Component type codes provide a method of categorizing components beyond that offered by the
system-defined component groups. This additional information can then be used to further filter
the components returned when searching using the Part Selection dialog box.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete component type codes.

Creating a Component Type Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Editing a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Deleting a Component Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Creating a Component Type Code

You can create a new component type code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Component Type Codes from the Components Main Menu. The
Component Type Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Type Code and Description.
4. Click Apply; the new component type code is added to the Component Type Codes
table.
Related Topics
Editing a Component Type Code
Deleting a Component Type Code

Editing a Component Type Code

You can edit an existing component code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Component Type Codes from the Components Main Menu. The
Component Type Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Component Type Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to edit.
3. Make any changes required.

Note
The Type Code field cannot be edited.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 239

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Component Type Code

4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Component Type Code
Deleting a Component Type Code

Deleting a Component Type Code

You can remove a component type code from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a component type code if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Component Type Codes from the Components Main Menu. The
Component Type Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Component Type Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to
delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a component type code, the Delete button is relabeled as
Restore until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Component Type Code
Editing a Component Type Code

240 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Customer Color Codes

Customer Color Codes

Customer color codes are used to associate a customer’s color definitions with the internal color
codes already created within the library. This allows customers to work with their own lists of
colors - in their own language if preferred - while maintaining a consistent core list of internal
colors.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete customer color codes.

Creating a Customer Color Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Editing a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Deleting a Customer Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Creating a Customer Color Code

You can create a new customer color code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Customer Color Codes from the Components Main Menu. The
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Select the customer to whom the code applies from the Customer Name drop-down list.
4. Enter a Customer Color Code and Description.
5. Specify the Internal Color Code with which the customer color code is associated, either
by typing an existing code into the field, or by clicking the ellipsis (...) button to the right
of the field and selecting a code from the Color Code Selection Dialog Box.
6. Click Apply; the new customer color code is added to the Customer Color Codes table.
Related Topics
Editing a Customer Color Code
Deleting a Customer Color Code

Editing a Customer Color Code

You can edit an existing customer color code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Customer Color Codes from the Components Main Menu. The
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Customer Color Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to edit.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 241

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Customer Color Code

3. Edit the Customer Name, Customer Color Code and Internal Color Code fields as
required.

Note
The Description field cannot be edited.

4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Customer Color Code
Deleting a Customer Color Code

Deleting a Customer Color Code

You can remove a customer color code from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a customer color code if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Customer Color Codes from the Components Main Menu. The
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Customer Color Codes table, select the row containing the code you want to
delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a customer color code, the Delete button is relabeled as
Restore until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Editing a Customer Color Code

242 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Wire Sizes

Wire Sizes
Wire sizes are used to link wire cross-sectional areas and materials to one or more available
specifications, allowing appropriate wire specifications to be selected once a C.S.A and material
are specified.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete wire sizes.

Creating a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Editing a Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Deleting a Wire Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Creating a Wire Size

You can create a new wire size.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Sizes from the Components Main Menu. The Wire Sizes Dialog
Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Specify a Material Code, Specification and CSA.
4. Click Apply; the new wire size is added to the Wire Sizes table.
Related Topics
Editing a Wire Size
Deleting a Wire Size

Editing a Wire Size

You can edit an existing wire size.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Sizes from the Components Main Menu. The Wire Sizes Dialog
Box is displayed.
2. In the Wire Sizes table, select the row containing the wire size you want to edit.
3. Edit the CSA field as required.

Note
The Material Code and Specification fields cannot be edited.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 243

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Wire Size

4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Wire Size
Deleting a Wire Size

Deleting a Wire Size

You can remove a wire size from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a wire size if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Sizes from the Components Main Menu. The Wire Sizes Dialog
Box is displayed.
2. In the Wire Sizes table, select the row containing the wire size you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a wire size, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore until
you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Size
Editing a Wire Size

244 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Wire Insulation Thickness

Wire Insulation Thickness

Wire insulation thickness records allow the calculation of accurate bundle diameters based on
the cross-sectional areas of the wires running through them. By specifying an insulation
thickness and the range of cross-sectional areas to which it applies for a given conductor
material, the engineering calculations routine (in Capital Harness Classic or Capital
HarnessXC) can add the correct thickness of insulation to each wire when calculating the
bundle diameter.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete wire insulation thicknesses.

Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness

You can create a new wire insulation thickness record.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Insulation Thickness from the Components Main Menu. The
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Specify a Material Code and Thickness.
4. Define the range of conductor cross-sectional areas to which the Thickness specified,
above, applies by entering a Min CSA and Max CSA
5. Click Apply; the new wire insulation thickness is added to the Wire Insulation
Thickness table.
Related Topics
Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness
Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness

Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness

You can edit an existing wire insulation thickness record.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Insulation Thickness from the Components Main Menu. The
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box is displayed.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 245

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness

2. In the Wire Insulation Thickness table, select the row containing the record you want to
edit.
3. Edit the Thickness field as required.

Note
The Material Code, Min CSA and Max CSA fields cannot be edited.

4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness
Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness

Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness

You can remove a wire insulation thickness record from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a wire insulation thickness if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Insulation Thickness from the Components Main Menu. The
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Wire Insulation Thickness table, select the row containing the record you want to
delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a wire insulation thickness, the Delete button is relabeled as
Restore until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness
Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness

246 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Property Codes

Property Codes
Property codes allow you to assign user-defined values to components, which are then exposed
when the component is placed onto a logical, topological or harness design.
Note
Due to the large number of property codes typically used in a single library, each property
must be associated with a Type Code using the Properties for Type Code Dialog Box. This
action ensures that only properties applicable to a component are displayed when browsing for a
property from the Properties Tab of the Component Maintenance Dialog Box.

The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete property codes.

Creating a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Creating a Pin Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Editing a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Deleting a Property Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Creating a Property Code

You can create a new property code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Property Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Property
Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Property name and Description.
4. Select the allowable Data Type from the drop-down list.
5. Click Apply; the new property code is added to the Properties table.
Related Topics
Creating a Properties for Type Code
Editing a Property Code
Deleting a Property Code

Creating a Pin Property Code

This topic details how to create a new property code that is only exposed for use with device
pins. Any properties created in this way, and assigned to a Properties for Type Code, are

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 247

February 2016
Codes
Editing a Property Code

exposed on the Pin Attributes tab of the Component Maintenance dialog box when editing
devices with the appropriate type code applied.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Property Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Property
Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Property name and Description.
4. Select the Pin Property option.
5. Select the allowable Data Type from the drop-down list.
6. Click Apply; the new property code is added to the Properties table.
Related Topics
Creating a Properties for Type Code
Creating a Property Code
Editing a Property Code
Deleting a Property Code
Pin Attributes Tab
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Editing a Property Code

You can edit an existing property code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Property Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Property
Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Properties table, select the row containing the code you want to edit.
3. Make any changes required.
4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Property Code
Deleting a Property Code

248 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Deleting a Property Code

Deleting a Property Code

You can remove a property code from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a property code if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Property Codes from the Components Main Menu. The Property
Codes Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Properties table, select the row containing the code you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a property code, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore
until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Property Code
Editing a Property Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 249

February 2016
Codes
Properties for Type Codes

Properties for Type Codes

Properties for type codes allow you to restrict property codes to a specific component type,
ensuring that when you search for a property to assign to a component, only relevant properties
are returned.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete properties for type codes.

Creating a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Editing a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Deleting a Properties for Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Creating a Properties for Type Code

You can create a new properties for type code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Properties for Type Code from the Components Main Menu. The
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Specify the component Type C ode with which the property, below, is to be associated.
4. Specify the Property.
5. Click Apply; the new code is added to the Part Type Properties table.
Related Topics
Editing a Properties for Type Code
Deleting a Properties for Type Code

Editing a Properties for Type Code

You can edit an existing properties for type code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Properties for Type Code from the Components Main Menu. The
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Part Type Properties table, select the row containing the code you want to edit.
3. Make any changes required.
4. Click Apply.

250 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Deleting a Properties for Type Code

Related Topics
Creating a Properties for Type Code
Deleting a Properties for Type Code

Deleting a Properties for Type Code

You can remove a properties for type code from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a code if it has been used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Properties for Type Code from the Components Main Menu. The
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Part Type Properties table, select the row containing the code you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a code, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore until you
click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Properties for Type Code
Editing a Properties for Type Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 251

February 2016
Codes
Manufacturing Sites

Manufacturing Sites
Manufacturing sites are used to record the location in which a harness is constructed. As well as
storing contact information, manufacturing sites can be used when scoping connectors,
restricting the sub-components offered from a connector’s housing definition to only those
available at the site.
See “Housing” on page 190 for more information.

The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete manufacturing sites.

Creating a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Editing a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Deleting a Manufacturing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Creating a Manufacturing Site

You can create a new manufacturing site.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Manufacturing Sites from the Components Main Menu. The
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Name.
4. Click Apply; the new manufacturing site is added to the Manufacturing Sites table.
Related Topics
Editing a Manufacturing Site
Deleting a Manufacturing Site

Editing a Manufacturing Site

You can edit an existing manufacturing site.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Manufacturing Sites from the Components Main Menu. The
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Manufacturing Sites table, select the row containing the site you want to edit.
3. Edit the fields as required.
4. Click Apply.

252 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Deleting a Manufacturing Site

Related Topics
Creating a Manufacturing Site
Deleting a Manufacturing Site

Deleting a Manufacturing Site

You can remove a manufacturing site from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a manufacturing site if it has been used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Manufacturing Sites from the Components Main Menu. The
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Manufacturing Sites table, select the row containing the site you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a manufacturing site, the Delete button is relabeled as
Restore until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Manufacturing Site
Editing a Manufacturing Site

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 253

February 2016
Codes
Scope Code

Scope Code
Component Scoping is a code based method for controlling access to component data across
Capital. Scope codes are applied to components, sub-components, designs and projects. They
restrict the use of components within projects and designs. Whenever the system or a user
selects a component, only those components within the scopes applied to the project or design
are available.
Within individual business or global organizations there is often the need to control the
availability of component data within each of the design tools. A typical example of this would
be the partitioning of component data for particular geographic markets where vehicle projects
are reused and adapted to meet local certifications and manufacturing requirements. There are
many more examples, all of which require the partitioning of component data for different sets
of users within the same organization.

A defined set of codes is used to identify which components are available to users working on
designs within a project. The level of granularity to which the scopes are applied is controlled
by the administrator/librarian who is able to assign them at the project or design level.

Using this framework the administrator/librarian is able to control which component subsets are
available to users based on the business requirements. Component scopes are not specifically
related to the user, as long as the user in the correct domains then they are able to access the
scoped components available to that design.

Pluggable component scoping is also available to organizations who wish to use the power of
the API to define their own custom rules. All scoping scenarios are supported using pluggable
scoping to allow a single component library to support any number of sites irrespective of their
requirements and needs. For further information see “Extensibility Plugins” on page 48.

The librarian is able to define any number of codes within Capital Library; the codes are
organized into Categories. For example - The category Europe could contain the country codes
that the company deals with such as UK, France, Germany and so on.

The codes can be assigned to components within the library database as included or excluded.
The same codes are then assigned to projects or designs allowing the part selection dialog or
harness processing to discriminate which components should be available to the user.

Parts which do not have scopes set and are not explicitly excluded from the Project or Design
will be available to the user.

A library consistency DRC "Component out of scope" is available within each of the design
tools to ensure that the components remain valid after scoping or design changes have been
made.

The Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping takes you through setting up a number
of typical scoping scenarios for management of parts during the design and manufacturing

254 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Creating a Scope Code

process. Housing Selection Using Component Scoping details how scoping can be used to
control the selection of housing components.

The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete scope codes.

Creating a Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Editing a Scope Code Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Deleting a Scope Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Applying Scope Codes to Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Applying Scope Codes to Projects or Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Part Selection and Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Scoping Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Housing Selection Using Component Scoping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Creating a Scope Code

You can create a new scope code in Capital Library.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Scopes from the Components Main Menu. The Scope Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Category, Name and Description value.
4. Click Apply; the new scope code is added to the Scopes table.
Related Topics
Editing a Scope Code Description
Deleting a Scope Code

Editing a Scope Code Description

You can edit the description for an existing scope code.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Scopes from the Components Main Menu. The Scope Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the Scopes table, select the row containing the scope code you want to edit.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 255

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Scope Code

3. Edit the Description field as required.

4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Scope Code
Deleting a Scope Code

Deleting a Scope Code

You can remove a scope code from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a scope code if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Scopes from the Components Main Menu. The Scope Dialog Box is
displayed.
2. In the Scopes table, select the row containing the scope code you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a scope definition, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore
until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping

The following usage example details a series of steps on how to use the scoping functionality. It
provides examples of common scenarios experienced by Original Equipment Manufacturers
(OEMS') and their suppliers and how component scoping can be used to meet these
requirements. Finally it explains how component scoping can be used for the finer control of
housing part selection during harness processing.
An example where component scoping is used is where an OEM or Tier 1 supplier has multiple
manufacturing sites in different countries or continents. Often in this scenario, components are
sourced locally and given different part numbers within the library database. Designers must be
able to determine which part to use for the geographical area in which they are designing;
component scoping is ideal for this purpose allowing the librarian to control which parts should
be selected.

256 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Applying Scope Codes to Components

Another common scenario is where a supplier has multiple customers each with their own part
numbers for similar components; component scoping allows them to control the parts which
should be selected based on the customer for which they are designing.

Applying Scope Codes to Components

This section of the usage example guides you through creating scope codes and applying them
to components.
Prerequisites
Install the starter data where some examples of Manufacturing and Customer Categories are
provided.

Procedure
1. Select the Codes tab in Capital Library to open the Scopes dialog and create the new
codes. Codes can be grouped into categories for example - the category Manufacturing
site could contain the country codes that have manufacturing sites, for example the UK,
Mexico, USA and so on.
Figure 4-1. Scopes Dialog Codes Tab

2. Apply Scope Codes to components by selecting Component Maintenance and the

component you wish to scope.
3. Select the Scope tab and add the scopes to be included or excluded.
Figure 4-2. Including or Excluding Scopes

4. Include or Exclude individual component scopes by selecting the tree node, and
selecting for excluded or for included. For example, from the image above the

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 257

February 2016
Codes
Applying Scope Codes to Projects or Designs

code “Military Aero United States” has been excluded and the code “United States
Manufacturing” has been included.
Figure 4-3. Example Scope Inclusion and Exclusion

Applying Scope Codes to Projects or Designs

This section of the usage example guides you through applying scope codes to project and
designs.
Procedure
1. Edit the Project or Design
2. Select Properties > Scopes
3. Add the appropriate scope, in this case components with the scope “Commercial Aero
United States” set to be applicable will be available.
Figure 4-4. Applying Scopes

258 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Part Selection and Validation

Part Selection and Validation

This section of the usage example details how scoping is applied during part selection by
harness processing or the Part Selection Dialog (PSD).
Procedure
1. Component scopes are considered during Part selection by harness processing or the
Part Selection Dialog (PSD).
2. Parts which do not have scopes set and are not explicitly excluded from the Project or
Design will remain available to the user in the PSD.
Figure 4-5. Example of Parts Not Explicitly Excluded

3. To check that parts are in scope use the library consistency DRC “Component Out Of
Scope” to ensure that all components are valid.
Figure 4-6. DRC Set On

Scoping Scenarios
Some common scoping scenarios are summarized in the table below.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 259

February 2016
Codes
Housing Selection Using Component Scoping

Figure 4-7. Common Scoping Scenarios

Housing Selection Using Component Scoping

Some specific functionality is available as part of component scoping to control the selection of
housing components (terminals, cavity seals, cavity plugs and cavity groups) based on the
applicable scope. This is especially useful for harness manufacturers who may wish have to
have finer control of the selection of housing parts for common connectors during harness
processing. For example, a tier 1 supplier may have a common connector for multiple customers
but has different configuration of housing components for each one.
Procedure
1. Define the scope codes as detailed in “Creating a Scope Code” on page 255.
2. Select the connector which is to have its housing components scoped and choose the
Housing tab.
3. Select the housing component to be scoped then press the ellipse at the end of the
Scoped row.

260 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Housing Selection Using Component Scoping

Figure 4-8. Selecting Housing Components

4. Choose the desired scope from the dialog and toggle the tree node to switch between
excluded or included .

Figure 4-9. Including or Excluding Housing Components

5. Select the housing component scoping check box.

Figure 4-10. Housing Component Scoping Check box

6. Create a new harness and select properties and assign the desired scope.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 261

February 2016
Codes
Housing Selection Using Component Scoping

Figure 4-11. Assigning the Desired Scope

7. Once the scope has been set for the harness design, only housing components which are
included or have not been explicitly excluded are considered during harness processing.
Results
Component scoping is a method using codes for controlling parts availability for Project or
Design data. Scopes are set against components as included or excluded, assigning a
corresponding scope to project(s) or design(s) will make the parts hidden if they have been
excluded or available if they have been included. Parts where a scope has not explicitly been
included or excluded will be available to the user.
The users of Capital HarnessXC and Harness Classic can also control the selection of housing
components during harness processing using Component Scoping.
Tip
: Businesses wishing to control component access based on the users rather than codes
should consider setting up Domains, as detailed in the Capital Project User Guide.

Related Topics
Creating a Scope Code
Editing a Scope Code Description

262 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Pitch Definitions

Pitch Definitions
Pitch definitions are used to associate a wire specification with a length ratio in the Pitch Tables
dialog box, allowing the calculation of the true length of a twisted pair multicore. Pitch
definitions must already exist in the library before they can be selected when creating a new
pitch table entry.
See “Creating a Pitch Table” on page 265 for more information.

The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete pitch definitions.

Creating a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Editing a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Deleting a Pitch Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Creating a Pitch Definition

You can create a new pitch definition.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Pitch Definitions from the Components Main Menu. The Pitch
Definitions Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Pitch Definition value.
4. Click Apply; the new manufacturing site is added to the Pitch Definitions table.
Related Topics
Editing a Pitch Definition
Deleting a Pitch Definition

Editing a Pitch Definition

You can edit an existing pitch definition.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Pitch Definitions from the Components Main Menu. The Pitch
Definitions Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Pitch Definitions table, select the row containing the definition you want to edit.
3. Edit the Pitch Definition field as required.
4. Click Apply.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 263

February 2016
Codes
Deleting a Pitch Definition

Related Topics
Creating a Pitch Definition
Deleting a Pitch Definition

Deleting a Pitch Definition

You can remove a pitch definition from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a pitch definition if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Pitch Definitions from the Components Main Menu. The Pitch
Definitions Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Pitch Definitions table, select the row containing the definition you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a pitch definition, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore
until you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Pitch Definition
Editing a Pitch Definition

264 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Pitch Tables

Pitch Tables
When a wire is twisted around another in a twisted pair multicore, some of its length is used to
accommodate each twist, resulting in an overall shortening of its original, intended length. In
order that the wire is of the correct length after it has been twisted, the amount of shortening has
to be calculated, and this is achieved through the creation of pitch tables. Each pitch table links
a length ratio to a wire size for a given pitch definition, allowing the shortening for a wire to be
calculated based on the pitch, or “tightness” of the twisting applied.
When a multicore is created (in the Component Maintenance Dialog Box) and given a Sheath
Type of twisted pair, the OS Spec. field on the Multicore Wires Tab is used to specify the Pitch
Definition applied to the multicore (only if the Use Pitch Table option on the Customer
Manufacturing Options Section of the Customers Dialog Box is selected). This value is
compared with the pitch tables in the library and the length ratio for the wire size used in the
multicore is returned. Using this information, the required twisted pair lengths are automatically
calculated when engineering calculations are run in either Capital HarnessXC or Capital
Harness Classic.

The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete pitch tables.

Creating a Pitch Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Editing a Pitch Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Deleting a Pitch Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Creating a Pitch Table

You can create a new pitch table.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Pitch Tables from the Components Main Menu. The Pitch Tables
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Select a Pitch Definition from the drop-down list.
4. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Wire CSA field, select a wire from the
dialog box that opens, and then click OK. The Material Code and Wire Spec. fields are
updated to display the values for the selected wire.
5. Specify the Twisted Length and Actual Length values for the wire. The ratio between
these values are used to calculate the length change resulting from the twisting
regardless of the length of multicore defined in a harness design.
6. Click Apply; the new record is added to the Pitch Tables grid.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 265

February 2016
Codes
Editing a Pitch Table

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for each combination of Pitch Definition and Wire CSA (wire size)
required.
Related Topics
Editing a Pitch Table
Deleting a Pitch Table

Editing a Pitch Table

You can edit an existing pitch table.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Pitch Tables from the Components Main Menu. The Pitch Tables
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Pitch Tables grid, select the row containing the record you want to edit.
3. Edit the fields as required.
4. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Creating a Pitch Table
Deleting a Pitch Table

Deleting a Pitch Table

You can remove a pitch table record from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a pitch table if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Codes > Pitch Tables from the Components Main Menu. The Pitch Tables
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Pitch Tables grid, select the row containing the record you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a record, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore until you
click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

266 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Deleting a Pitch Table

Related Topics
Creating a Pitch Table
Editing a Pitch Table

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 267

February 2016
Codes
Wire Group Definition

Wire Group Definition

Wire group definitions allow you to define a selection of wire sizes, which can be used to
populate both wire-fits-cavity and wire-fits-terminal records and to generate multiple-wire-fits-
cavity combinations.
The following topics explain how to create, edit and delete wire group definitions:

Creating a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Editing a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Deleting a Wire Group Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Creating a Wire Group Definition

You can create and populate a new wire group definition.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Group Definition from the Components Main Menu. The Wire
Group Definition Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a Name and Description for the wire group.
4. Specify whether you want to limit the wires available for selection to a particular Range
Specification.
If you select Wire Sizes, the Available grid in the Wire Sizes section lists all wire sizes
in the library that you can select for the wire group.
If you select Outside Diameter C.S.A., the Minimum and Maximum Outside
Diameter and C.S.A. fields are enabled, allowing you to specify a range of wire sizes
before clicking the Filter button, returning all wire sizes within the specified range into
the Available grid in the Wire Sizes section.
5. In the Available grid, select the wire sizes that you want to include in the wire group and
click Add; the wire sizes are added to the Selected grid. If you have specified a range,
you may want to add all of the listed wire sizes, in which case you can click Add All.
6. Click Apply.
Related Topics
Editing a Wire Group Definition
Deleting a Wire Group Definition

268 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Editing a Wire Group Definition

Editing a Wire Group Definition

You can edit an existing wire group definition.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Group Definition from the Components Main Menu. The Wire
Group Definition Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Wire Group Codes table grid, select the row containing the record you want to
edit.
3. Edit the Description field and the selected Wire Sizes as required.
4. Click Apply.

Note
Any changes to the wire group are applied to all components in the library that have
the group assigned. This includes the addition and removal of wire sizes.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Group Definition
Deleting a Wire Group Definition

Deleting a Wire Group Definition

This topic details how to remove a wire group definition from the library.
Procedure
1. Select Codes > Wire Group Definition from the Components Main Menu. The Wire
Group Definition Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Wire Group Codes table grid, select the row containing the record you want to
delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply. If the wire group is in use anywhere within the library,
the Usage Report Dialog Box is displayed, detailing why the wire group cannot be
deleted, otherwise the group is removed.

Note
Once you have deleted a record, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore until you
click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Group Definition
Editing a Wire Group Definition

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 269

February 2016
Codes
Importing and Exporting Codes

Importing and Exporting Codes

You can import and export codes in XML format.
The following topics provide more detail:

Exporting all Codes from the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Importing Codes into the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Exporting all Codes from the Library

You can export the codes in the library in XML format so that they can be imported into another
installation of this application suite.
Note
When exporting library codes alone (that is, without components parts), you cannot use
.CSV format.

Procedure
1. Select File > Export from the menu; the Export Library Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Specify the Export File and Log File. Select “Export codes only”.
3. Click Export; a progress bar and message indicates when the export is complete.
4. Click OK.
Related Topics
Importing Codes into the Library

Importing Codes into the Library

You can import codes into the library from an XML file.
Note
This functionality is not available in a UNIX environment if you are running a dual
installation of Capital Harness Classic and Capital. If you have legacy data from Capital
Harness Classic stored in a Capital Library Archive file (*.cla) that you want to import, unzip
the .cla file and import the XML file contained therein. Any data from a component
management system other than Capital Library must adhere to the Capital component database
structure and format.

Procedure
1. Select File > Import from the menu; the Import Library Dialog Box is displayed.

270 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes
Refreshing Library Code Data

2. Specify the Library File and whether you want the import to Replace, Merge or Ignore
parts with duplicate internal part numbers.
3. Select “Modify existing code descriptions, “Import scoping” and “Import modification
history” as required.
4. Specify the name and location of the log file that you want the import process to create.
5. Click Import; a progress bar and message indicates when the import is complete.
6. Click OK.
Related Topics
Exporting all Codes from the Library

Refreshing Library Code Data

You can refresh the code data used by your Capital Library session so that it includes all recent
code changes made in other user sessions.
Procedure
Select Actions > Refresh Library Codes from the menu; the data used by Capital Library is
updated.

Finding Which Components Use a Code

You can find which components are using a specific code in the library.
Procedure
1. Select Codes from the Components Main Menu and double-click the appropriate code
type. The Codes dialog box for that code type is displayed.
2. Select the code and click the View Code Usages ( ) button; the Usage Report Dialog
Box is displayed. The table lists the components that use the selected code.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 271

February 2016
Codes
Finding Which Components Use a Code

272 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 5
Companies

Company information can relate to both your customers and suppliers. The records for both
types of company allow you to record contact information, as well as being used to restrict the
sub-components offered from a connector’s housing definition based on the companies with
which the connector is associated.
See “Housing” on page 190 for more information.

Additionally, customer records allow you to specify a number of manufacturing parameters

specific to that customer, allowing harness designs to be engineered differently based on the
customer to which they belong.

Refer to the following topics:

Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Creating a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Editing a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Deleting a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Creating a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Editing a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Deleting a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Finding Which Components Use a Company Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 273

February 2016
Companies
Customers

Customers
Customer records are used to record contact details about your customers, and to store
manufacturing options as required by each customer. Once a customer record has been created,
it can be used to scope sub-components within a connector’s housing definition; this allows the
sub-components offered when placing a connector onto a harness design to be restricted to only
those applicable for the customer to which the design belongs.
The following topics explain how to create, copy, edit and delete customers.

Creating a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Editing a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Deleting a Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Creating a Customer
You can create a new customer.
Procedure
1. Select Companies > Customers from the Components Main Menu. The Customers
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New; a row is added to the Customers table.
3. In the “Address & Contact Details Section”, enter a Name.
4. Click Apply; the new customer is added to the Customers table.
Related Topics
Editing a Customer
Deleting a Customer

Editing a Customer
You can edit an existing customer.
Procedure
1. Select Companies > Customers from the Components Main Menu. The Customers
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Customers table, select the row containing the customer you want to edit.
3. Edit the fields as required.
4. Click Apply.

274 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Companies
Deleting a Customer

Related Topics
Creating a Customer
Deleting a Customer

Deleting a Customer
You can remove a customer from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a customer if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Companies > Customers from the Components Main Menu. The Customers
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Customers table, select the row containing the customer you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a customer, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore until
you click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Customer
Editing a Customer

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 275

February 2016
Companies
Suppliers

Suppliers
Supplier records are used to record contact details about your suppliers, and to associate
supplier part numbers with your own internal numbers. Once a supplier record has been created,
it can be used to scope sub-components within a connector’s housing definition; this allows the
sub-components offered when placing a connector onto a harness design to be restricted to only
those applicable for the supplier with which the design is associated.
The following topics explain how to create, copy, edit and delete suppliers.

Creating a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Editing a Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Deleting a Supplier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Creating a Supplier
You can create a new supplier.
Procedure
1. Select Companies > Suppliers from the Components Main Menu. The Suppliers
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. Click New; a new row is added to the Suppliers table.
3. Enter a Supplier name.
4. Click Apply; the new supplier is added to the Suppliers table.
Related Topics
Editing a Supplier
Deleting a Supplier

Editing a Supplier
You can edit an existing supplier.
Procedure
1. Select Companies > Suppliers from the Components Main Menu. The Suppliers
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Suppliers table, select the row containing the supplier you want to edit.
3. Edit the fields as required.
4. Click Apply.

276 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Companies
Deleting a Supplier

Related Topics
Creating a Supplier
Deleting a Supplier

Deleting a Supplier
You can remove a supplier from the library.
Caution
You cannot delete a supplier if it is used anywhere.

Procedure
1. Select Companies > Suppliers from the Components Main Menu. The Suppliers
Dialog Box is displayed.
2. In the Suppliers table, select the row containing the supplier you want to delete.
3. Click Delete, then click Apply.

Note
Once you have deleted a supplier, the Delete button is relabeled as Restore until you
click Apply, giving you the opportunity to cancel the deletion.

Related Topics
Creating a Supplier
Editing a Supplier

Finding Which Components Use a Company

Code
You can find which components are using a specific company code in the library.
Procedure
1. Select Companies from the Components Main Menu and double-click the appropriate
company type. The Company dialog box for that company type is displayed.
2. Select the company code and click the View Code Usages ( ) button; the Usage
Report Dialog Box is displayed. The table lists the components that use the selected
code.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 277

February 2016
Companies
Finding Which Components Use a Company Code

278 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 6
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference

This following sections offer a description of all input dialog boxes used in the creation and
maintenance of components. For each dialog box, all fields are listed, along with a full
description of the field’s function.
Cavity Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Component Deletion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Component Maintenance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Assembly Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Base Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Cavity Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Cavity Group Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cavity Names Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Customer Tab (Component Details) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Dressed Routes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Extra Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fixture Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Footprints Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Housing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IDC Group Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
In-House Assembly Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Mating Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Multicore Wires Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Multiple Terminations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Pin Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Pin Names Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Ring Terminal Group Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Scope Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Seal Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Single Terminations Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sleeve Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Splice Attributes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Spot Tape Selection Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Supplier Tab (Component Details) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Symbol Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 279

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference

Termination Names Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Ultrasonic Welds Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Copy Component Details Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Create New Part Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Export Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Import Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Library Usages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Part Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Plugins Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Plugin Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Project Usages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Validation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
View Pin Mapping details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Help Button Landing Pages for Component Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Component Deletion Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Component Maintenance Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Configure Library GUI Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Copy Component Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Create New Part Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Export Library Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Export GUI Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Enterprise Assets Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Housing Scope Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Import Library Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Import GUI Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Library Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Part Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Plugins Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Plugin Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Select Wire Spec by Range Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
View Pin Mapping details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

280 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cavity Selection Dialog Box

Cavity Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) to the right of the Last Cavity field on the Housing Tab. The
ellipsis is enabled only for cavities.
Used to select a non-contiguous range of cavities.
Objects
Select the cavities to be included in the non-contiguous range and click OK.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 281

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Deletion Dialog Box

Component Deletion Dialog Box

To access: Select Components > Component Deletion from the Components Main Menu.
Used to delete obsolete components from the library.
Objects

Table 6-1. Component Deletion Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Log File Specifies the location and name of the .log file that is created
when you delete any components from the library. Click the
ellipsis (...) button to the left of the field to display the Select
Component List File dialog box from which you can navigate
to the location and specify the name. Mandatory.
Design Usage Check Specifies whether the system checks for instances of obsolete
components in designs (selected) or not (unselected) when you
click Search:
• If selected, obsolete components used in designs are listed in
the “Components in Use” table and they cannot be deleted.
• If not selected, all obsolete components are listed in the
“Components for Deletion” table and can be deleted,
regardless of whether or not they are used in designs.
Search Displays obsolete components from the library in the
“Components for Deletion” table and in the “Components in
Use” table (if “Design Usage Check” is selected).
Components in Use Table If you have not selected “Design Usage Check”, this table is not
used.
If you have selected “Design Usage Check”, this displays all
obsolete components that are used in designs when you click
Search. Click on a listed component and click Remove From
List to remove it from the table. Any components listed in this
table are deleted from the library when you click Delete.
Show Usage Displays the Project Usages Dialog Box that lists where the
component that is currently selected in the “Components in
Use” table is used in projects.
Components for Deletion Displays obsolete components from the library when you click
Table Search. Click on a listed component and click Remove From
List to remove it from the table. Any components listed in this
table are deleted from the library when you click Delete.
Remove From List Removes the selected component from the “Components for
Deletion” table.

282 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Deletion Dialog Box

Table 6-1. Component Deletion Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Delete Deletes any components listed in the “Components for
Deletion” from the library.

Related Topics
Deleting Components

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 283

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Component Maintenance Dialog Box

To access: Select Components > Component Maintenance from the Components Main
Menu.
Used to create and edit (update) any type of component.
Objects
• This dialog box consists of two sections described in the following tables:
o “Component Selection Section” on page 284
o “Component Details Section” on page 288

Table 6-2. Component Selection Section

Field Description
Component Selection Enables you to search for components. The following tabs are
Section displayed:
• Internal tab
• Customer tab
• Supplier tab
The following two fields in this table are common to all of those
tabs.
Library Usages / For the component selected in the Internal Part No. table,
Project Usages Customer Part No. table or Supplier Part No. table, opens either
the Library Usages Dialog Box (informs you where the
component has been used with other components in the library)
or the Project Usages Dialog Box (informs you where the
component has been used in projects.

284 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Table 6-2. Component Selection Section (cont.)

Field Description
Edit Internal Part This dialog box allows you to edit an internal part number or a
Number component group on a previously defined entry. After selecting
the icon, enter the new part number or component group and
click OK.
When using an Oracle database, you cannot amend the entry if it
is already in use within another library part or design, or if it is
assigned to a part revision. In these cases, an error message is
displayed.
When using an embedded database, you cannot amend the entry
if it is already in use within a design but you can amend it if it is
already in use within another library part or if it is assigned to a
part revision.
Note that other fields in the system where the old part number
was entered using free text entry will not be dynamically
updated. For example, you can use free text to enter part numbers
in the Replaced By and Alternate Part fields on the Extra Tab. In
this case, no association exists between those fields and the part
number.
Internal Tab This tab is used to search for components based on their unique
internal part numbers and to create and edit (update) components
in the library.
Internal Part No. Either leave blank and press Return to display all components
found in the library in the Internal Part No. table, or enter Search
Criteria into the field, restricting the returned components to only
those matching the entered value.
As you type a part number, a drop-down list suggests part
numbers that match the entered string. If ... is displayed at the
bottom of the list, this indicates that more matching part numbers
are available. When the entry ... is selected, a component search
with the currently entered part number string combined with
other defined search criteria is performed.
When a row is selected in the Internal Part No. table, the internal
part number for that component is displayed in full. Mandatory.
Show Latest Revision With this option selected, any parts belonging to a revision
history in which they are not the latest revision will not be
returned by a search. Optional.
Advance Search If selected, this displays the Filter Table that allows you to enter
advanced search criteria.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 285

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Table 6-2. Component Selection Section (cont.)

Field Description
Filter Table Displayed only if Advance Search is selected. This table enables
you to enter advanced search criteria. To enter a criteria, click
Add restriction ( ) to add a new row to the table. For that row,
select an Attribute Name, an Operator and a Value from the
drop-down lists in the columns. To remove a criteria, select that
row and click Remove restriction(s) ( ). To remove all
criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ). These criteria are
applied when you click Search.
Internal Part No. Lists the components found when you press Return or click
Table Search. Click on a row to select a component; the fields on the
tabs in the Component Details Section section below the table are
updated to display the existing values for that component.
New Adds a new row to the Internal Part No. table if the Internal Part
No. field contains a value that is not an existing internal part
number. The row can then be populated by specifying values in
the fields on the tabs in the Component Details Section section
below the table and clicking Apply.
Revise If you select an existing component in the Internal Part No. table
and edit the Internal Part No. field before clicking Revise, this
adds a new row to the Internal Part No. table for a revision of the
existing component. The History Tab displays both the new
component part (flagged as Latest) and the earlier revision(s).
Copy Adds a new row to the Internal Part No. table if the Internal Part
No. field contains a value that is not an existing internal part
number. The values on the Component Details Section tabs
(below the table) for the previously selected row are copied to the
new row and remain displayed on the tabs. This change is not
written to the database until you click Apply.
Reset Returns the fields on the Component Details Section tabs (below
the table) to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new component, all fields are cleared or
returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing an existing component, the fields are
returned to their previous values.
View Part Details Situated at the bottom of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box, this enables you to view a part and simultaneously edit
other parts. You can switch between this window and the
Component Maintenance dialog boxes. It is also possible to
launch, and switch between multiple report windows, then
independently search and view the part in the launched dialog
boxes.

286 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Table 6-2. Component Selection Section (cont.)

Field Description
Search Situated at the bottom of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box, this searches for components in the library that match the
values and Search Criteria specified on the tabs, and displays the
component parts in the Internal Part No. table.
Codes Situated at the bottom of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box, this enables you to create multiple codes without closing
the Component Maintenance dialog box which can then be used
during the creation and editing of parts. For further information
see Codes and Companies.
Clear Situated at the bottom of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box, this clears all of the fields on all of the tabs.
Apply Situated at the bottom of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box, this applies the contents of the fields on the Component
Details Section tabs to the selected row in the Internal Part No.
table. Saves the values on this dialog box to the database.
Customer Tab This tab is used to search for components based on their
customer part numbers. You cannot create or edit (update)
components in the library while viewing this tab.
Customer Part No. Either leave blank and press Return to display all components
with a customer part number in the library in the Customer Part
No. table, or enter a known value or Search Criteria into the field,
restricting the returned components to only those matching the
entered value. When a row is selected in the Customer Part No.
table, the customer part number for that component is displayed
in full. Mandatory.
Find Displays all components found in the library in the Customer
Part No. table if Customer Part No. is blank. Alternatively,
displays only those components with customer part numbers
matching the specified Search Criteria in the Customer Part No.
field.
Customer Part No. Lists the components found when you press Return or click
Table Find. Click on a row to select a component; the fields on the tabs
in the Component Details Section section below the table are
updated to display the existing values for that component.
Library Usages / Opens either the Library Usages dialog box (informs you where
Project the component has been used with other components in the
Usages library) or the Project Usages dialog box (informs you where the
component has been used in projects.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 287

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Table 6-2. Component Selection Section (cont.)

Field Description
Supplier Tab This tab is used to search for components based on their supplier
part numbers. You cannot create or edit (update) components in
the library while viewing this tab.
Supplier Part No. Either leave blank and press Return to display all components
with a supplier part number in the library in the Supplier Part No.
table, or enter a known value or Search Criteria into the field,
restricting the returned components to only those matching the
entered value. When a row is selected in the Supplier Part No.
table, the supplier part number for that component is displayed in
full. Mandatory.
Find Displays all components found in the library in the Supplier Part
No. table if Supplier Part No. is blank. Alternatively, displays
only those components with supplier part numbers matching the
specified Search Criteria in the Supplier Part No. field.
Supplier Part No. Lists the components found when you press Return or click
Table Find. Click on a row to select a component; the fields on the tabs
in the Component Details Section section below the table are
updated to display the existing values for that component.
Library Usages / Opens either the Library Usages dialog box (informs you where
Project the component has been used with other components in the
Usages library) or the Project Usages dialog box (informs you where the
component has been used in projects.

Table 6-3. Component Details Section

Field Description
Component Details Displays the details for the component selected in the Internal
Section Part No. table, Customer Part No. table or Supplier Part No.
table. The following tabs may be displayed depending on the
Group Name of the component.
Assembly Details Tab The fields in this tab are used to specify the sub-components in
an assembly. This tab is enabled for components with a Group
Name of Assembly.
Base Tab The fields in the Base tab are used to specify basic attributes for
a component. This tab is enabled for any component.

288 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Table 6-3. Component Details Section (cont.)

Field Description
Cavity Attributes Tab The Cavity Attributes Tab is used to specify the graphics that
you want to display with the cavities on the component when
used in a diagram. This tab is enabled for components with a
Group Name from the following: Connector and IDC
Connector.
Cavity Group Details The fields in the Cavity Group Details tab are used to specify
Tab the connector cavity components (sub-components) in a cavity
group. This tab is enabled for components with a Group Name of
Cavity Group.
Cavity Names Tab The fields in this tab are used to specify the names of the cavities
in the component. This tab is enabled for components with a
Group Name from the following: Connector, IDC Connector
and Splice.
Customer Tab The fields in the Customer tab are used to associate one or more
(Component Details) customer part numbers with a component. This tab is enabled for
any component.
Dressed Routes Tab The fields in the Dressed Routes Tab are used to specify dressed
connector routes. This tab is enabled for components with a
Group Name of Connector.
Extra Tab The fields in the Extra tab are used to specify supplemental
information for a component. This tab is enabled for any
component.
Fixture Details Tab The fields on the Fixture Details Tab are used to specify
attributes for a formboard fixture. This tab is enabled for
components with a Group Name of Fixture.
Footprints Tab The fields in this tab are used to specify footprints for a device.
See “Footprint” on page 137 for an explanation of footprints.
This tab is enabled for components with a Group Name of
Device.
Heat Shrink Sleeve The fields on the Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab are used to specify
Tab attributes for a heat shrink sleeve. This tab is enabled for
components with a Group Name of Heat Shrink Sleeve.
History Tab This tab is used to view the revision history of a component, as
well as offering options allowing you to create revisions by
associating existing library parts. It also enables you to maintain
a modification history detailing changes that have been made to
the part.
Housing Tab The fields in the Housing tab are used to associate one or more
sub-components with a component. This tab is enabled for any
component.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 289

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Table 6-3. Component Details Section (cont.)

Field Description
IDC Group Tab The fields on the IDC Group Tab are used to specify attributes
for an IDC connector and to specify whether any IDC connector
cavities share an electrical connection. This tab is enabled for
components with a Group Name of IDC Connector.
In-House Assembly The fields in this tab are used to specify the sub-components in
Tab an in-house assembly. This tab is enabled for components with a
Group Name of In-House Assembly.
Mating Tab The fields in this tab are used to specify the valid connectors that
can mate (connect) with a connector and the mapping of the
cavities when the connectors are mated. This tab is enabled for
components with a Group Name from the following: Connector
and IDC Connector.
Multicore Wires Tab The fields in this tab are used to specify attributes for a multicore
wire’s outer sheath and to specify the inner cores (conductors) in
the multicore. This tab is enabled for components with a Group
Name of Multicore Wire.
Multiple The fields in this tab are used to specify the combinations of wire
Terminations Tab sizes and wire material that can terminate simultaneously at the
cavities or terminals in a component. This tab is enabled for
components with a Group Name from the following: IDC
Connector and Terminal.
Multiple Wire Fits The fields in this tab are used to specify the combinations of wire
Cavity Tab sizes and wire material that fit simultaneously at the cavities in a
component. This tab is enabled for components with a Group
Name from the following: Assembly, Connector, IDC
Connector, In-House Assembly, Other, and Terminal.
Pin Attributes Tab The Pin Attributes Tab is used to specify attributes for the pins
on a device. This tab is enabled for components with a Group
Name of Device.
Pin Names Tab The fields in this tab are used to specify the names of the pins on
a device. This tab is enabled for components with a Group Name
of Device.
Properties Tab The fields in the Properties tab are used to add, edit or delete a
user-defined property on a component. This tab is enabled for
any component.
Ring Terminal Group Use this to specify the Ring Terminals in a ring terminal group.
Details Tab
Scope Tab This tab is used to apply scope codes to a component. See “Scope
Code” on page 254 for further information about scope codes.

290 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Table 6-3. Component Details Section (cont.)

Field Description
Seal Attributes Tab The fields in this tab are used to specify attributes for a backshell
seal. This tab is enabled for components with a Group Name of
Backshell Seal.
Single Terminations The fields in this tab are used to specify the single wire sizes and
Tab material configurations that fit the cavities or terminals in a
component. This tab is enabled for components with a Group
Name from the following: Cavity Seal, IDC Connector and
Terminal.
Single Wire Fits The fields in this tab are used to specify the single wire sizes and
Cavity Tab material configurations that fit the cavities in a component. This
tab is enabled for components with a Group Name from the
following: Assembly, Connector, IDC Connector, In-House
Assembly, Other, and Terminal.
Sleeve Attributes Tab The fields on the Sleeve Attributes Tab are used to specify
attributes for a solder sleeve. This tab is enabled for components
with a Group Name of Solder Sleeve.
Splice Attributes Tab The fields on the Splice Attributes Tab are used to specify
attributes for a splice. This tab is enabled for components with a
Group Name of Splice.
Spot Tape Selection The fields in this tab are used to specify the attributes for tape
Tab when it is applied as spot tape at different insulation layers. This
tab is enabled for components with a Group Name of Tape.
Supplier Tab The fields in the Supplier tab are used to assign one or more
(Component Details) supplier part numbers to a component. This tab is enabled for any
component.
Symbol Tab The fields in the Symbol tab are used to associate one or more
graphical symbols (previously created in Capital Symbol) to the
component. This tab is enabled for any component.
Termination Names The fields in this tab are used to specify the names of the
Tab terminations on a backshell. This tab is enabled for components
with a Group Name of Backshell.
Ultrasonic Welds Tab The fields on this tab are used to specify the combinations of
wires that can enter an ultrasonic weld from the left, center and
right directions. This tab is enabled for components with a Group
Name of Ultrasonic Weld.

Related Topics
Searching for Components Using Internal Part Number
Searching for Components Using Component Details

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 291

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Maintenance Dialog Box

Searching for Components Using Customer Part Number

Searching for Components Using Supplier Part Number

292 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Assembly Details Tab

Assembly Details Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a Group Name of Assembly.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the sub-components in an assembly.
Objects

Table 6-4. Assembly Details Tab Contents

Field Description
Sub-Component Table Lists the sub-components that are in the assembly. You can click a
column header to sort the rows by the column contents. Click on a
row to select a sub-component; the fields below the table are
updated to display the existing values. The Main Component
column displays the internal part number for the assembly.
New Adds a new row to the Sub-Component Table, which can then be
populated by specifying a Sub-Component and Quantity or
Amount before clicking Update to create a new symbol
association.
Update Applies the contents of the fields on the tab to the selected symbol
in the Sub-Component Table.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Sub-Component
Table, since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Sub-Component Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Sub-Component The internal part number of the sub-component. Click the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field to access the Part Selection
Dialog Box where you select the sub-component. Mandatory.
Status The status of the sub-component. Indicates whether the component
can be selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or
whether it can be deleted from the database (Obsolete). Read-only.
Group Name The component group to which the component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the
component groups. Read-only.
Quantity The number, or quantity of each sub-component that is used to
form the assembly. Mandatory.
Amount If applicable, how much of the sub-component is in the assembly.
For example, the length of a tube, wire, multicore wire or tape, and
so on. Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 293

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Assembly Details Tab

Related Topics
Creating an Assembly
Adding a Sub-component to an Assembly
Deleting a Sub-component from an Assembly

294 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Base Tab

Base Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
The fields in the Base tab are used to specify basic attributes for a component.
Objects

Table 6-5. Base Tab Contents

Field Description
Group Name The component group to which the component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the
component groups. Mandatory.
Description Enter a description for the component of up to 40 alphanumeric
characters. Optional.
Type Code Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to access the
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box where you select a
component type code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Component Type Code” on page 239.
Mandatory.
Color Code Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to access the
Color Code Selection Dialog Box where you select a color code.
These codes must have been created previously. See “Creating a
Color Code” on page 235. Mandatory.
Material Code Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to access the
Material Codes Selection Dialog Box where you select a material
code. These codes must have been created previously. See
“Creating a Material Code” on page 237. Mandatory.
Status The status of the component. Indicates whether the component can
be selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or
whether it can be deleted from the database (Obsolete).
Mandatory.
Unit of Measure Select the method used to measure the quantity of the component.
The options are Each, Per Weight, Per Length, Per Roll/Reel or
As Required. For example, a connector would be Each and wire
would be Per Length. Mandatory.
Wire Attributes Displayed only for a component with a Group Name of Wire.
Specification The wire specification. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
this field to display the Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box.
The wire specification must have been created already.
See“Creating a Wire Size” on page 243. Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 295

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Base Tab

Table 6-5. Base Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
CSA The cross-sectional area for the wire size. This is updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.
Wire Color The color of the wire. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
the field to access the Color Code Selection Dialog Box where you
select a color code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Color Code” on page 235. Mandatory.
Tip: It is suggested for wires, that the Color Code field on the Base
tab should be set to the code "-", meaning "Not Applicable." The is
because wires, unlike most other component types, have colors that
often cannot be defined by a single color code. In addition to a base
color, many wires have one or more stripes, spiral stripes or text
markings. The Wire Color field allows such composite colors to be
defined and checked in a flexible and efficient way.
Wire Colors are defined using a combination of Color Codes and
Delimiters. The former are defined in the Color Code form. The
latter can be seen in the Library section of the Preferences form in
Capital Project.
The delimiters that can be used and example colors are listed in the
Usage Notes below for this dialog.
Outside Diameter, calc. The outside diameter of the wire, calculated using the insulation
thickness defined for the wire code and its CSA. This is updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.
Outside Diameter, The user defined outside diameter of the wire, up to 12 decimal
defined characters. Optional.
Strip Length If the component is a device, terminal or a splice, enter a value of
up to 12 decimal characters. This is the length by which the
insulation of a wire is stripped back when it is terminated at a
component. The value entered must be in your company’s standard
measurement units. Optional.
Mult Strip Length If the component is a device, terminal or splice and the strip length
differs for multiple wire crimps, enter the alternative strip length of
up to 12 decimal characters. If the default value of 0 is left in this
field, the component's Strip Length value is used for multiple wire
crimps. Optional.
Add On If the component is a connector or device and the wire dimensions
measure to the back of connectors, enter the wire add-on value.
Optional.
Knock Off If the component is a connector or device and the wire dimensions
measure to either the front or the tip of connectors, enter the wire
knock-off value. Optional.

296 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Base Tab

Table 6-5. Base Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
No. Pins If the component has pins, enter the number of pins. Optional.
No. Cavities If the component has cavities, enter the number of cavities.
Optional.
No. Terminations If the component is a backshell, enter the number of terminations
that it has. Optional.
Include On BOM Specifies whether the component appears on a harness design’s bill
of materials (selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory.
Formboard Classic Specifies whether the component requires a graphical symbol (a
Symbol pictorial illustration of the component) when it appears on a
harness design diagram (selected) or not (unselected). This option
applies to Capital Harness Classic applications only and is
different to the options available on the Symbol Tab that applies to
Capital design applications. Mandatory.
Tape Attributes Displayed only for a component with a Group Name of Tape.
Wall Thickness The thickness of the tape’s wall. Optional.
Tape Width The width of the tape. Optional.
Tube Attributes Displayed only for a component with a Group Name of Tube.
Wall Thickness The thickness of the tube’s wall. Optional.
Bore Size The internal diameter of the tube. Optional.
Slit Specifies whether the tube is slit (selected) or not (unselected).
Mandatory.
Convoluted Specifies whether the tube is convoluted (selected) or not
(unselected). Mandatory.

Usage Notes
The delimiters that can be used in the Wire Color are:

Table 6-6. Wire Color Delimiters

/ usually indicating a stripe
$ usually indicating a spiral
stripe
+ usage to be defined by the
customer

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 297

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Base Tab

Table 6-6. Wire Color Delimiters (cont.)

# text marking (optionally
followed by a text string,
otherwise assumed to be the
Wire Name)
Custom delimiter Usage to be defined by the
customer

Table 6-7. Example Wire Colors

B Simply black
W/R White with a red stripe
W/R/U White with a red stripe and a
blue stripe
LG Light green
LG$R Light green with a red stripe
W# White stamped with Wire
Name
Y#AIRBAG Yellow stamped with text
"AIRBAG"

The benefits of setting up Color Codes, Delimiters and Wire Colors in this way are:

• Long wire color code strings can be used; they can be up to 30 characters long, whereas
the Color Code field on the Base tab of Component Maintenance is limited to 4
characters and is intended only for component types that can be defined with a single
color code.
• Efficiency: each individual color needs only to be defined once in the Color Codes form;
they can then be re-used as required in composite wire color codes. This is much more
efficient than trying to define every composite color string in the Color Codes form
before applying to wire part numbers.
• Accuracy: wire color codes are checked to ensure that Color Codes and Delimiters have
been used properly within the composite wire color strings.
Related Topics
Editing the Base Details of a Component

298 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cavity Attributes Tab

Cavity Attributes Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name from the following: Connector
and IDC Connector.
The Cavity Attributes Tab is used to specify the graphics that you want to display with the
cavities on the component when used in a diagram.
Objects

Table 6-8. Cavity Attributes Tab Contents

Field Description
Name The name of the component cavity. Read-only.
Graphic Type The graphic displayed with the cavity. You can select no graphic
(blank) or one of the following from the drop-down list in the field.
Mandatory.

• female

• female-coax
• male
• male-coax

Related Topics
Specifying the Cavity Graphics of a Connector

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 299

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cavity Group Details Tab

Cavity Group Details Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Cavity Group.
The fields in the Cavity Group Details tab are used to specify the connector cavity components
(sub-components) in a cavity group.
Objects

Table 6-9. Cavity Group Details Tab Contents

Field Description
Sub-Component Table Lists the sub-components in the cavity group. Click on a row in the
table to select that sub-component; the fields on this tab are
updated to display the existing values. The Internal Part No.
column displays the internal part number of the cavity group.
New Adds a new row to the Sub-Component Table, which can than be
populated by specifying values in the fields on this tab and clicking
Apply to create a new sub-component association.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means
that:
• If you are adding a new sub-component, all fields are cleared or
returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing a sub-component already in the cavity group,
the fields are returned to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Sub-Component Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Sub-Component The internal part number of the sub-component. Click the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field to access the Part Selection
Dialog Box where you select the sub-component. Mandatory.
Status The status of the sub-component. Indicates whether the component
can be selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or
whether it can be deleted from the database (Obsolete). Read-only.
Group Name The component group to which the component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the
component groups. Read-only.

Related Topics
Creating a Cavity Group
Adding a Connector Cavity Component to a Cavity Group

300 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cavity Group Details Tab

Deleting a Connector Cavity Component from a Cavity Group

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 301

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cavity Names Tab

Cavity Names Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name from the following: Connector,
IDC Connector and Splice.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the names of the cavities in the component.
Objects

Table 6-10. Cavity Names Tab Contents

Field Description
Cavity Name Table Lists the cavity names. Click on a row to select a cavity name; the
fields below the table are updated to display the existing values.
The Internal Part Number column displays the internal part
number for the component. You can edit a Cavity Name field
within the table.
The Sort Order column controls the order in which the cavity
names are displayed in the design applications. For example, when
mating a connector with a device. If you want to change the
position of a cavity name in the sort order, select its row and click

the arrow buttons to the right of the table:

New Adds a new row to the Cavity Name table, which can then be
populated by specifying a name before clicking Apply to create a
new cavity name.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Cavity Name
table, since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Cavity Name table. This change
is not written to the database until you click Apply; before this
point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete
button is relabeled as Restore).
Name The cavity name. Mandatory.
No. Cavities The number of cavities on the component, as specified on the Base
Tab. Read-only.
Analysis Model Cavity The name of a Capital Analysis model if one is attached to the
component. Read-only.
Blocked Indicates whether the cavity is blocked (selected) or not
(unselected). Mandatory.

302 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Cavity Names Tab

Table 6-10. Cavity Names Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Symbol Associated Indicates whether a symbol has been associated with the
component (selected) or not (unselected). If a symbol is associated,
the cavity names are defined by the symbol and cannot be changed.
Read-only.

Related Topics
Editing a Cavity Name on a Component
Adding a Cavity to a Component
Deleting a Cavity from a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 303

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customer Tab (Component Details)

Customer Tab (Component Details)

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
The fields in the Customer tab are used to associate one or more customer part numbers with a
component. This tab is enabled for any component.
Objects

Table 6-11. Customer Tab (Component Details) Contents

Field Description
Customer Part Number Lists the customer part numbers that have been associated with the
Table component. Click on a row to select an associated customer part
number; the fields below the table are updated to display the
existing values. The Internal Part Number for the component is
displayed also.
New Adds a new row to the Customer Part Number table, which can
then be populated by specifying a Customer Part Number before
clicking Apply.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Customer Part
Number table, since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Customer Part Number table.
This change is not written to the database until you click Apply;
before this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore
(the Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Customer Part Number The customer part number that is associated with the component.
Mandatory.
Group Name The group name for the component group to which the component
belongs. Read-only.
Customer Name The customer who uses the part number. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Specifying a Customer Part Number for a Component
Deleting a Customer Part Number for a Component

304 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Dressed Routes Tab

Dressed Routes Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Connector.
The fields in the Dressed Routes Tab are used to specify dressed connector routes.
Objects

Table 6-12. Dressed Routes Tab Contents

Field Description
Route Table Lists the routes specified for the dressed connector. Click on a row to
select a route; the fields below the table are updated to display the
existing values.
Delete Route Displays the Delete Route dialog box where you select a route to
delete.
Copy Route Copies the details for the selected route in the Route table to a route
that you select in a Copy Route dialog box when you click Copy
Route.
New Adds a new row to the Route table, which can then be populated by
specifying values in the fields below the table before clicking Apply
to create a new symbol association.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Route table, since the
last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Route table. This change is not
written to the database until you click Apply; before this point, the
deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Route The code (or name) signifying the wire route or dress orientation.
Mandatory.
Group Name The group name for the component group to which the component
belongs. Read-only.
Cavity The cavity used by the route. Mandatory.
Wire Addon Specify the wire length add-on value for the cavity if you measure
wire lengths to the back of connectors (back datum). Optional.
Wire Knock Off Specify the wire length knock off value for the cavity if you measure
wire lengths to the front or terminals of connectors (front datum or tip
term. datum). Optional.

Related Topics
Dressed Connectors

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 305

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Dressed Routes Tab

Creating a Dressed Connector

Adding a Dressed Connector Route
Deleting a Dressed Connector Route

306 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Extra Tab

Extra Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
The fields in the Extra tab are used to specify supplemental information for a component.
Objects

Table 6-13. Extra Tab Contents

Field Description
Domain Select the domain to which the component belongs from the drop-
down list. The list offers all domains to which the currently logged-
in user has either read-only or read-write access. Optional.
For further details about the impact of assigning a domain to a
component, see the Usage Notes below for this tab.
Replaced By If the component has been replaced (superseded) by another, click
the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to access the Part
Selection Dialog Box where you select the replacement component.
This is for reference only. Optional.
Alternate Part If there is another component in the database that is a suitable
alternative to the selected component, click the ellipsis (...) button to
access the Part Selection Dialog Box where you select the alternate
component. Optional.
Width Specify the physical width of the component. The value entered
must be in your company’s standard measurement units. Optional.
Length Specify the physical length of the component. The value entered
must be in your company’s standard measurement units. Optional.
Depth Specify the physical depth of the component. The value entered must
be in your company’s standard measurement units. Optional.
Weight Specify the physical weight of the component. The value entered
must be in your company’s standard measurement units. Optional.
Specification Enter any extra notes that you want to record for the component.
Enter an unlimited number of alphanumeric characters. Optional.
User Field1 - User These fields enable you to define up to 5 types of extra details. The
Field5 contents of the fields can be reported upon in the same manner as the
other extra details in the dialog box. Optional or Mandatory
depending on the customization of these fields.
Last Modified The last time that the component was modified. Read-only.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 307

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Extra Tab

Table 6-13. Extra Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Architectural Cost Specify the architectural cost of the component. This attribute can be
referenced when defining metrics for use with Capital Insight
studies. It does not use a particular unit of measurement and is a
generic value used for comparing the cost of a component. For
example, a cheaper component may have a value of 1 whereas a
more expensive component may have a value of 4 (four times the
value of the cheaper component). Optional.
Outer Diameter If the component belongs to the component group with the group
name of Other, this specifies the physical diameter. Enter a numeric
value of up to 6 decimal places. The value entered must be in your
company’s standard measurement units. Optional.
Model If you use Capital Analysis, you can attach an analysis component
model to the component. Optional.

Usage Notes
The impact of assigning a domain to a component depends upon the domain(s) to which the
currently logged-in user belongs:

Note
The implications of domain assignments against designs and projects still apply, and may
restrict user access beyond that controlled at component level.

• If the user has read-write access to the domain assigned to the component:
o The library part assigned to a component on a design can be viewed, removed and
reselected.
o The component is visible within the Part Selection Dialog Box when appropriate
Search Criteria are entered.
o The component can be accessed and edited within Capital Library.

Note
In order to use a component with a domain assigned to it, the domain must have been
specified as allowed in the General project preferences for the project.

• If the user has read-only access to the domain assigned to the component:
o The library part assigned to a design component can be viewed and consumed within
the application, but cannot be removed or a different part selected.
o The component is returned when searching using the Part Selection Dialog Box.
o The component can be accessed within Capital Library, but cannot be edited.

308 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Extra Tab

• User has no access to the domain assigned to the component:

o Any designs upon which the component appears can be opened, but generate a
warning. It is possible to view the part number of the associated part, but not to
inspect the part within the Part Selection dialog box.
o The component is not returned when searching using the Part Selection dialog box.
o The component cannot be accessed in Capital Library.

Note
The above conditions assume that the domain selected for the component has been assigned
as an allowed domain of the project. See the Project Preferences Dialog Box topic in the
Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide for more information.

Related Topics
Editing the Extra Details of a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 309

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Fixture Details Tab

Fixture Details Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Fixture.
The fields on the Fixture Details Tab are used to specify attributes for a formboard fixture.
Objects

Table 6-14. Fixture Details Tab Contents

Field Description
Bundles Supported The number of bundles that can be supported by the formboard
fixture. Optional.
Shaft Diameter The shaft diameter of the formboard fixture. Optional.
Min. Bundle Width The minimum bundle width that can be supported by the formboard
fixture. Optional.
Max. Bundle Width The maximum bundle width that can be supported by the formboard
fixture. Optional.
Min. Wire Count The minimum number of wires that can be supported by the
formboard fixture. Optional.
Max. Wire Count The maximum number of wires that can be supported by the
formboard fixture. Optional.
Auto Selectable Specifies whether the formboard fixture is selected automatically
during the Harness Engineering, Composite Breakdown and DSI
Import procedures in Capital Engineer and Capital Designer
(selected) or not (unselected). Optional.

Related Topics
Creating a Formboard Fixture
Editing the Attributes of a Formboard Fixture

310 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Footprints Tab

Footprints Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Device.
The fields in this tab are used to specify footprints for a device.
Objects

Table 6-15. Footprints Tab Contents

Field Description
Footprint List Lists the footprints created for the component. The component can
have multiple footprints. Click on a footprint to display the
mappings of device pins to connector cavities for that footprint in
the Cavity Mapping Table.
New Footprint Adds a new footprint to the footprint list.

Copy Footprint Copies the selected footprint in the list and creates a new footprint
using the selected one as a template. You can then edit the details of
the copy.
Delete Footprint Deletes the selected footprint in the list.

View All Pin Mapping Displays the View Pin Mapping details Dialog Box where you can
view all of the pin mappings for the footprint.
The columns in this list are:
• Status column
Indicates whether there are any issues with the footprint ( ),
such as unassigned device pins. Hold your mouse cursor over the
icon to see details of the issue.
• Footprint Name
The name of the footprint. Click in this field to edit it.
• Default
Indicates whether this is the default footprint used for the device.
• Footprint Type
Indicates whether the Footprint is a harness connector footprint
( ) or device connector footprint ( ). Click the field to change
the type. You cannot change from a harness connector to a
device connector footprint if a device connector footprint already
exists.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 311

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Footprints Tab

Table 6-15. Footprints Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Connector Table Displays the connectors used in the footprint selected in the
Footprint List and the device pin to connector cavity mappings.
The header of this table displays the name of the footprint and
whether it is a harness connector or device connector footprint.
New Footprint Pin Adds a new connector to the footprint.
Mapping

View Part Details If a connector with an assigned library part is selected in the table,
this displays the details for that library part.

Delete Pin Mapping If a connector is selected in the table, this removes the connector
Details from the footprint and deletes any mappings to it.
If a cavity is selected in the table, this removes the mapping to that
cavity and the Mated Pin field becomes blank.
Connector/Cavity Displays the footprint connectors and their cavities in a tree structure
that you can expand and collapse. If you want to edit a connector
name, double-click it.
If there is an issue with a connector, such as unassigned connector
cavities, an icon is displayed. old your mouse cursor over the icon
to see details of the issue.
Part Number Displays the component part number assigned to the footprint
connector. Double-click the cell for a connector to either manually
enter a part number or click the ellipsis (...) button to display the Part
Selection Dialog Box where you can search for a part number.
Mated Pin Displays the device pins that are mated to the connectors and the pin
mapped to a connector cavity.
If a connector cavity does not have a mated pin, you can create a
mapping by selecting the cavity in this table, selecting an unmapped
pin in the Cavity Mapping Table and clicking Assign. Alternatively,
select the cavity in this table and double-click an unmapped pin in
the Cavity Mapping Table.
To remove a mapping, select the row in this table and click Delete
Pin Mapping Details ( ).
When the connector/cavity tree is expanded, pressing the End key
on your keyboard jumps to the next unmapped cavity on the
connector.

312 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Footprints Tab

Table 6-15. Footprints Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Cavity Mapping Table Displays the mappings of device pins to connector cavities for the
footprint selected in the Footprint List. The Mated Cavity column
displays both the connector name and cavity name. If a pin does not
have a mated cavity, you can create a mapping by selecting the pin
in this table, selecting an unmapped cavity in the Connector Table
and clicking Assign. Alternatively, select the pin in this table and
double-click an unmapped cavity in the Connector Table.

Usage Notes
Re-mapping Mapped Cavities:

If you want to re-map a mapped cavity in the Connector Table, you must unmap it first by
selecting the cavity cell and clicking the Delete Pin Mapping Details ( ) button. The Mated
Pin cell for that cavity becomes blank. Keeping that Connector Table row selected, you can
then select a Mated Cavity from the Cavity Mapping table and click Assign.

Related Topics
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint
Deleting a Footprint from a Device

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 313

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab

Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Heat Shrink Sleeve.
The fields on the Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab are used to specify attributes for a heat shrink sleeve.
Objects

Table 6-16. Heat Shrink Sleeve Tab Contents

Field Description
Min. Total C.S.A. The minimum total wire cross-sectional area to which the heat
shrink sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Max. Total C.S.A. The maximum total wire cross-sectional area to which the heat
shrink sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Min. Single Wire C.S.A. The minimum single wire cross-sectional area to which the heat
shrink sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Max. Single Wire C.S.A. The maximum single wire cross-sectional area to which the heat
shrink sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Min. No. Wires (Total) The minimum number of wires to which the heat shrink sleeve can
be applied. Mandatory.
Max. No. Wires (Total) The maximum number of wires to which the heat shrink sleeve can
be applied. Mandatory.
Auto Selectable Specifies whether the heat shrink sleeve is selected automatically
during the Harness Calculations, Composite Breakdown and DSI
Import procedures (selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Heat Shrink Sleeve
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Heat Shrink Sleeve

314 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
History Tab

History Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box.
This tab is used to view the revision history of a component, as well as offering options
allowing you to create revisions by associating existing library parts. It also enables you to
maintain a modification history detailing changes that have been made to the part.
Objects

Table 6-17. History Tab Contents

Field Description
Revision History Table Displays the parts comprising the revision history of the selected
component.
• Part Number
Displays all parts within the revision history of the selected part,
including the selected part itself. Read-only.
• Latest
Indicates which of the parts in the revision history is the latest
revision. Mandatory.
New Adds a new row to the Revision History table, which can then be
populated by selecting a new part in the Associate Part field.
Optional.
Delete Removes the selected row from the Revision History table.
Optional.
Associate Part Displays the part selected in the Revision History table. To specify
a part for a new row in the table, click the ellipsis (...) button to the
right of the field and select a part from the Part Selection Dialog
Box. Upon selection, the part number is displayed in the field.
Optional.
Modification Note Allows you to add a note recording the nature of a modification.
Optional.
Modification History Enables you to maintain a record of modifications made to the
library part (for example, User1 changed the Short Description of
the part). This is useful when using Enterprise Assets functionality.
In the upper box, enter any notes relating to a modification and
click Apply; the notes are added to the lower window along with
information about which user entered the notes and when.
Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 315

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
History Tab

Usage Notes
You can develop a plugin that tracks all changes made to components and updates the
Modification History for the individual components automatically when Apply is clicked on
the Component Maintenance dialog box. There are three possible types of plugin for this:
track changes in the history during component editing, track updates during library import and
track updates when the Copy Component Details action is used.

For more information about developing and using extensibility plugins, see the
PluginDevelopment.pdf file, located in the doc\plugin folder of your Capital installation.

Related Topics
Creating a Revision of a Part
Adding a Revision to a Part’s Revision History
Removing a Revision from a Part’s Revision History

316 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Housing Tab

Housing Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
The fields in the Housing tab are used to associate one or more sub-components with a
component.
Objects

Table 6-18. Housing Tab Contents

Field Description
Housing Table Lists the sub-components associated with the component. Click on
a row in the table to select that association; the fields on this tab,
below, are updated to display the existing values. If a cavity group
is associated, the Cavity Group column displays its name. The
Expand Cavity Group option controls whether the cavity group is
displayed as one sub-component or whether each sub-component in
the group is listed in the table. Clicking on a sub-component in the
cavity group selects the whole cavity group.
Expand Cavity Group Specifies whether a cavity group is displayed as one sub-
component (unselected) or whether each sub-component in the
group is listed (selected) in the Housing Table.
New Adds a new row to the Housing Table, which can than be populated
by specifying values in the fields on this tab and clicking Apply to
create a new sub-component association.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means
that:
• If you are creating a new association, all fields are cleared or
returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing an existing association, the fields are returned
to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Housing Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button
is relabeled as Restore).
Sub-Component The internal part number of the sub-component. Click the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field to access the Part Selection
Dialog Box where you select the sub-component. You can click the
View part details ( ) button to view all the details for the selected
part (see Component Details Section for descriptions of the tabs
and fields). Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 317

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Housing Tab

Table 6-18. Housing Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Status The status of the sub-component. Indicates whether the component
can be selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or
whether it can be deleted from the database (Obsolete). Read-only.
Group Name The component group to which the component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the component
groups. Read-only.
Usage Specifies whether the sub-component is optional or mandatory for
use with the main component or if its use is determined by the
customer to which the main component is applied. This field is
automatically set to optional for cavity groups, terminals, cavity
plugs, cavity seals and connectors to support the automated
selection routines used in Harness design. Mandatory.
Quantity Specifies the number of the selected sub-components that are
required in the housing definition or, if the sub-component is a tape,
specifies the number of turns that must be applied. For calculated
items that you wish the system to select automatically (for example,
terminals, cavity seals and blanking plugs), specify 0 (zero). For
cavity groups (and all sub-components of a cavity group) this field
will default to 0 and will be unavailable for editing. Mandatory.
Factor If more than one sub-component of the same component group are
to be specified in the housing definition (for example, two types of
terminal), a priority number (factor) can be assigned to each of the
sub-components to indicate which one should be selected as the
default when the main component is specified on a design. Higher
numbers have the highest priority; for example, 15 is higher than 2.
Optional.

318 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Housing Tab

Table 6-18. Housing Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
First Cavity The label and operation of the field varies according to the Mode
or setting. Specifies the first cavity or position into which the sub-
component fits.
First Position
• If the sub-component fits in all cavities or positions, leave this
field blank.
• If the sub-component fits in only one cavity or position, specify
that cavity in this field.
• If the sub-component fits in multiple cavities or positions but
they are non-continuous, create a separate association for each
of the required cavities.
• If the sub-component fits in a continuous range of cavities or
positions, specify the first cavity in the range.
If you want to create a non-continuous range of cavities, click on
the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the Last Cavity field to
display the Cavity Selection Dialog Box. This option will only be
available if the First Cavity field is blank, and is only applicable to
cavities; positions are not supported. Optional.
Last Cavity The label and operation of the field varies according to the Mode
or setting. Specifies the last cavity or position into which the sub-
component fits.
Last Position
• If the sub-component fits in all cavities or positions, leave this
field blank.
• If the sub-component fits in only one cavity or position, leave
this field blank.
• If the sub-component fits in multiple cavities or positions but
they are non-continuous, leave this field blank.
• If the sub-component fits in a continuous range of cavities or
positions, specify the last cavity in the range.
If you want to create a non-continuous range of cavities, click on
the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the this field to display the
Cavity Selection Dialog Box. This option will only be available if
the First Cavity field is blank, and is only applicable to cavities;
positions are not supported. Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 319

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Housing Tab

Table 6-18. Housing Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Mode The physical relationship between the main component and its sub-
components. Mandatory. Specifies one of the following:
• Cavity
Sub-components are associated with specific cavities within the
main component. For example, you could assign a specific
terminal part to all cavities of a connector.
• Position
Sub-components are associated with positions on a modular
connector component. See Modular Connector for an example
of a modular connector and its positions. Enter numeric,
alphabetic or alpha-numeric values as required.
Positions Blocked The positions on a parent component that become unusable once
this sub-component has been assigned. For example, if a sub-
component in position A1 will obstruct position A2 once it is
inserted, you enter A2. You can either enter a single position, or
you can specify a comma-separated list of positions (for example,
A1,A2,A10,A15). This field is enabled only if Mode is set to
Position. Optional.
Scoped The scope for the sub-component. This restricts its use to those
designs to which particular scopes have been applied (see “Scope
Code” on page 254 for further information about scope codes).
Only connector cavity components and backshell plugs (in the
housing definition of a backshell seal) support scoping. Click the
ellipsis (...) button to the right of this field to display the Housing
Scope Selection Dialog Box. Optional.
Stud Pin Used when specifying the valid ring terminals that can mate with a
stud pin.
Enter the name of the stud pin with which you are mating the ring
terminal or ring terminal group in the Sub-Component field.

Related Topics
Housing
Adding a Sub-Component as Housing to a Component
Adding Cavity Sub-Components as Housing to a Component
Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component
Deleting a Sub-Component from the Housing of Component
Creating a Modular Connector
Assigning a Sub-Connector to a Modular Connector Position

320 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Housing Tab

Deleting a Sub-Connector from a Modular Connector Position

Specifying the Valid Ring Terminals for a Stud Pin

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 321

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
IDC Group Tab

IDC Group Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of IDC Connector.
The fields on the IDC Group Tab are used to specify attributes for an insulation displacement
connector (IDC) and to specify whether any IDC connector cavities share an electrical
connection.
Objects

Table 6-19. IDC Group Tab Contents

Field Description
Test Block The internal part number of the test block (power socket) into
which the IDC connector fits on a harness testing board. Click the
ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to access the Part
Selection Dialog Box where you select the test block. You can click
the View part details ( ) button to view all the details for the
selected test block (see Component Details Section for descriptions
of the tabs and fields).Optional, only enabled when you have added
a cavity to the Cavity Table.
No. Cavities The number of cavities on the IDC connector, as specified on the
Base Tab. Read-only.
No. Locks The number of physical locks that the connector has. Mandatory,
only enabled when you have added a cavity to the Cavity Table.
Max. Bundle Diameter Enables you to specify an additional connector attribute which,
when combined with a design rule check, allows the system to
determine if the wire bundle is too thick to fit the connector.
Optional.
Connector Open? Specifies whether the IDC connector must be opened manually
before wires can be put in it (unselected) or whether it is open
already before you place wires in it (selected). Mandatory, only
enabled when you have added a cavity to the Cavity Table.
Cavity Table Lists the IDC connector cavities that share an electrical connection.
Optional.
New Adds a new row to the Cavity Table, which can than be populated
by specifying a cavity and clicking Apply.
Reset Returns the Cavity field to its previous state.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Cavity Table. This change is not
written to the database until you click Apply; before this point, the
deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).

322 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
IDC Group Tab

Table 6-19. IDC Group Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Cavity The name of the cavity that shares an electrical connection with the
other IDC connector cavities in the Cavity Table. Optional.

Related Topics
Specifying Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) Attributes
Adding a Cavity to an IDC Cavity Group
Deleting a Cavity from an IDC Cavity Group

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 323

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
In-House Assembly Tab

In-House Assembly Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of In-House Assembly.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the sub-components in an in-house assembly.
Objects

Table 6-20. In-House Assembly Tab Contents

Field Description
Sub-Component Table Lists the sub-components that are in the assembly. Click on a row to
select a sub-component; the fields below the table are updated to
display the existing values.
New Adds a new row to the Sub-Component Table, which can then be
populated by specifying values in the fields below the table before
clicking Apply to add a sub-component.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Sub-Component
Table, since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Sub-Component Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Sub-Component The internal part number of the sub-component. Click the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field to access the Part Selection Dialog
Box where you select the sub-component. Mandatory.
Status The status of the sub-component. Indicates whether the component
can be selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or
whether it can be deleted from the database (Obsolete). Read-only.
Group Name The component group to which the component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the component
groups. Read-only.
Quantity How many of the sub-component are in the assembly. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating an In-House Assembly
Adding a Sub-component to an In-House Assembly
Deleting a Sub-component from an In-House Assembly

324 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Mating Tab

Mating Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name from the following: Connector
and IDC Connector.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the valid connectors that can mate (connect) with a
connector and the mapping of the cavities when the connectors are mated.
Objects

Table 6-21. Mating Tab Contents

Field Description
Mating Parts List Lists the valid mated connectors that have been specified. Click on a
mated connector to display the mapping of its cavities to the
connector being edited in the Mapped Cavity Table.
Mapped Cavity Table Displays the mapping of the cavities of the currently selected mated
connector in the Mating Parts List to the connector being edited. The
Cavity column displays the cavity name from the connector being
edited and the Mapped Cavity column displays the mapped cavity
from the mated connector. Click on a row to select that cavity
mapping; the fields on this tab are updated to display the existing
values.
New Adds a new row to the left of the Mating Parts List, which can than be
populated by specifying a Mating Part and clicking Apply to specify
a valid mated connector.
Delete Removes the mated connector that is selected in the Mating Parts
List. This change is not written to the database until you click Apply;
before this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Mating Part The internal part number of the mated connector. Click the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field to access the Part Selection Dialog
Box where you select the mated connector. Mandatory.
Cavity The cavity on the mated connector to which the selected cavity in the
Mapped Cavity Table maps. Select the cavity from the drop-down
list. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Specifying Valid Mated Parts for a Connector
Deleting a Valid Mated Part from a Connector

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 325

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multicore Wires Tab

Multicore Wires Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Multicore Wire.
The fields in this tab are used to specify attributes for a multicore wire’s outer sheath and to
specify the inner cores (conductors) in the multicore.
Objects

Table 6-22. Multicore Wires Tab Contents

Field Description
Sheath Type Specifies whether the multicore has an outer sheath (Sheath) or is a
twisted pair without an outer sheath (Twisted). Mandatory.
OS Color The color of the outer sheath. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right
of the field to access the Color Code Selection Dialog Box where you
select a color code. These codes must have been created previously.
See “Creating a Color Code” on page 235. Mandatory if Sheath Type
is Sheath, disabled if Sheath Type is Twisted.
OS Spec. The specification for an outer sheath. If the multicore does not have
an outer sheath, this field can be used to specify the multiplication
factor that is used for calculating the length required for the twisted
inner cores. Bought-in twisted pairs must not be given an entirely
numerical specification because this is how this software identifies
in-house twisted pairs. Mandatory.
Outside Diameter A fixed value for the outside diameter of the multicore. If this is not
specified, the software calculates the outside diameter based on the
diameters of the internal conductors and the insulation thicknesses up
to two decimal places. Optional.
Material Code The material code for the multicore. Read-only.
Outer Indicator Type The multicore indicator that you want to use for the outer sheath. The
drop-down list changes depending on the selected Sheath Type and is
populated with values from
<Capital_intstallation_directory>\config\defaultStyle.xml. This field
can be left blank if you do not want to specify an indicator type. If the
selected indicator type is deleted from defaultstyle.xml, this field
defaults back to blank. Optional.

326 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multicore Wires Tab

Table 6-22. Multicore Wires Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Multicore Structure Situated to the left of the Inner Cores Table, this structure displays the

inner cores in a tree structure.

The top node indicates whether the multicore has an outer sheath
(Sheath) or is a twisted pair (Twisted). The inner core nodes below
indicate whether the innercore is a sheath (Sheath), a single
conductor (Single) or a twisted group of conductors (Twisted). Add a
node below a sheath or twisted group by right-clicking on it and
selecting New.
Click on an inner core node to select that inner core; the Inner Cores
Table highlights the row for it and the fields below the table are
updated to display the existing values for it.
Inner Cores Table Displays the attributes of the inner cores in rows. Click on a row to
select that innercore; the Multicore Structure highlights the node for it
and the fields below the table are updated to display the existing
values for

it.
New Adds a new inner core node to the Multicore Structure and a row to
the Inner Cores Table. The attributes in the row can than be populated
by specifying values in the fields on this tab and clicking Apply.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are specifying a new inner core, all fields are cleared or
returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing an existing inner core, the fields are returned to
their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected inner core from the Inner Cores Table.
Sheath Type The type of inner core. Select either a sheath (Sheath), a single
conductor (Single) or a twisted group of conductors (Twisted) from
the drop-down list. Mandatory.
Conductor Role Specifies whether a single conductor is a wire or shield. Select the
appropriate value from the drop-down list. Mandatory if Sheath Type
is Single, otherwise disabled.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 327

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multicore Wires Tab

Table 6-22. Multicore Wires Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Outside Diameter The outside diameter of the wire, calculated using the insulation
thickness defined for the wire code and its CSA, displayed up to two
decimal places. This is updated automatically when you select a
Specification. Read-only.
Color The color of the inner core. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
the field to access the Color Code Selection Dialog Box where you
select a color code. These codes must have been created previously.
See “Creating a Color Code” on page 235. Mandatory if Sheath Type
is Sheath or Single, otherwise disabled.
Material Code The material of the inner core. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the
right of the field to access the Material Codes Selection Dialog Box
where you select a material code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Material Code” on page 237. Mandatory
if Sheath Type is Sheath or Single, otherwise disabled.
Specification The specification for the inner core. If the Sheath Type is Twisted,
this field can be used to specify the multiplication factor that is used
for calculating the length required for the twisted inner cores. Bought-
in twisted pairs must not be given an entirely numerical specification
because this is how this software identifies in-house twisted pairs. If
the Sheath Type is Single, click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
this field to display the Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box. The
wire specification must have been created already. See“Creating a
Wire Size” on page 243. Mandatory.
Inner Indicator Type The multicore indicator that you want to use for the inner core
selected in the Inner Cores Table. The drop-down list changes
depending on the Sheath Type and is populated with values from
<Capital_installation_directory\config\defaultstyle.xml. This field
can be left blank if you do not want to specify an indicator type. If the
selected indicator type is deleted from defaultstyle.xml, this field
defaults back to blank. Optional for sheath or twisted inner cores,
disabled for single inner cores.

Related Topics
Creating a Multicore Wire with an Outer Sheath
Creating a Twisted Pair
Adding an Inner Core to a Multicore Wire
Deleting an Inner Core from a Multicore Wire

328 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multiple Terminations Tab

Multiple Terminations Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name from the following: IDC
Connector and Terminal.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the combinations of wire sizes and wire material that
can terminate simultaneously at the cavities or terminals in a component.
Objects

Table 6-23. Multiple Terminations Tab Contents

Field Description
Configuration List Lists the combinations (configurations) that have been specified.
Select a combination to display the wire sizes and wire materials

that it includes in the Wire Size Table.

Wire Size Table Lists the wire sizes and materials for the configuration that is
currently selected in the Configuration List. Click on a row on the
right of the table to select that wire size and material combination;
the fields on this tab are updated to display the existing values for
that wire size and

material.
New Situated under the Configuration List, adds a new configuration
row to the Configuration List.
Wire Group If you have specified more that one Wire Group, clicking this
Combination button displays the Wire Combination Selection dialog box, with
every possible combination of wire sizes from the selected groups
displayed, and selected for inclusion by default. For example, if
you have selected two wire groups for a configuration, every two-
wire combination is displayed; if you have selected three wire
groups, every three-wire combination is displayed.
Only unique wire combinations are displayed; any duplicated
combinations are not shown.
To remove a combination from the configuration, deselect the
Selection option in the appropriate grid row. Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 329

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multiple Terminations Tab

Table 6-23. Multiple Terminations Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
New Situated under the Wire Size Table, adds a new row to the Wire
Size Table, which can than be populated by completing the fields
on this tab to specify a wire size and material combination.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Wire Size Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button
is relabeled as Restore).
Wire Group Instead of individually specifying each wire size for a
configuration, you can select one or more wire groups to use.
• Wire Group Name
Select the wire group to use from the drop-down list. Upon
selection of a wire group, all other fields on the tab are disabled.
Optional.
• Description
The descriptive text applied to the selected wire group. Read-
only.
Material Code The wire material. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to access the Material Codes Selection Dialog Box where you
select a material code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Material Code” on page 237.
Mandatory.
Specification The wire specification. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
this field to display the Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box.
The wire specification must have been created already.
See“Creating a Wire Size” on page 243. Mandatory.
CSA The cross-sectional area for the wire size. This is updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.
Outside Diameter The outside diameter of the wire, calculated using the insulation
thickness defined for the wire code and its C.S.A. Updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.

Related Topics
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component
Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration

330 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab

Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name from the following: Assembly,
Connector, IDC Connector, In-House Assembly, Other, and Terminal.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the combinations of wire sizes and wire material that fit
simultaneously at the cavities in a component.
Objects

Table 6-24. Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab Contents

Field Description
Configuration List Lists the combinations (configurations) that have been specified.
Each cavity can have multiple combinations (configurations).
Select a combination to display the wire sizes and wire materials

that it includes in the Wire Size Table.

Wire Size Table Lists the wire sizes and materials for the configuration that is
currently selected in the Configuration List. Click on a row to
select that wire size and material combination; the fields on this tab
are updated to display the existing values for that wire size and

material.
New Configuration Displays the Specify Cavity dialog box where you enter a cavity
name and adds a new row containing a configuration name to the
left of the Wire Size Table. If you want to use this multiple wire
configuration for a specific cavity, enter the cavity name in the
Cavity Name field. Alternatively, leave the field blank so that the
multiple wire configuration is applicable to all cavities on the
connector.
If you enter a value in the Cavity Name field, it must match a
cavity name. You cannot enter multiple cavities. If different
cavities on one connector require different configurations, you
must enter a configuration for each individual cavity.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 331

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab

Table 6-24. Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Wire Group If you have specified more that one Wire Group, clicking this
Combination button displays the Wire Combination Selection dialog box, with
every possible combination of wire sizes from the selected groups
displayed, and selected for inclusion by default. For example, if
you have selected two wire groups for a configuration, every two-
wire combination is displayed; if you have selected three wire
groups, every three-wire combination is displayed.
Only unique wire combinations are displayed; any duplicated
combinations are not shown.
To remove a combination from the configuration, deselect the
Selection option in the appropriate grid row. Optional.
New Adds a new row to the right of the Wire Size Table, which can than
be populated by completing the fields on this tab to specify a wire
size and material configuration.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means
that:
• If you are specifying a new wire size and material
configuration, all fields are cleared or returned to their default
selection.
• If you are editing an existing wire size and material
configuration, the fields are returned to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the right of the Wire Size Table.
This change is not written to the database until you click Apply;
before this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore
(the Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
No. Cavities The number of cavities on the component, as specified on the Base
Tab. Read-only.
Wire Group Instead of individually specifying each wire size for a
configuration, you can select one or more wire groups to use.
• Wire Group Name
Select the wire group to use from the drop-down list. Upon
selection of a wire group, all other fields on the tab are
disabled. Optional.
• Description
The descriptive text applied to the selected wire group. Read-
only.

332 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab

Table 6-24. Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Material Code The wire material. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to access the Material Codes Selection Dialog Box where you
select a material code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Material Code” on page 237.
Mandatory.
Specification The wire specification. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
this field to display the Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box.
The wire specification must have been created already.
See“Creating a Wire Size” on page 243. Mandatory.
CSA The cross-sectional area for the wire size. This is specified
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.
Outside Diameter The outside diameter of the wire, calculated using the insulation
thickness defined for the wire code and its CSA. Updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.

Related Topics
Specifying the Wire Size Combinations that Fit Cavities on a Component
Deleting a Multiple Wire Fits Cavity Configuration
Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit
Together at Connector Cavities

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 333

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pin Attributes Tab

Pin Attributes Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Device.
The Pin Attributes Tab is used to specify attributes for the pins on a device.
Objects

Table 6-25. Pin Attributes Tab Contents

Field Description
Pin Attributes Table Lists the pins on the device and their attributes. Select a row to edit
the values for that pin.
Pin Name The name of the pin. Read-only.
Pin Type The type of pin. You can select NC (default), IN, OUT, IxO, IxO
Terminated, PWR or GND. Mandatory.
I Min Enter the value in the table. This value is applied to the pin when
Capital Analysis runs a simulation. Numeric value up to 10
decimal places. Optional.
I Max Enter the value in the table. This value is applied to the pin when
Capital Analysis runs a simulation. Numeric value up to 10
decimal places. Mandatory if Pin Type is OUT, otherwise
Optional.
t IMax Enter the value in the table. This value is applied to the pin when
Capital Analysis runs a simulation. Numeric value up to 10
decimal places. Mandatory if Pin Type is PWR, otherwise optional.
I Nominal Enter the value in the table. This value is applied to the pin when
Capital Analysis runs a simulation. Numeric value up to 10
decimal places. Optional.
V Nominal Enter the value in the table. This value is applied to the pin when
Capital Analysis runs a simulation. Numeric value up to 10
decimal places. Mandatory if Pin Type is OUT, otherwise optional.
V Min Enter the value in the table. This value is applied to the pin when
Capital Analysis runs a simulation. Numeric value up to 10
decimal places. Optional.
Contact Material The contact material for the pin. Click the field to select the
material from a drop-down list. These codes must have been
created previously. See “Creating a Material Code” on page 237.
Mandatory.
Min Wire CSA The minimum wire cross-sectional area that can be used with the
pin. Mandatory.

334 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pin Attributes Tab

Table 6-25. Pin Attributes Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Graphic Type The graphic displayed with the pin on a diagram. You can select no
graphic (blank) or one of the following from the drop-down list in
the field. Mandatory.

• female

• female-coax
• male
• male-coax
Pin Group An alphanumeric code that groups pins together. This code is used
in Capital Insight to assign device pins to slot holes. Optional.
Pin Properties The Pin Attributes Table is automatically extended to offer an
additional column for each pin property configured for the Type
Code to which the device belongs. Each column is named
according to the property it represents. See “Creating a Pin
Property Code” on page 247 for more information. Double-click
within the appropriate field to enable it, then enter the property
value. Optional.

Related Topics
Editing the Attributes of Device Pins

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 335

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pin Names Tab

Pin Names Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Device.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the names of the pins on a device.
Objects

Table 6-26. Pin Names Tab Contents

Field Description
Pin Name Table Lists the pin names. Click on a row to select a pin name; the fields
below the table are updated to display the existing values. You can
edit a Pin Name field within the table.
The Sort Order column controls the order in which the pin names
are displayed in the design applications. For example, in an Add
Pin dialog box or when mating a connector with a device. If you
want to change the position of a pin name in the sort order, select
its row and click the arrow buttons to the right of the table:

New Adds a new row to the Pin Name Table, which can then be
populated by specifying a name before clicking Apply to create a
new cavity name.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Pin Name Table,
since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Pin Name Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button
is relabeled as Restore).
Name The cavity name. Mandatory.
No. Pins The number of cavities on the component. Read-only.
Analysis Model Cavity The name of a Capital Analysis model if one is attached to the
component. Read-only.
Symbol Associated Indicates whether a symbol is associated with the component
(selected) or not (unselected). Read-only.
Stud Pin Indicates whether the pin is a stud pin used with Ring Terminals.

336 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pin Names Tab

Related Topics
Editing a Pin Name on a Device
Adding a Pin to a Device
Deleting a Pin from a Device

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 337

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Properties Tab

Properties Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
The fields in the Properties tab are used to add, edit or delete a user-defined property on a
component.
Objects

Table 6-27. Properties Tab Contents

Field Description
Property Table Lists the properties on the component. Click on a row in the table to
select that property; the fields on this tab, below, are updated to
display the existing values.
New Adds a new row to the Property Table, which can than be populated
by specifying values in the fields on this tab and clicking Apply to
add a property to the component.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means
that:
• If you are creating a new property, all fields are cleared or
returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing an existing property, the fields are returned to
their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Property Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button
is relabeled as Restore).
Property The name of the property. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right
of this field to display the Property Selection Dialog Box. The
property name must have been created already. See “Creating a
Property Code” on page 247. Mandatory.
Description The description of the property. Read-only.
Value The value of the property for the component. Up to 30
alphanumeric characters. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Adding a Property to a Component
Editing a Property Value for a Component
Deleting a Property from a Component

338 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Ring Terminal Group Details Tab

Ring Terminal Group Details Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for ring terminal groups only.
This tab is used to specify the ring terminals in the ring terminal group.
Objects

Table 6-28. Ring Terminal Group Details Tab Contents

Field Description
Ring Terminals table Lists the ring terminals in the ring terminal group. Click on a row in
the table to select the ring terminal; the fields on this tab, below, are
updated to display the existing values for that ring terminal.
New Adds a new row to the Ring Terminals table, which can than be
populated by specifying values in the fields on this tab and clicking
Apply to create a new sub-component association.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state.
Delete Removes a selected ring terminal from the Ring Terminals table.
This change is not written to the database until you click Apply;
before this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore
(the Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Sub-Component The internal part number of the ring terminal. Click the ellipsis (...)
button to the right of the field to access the Part Selection Dialog
Box where you search for and select a ring terminal. You can click
the View part details ( ) button to view all the details for the
selected part (see Component Details Section for descriptions of the
tabs and fields). Mandatory.
Status The status of the ring terminal. Indicates whether the component can
be selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or
whether it can be deleted from the database (Obsolete). Read-only.
Group Name The component group to which the ring terminal belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the component
groups. Read-only.
Factor You have multiple ring terminals in a ring terminal group. Use this
field to assign a priority number (factor) to each of the ring
terminals to indicate which one should be selected as the default
when the group is selected elsewhere in the Capital applications.
Higher numbers have the highest priority; for example, 15 is higher
than 2. Optional.

Related Topics
Creating a Ring Terminal Group

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 339

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Scope Tab

Scope Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
This tab is used to apply scope code to a component.
Objects

Table 6-29. Scope Tab Contents

Field Description
Available Displays a list of available scope codes. You can select scopes in
this list.
Add Moves the selected scopes in the Available window to the Selected
window.
Add All Moves all scopes in the Available window to the Selected window.
Remove Moves the selected scopes in the Selected window to the Available
window.
Remove All Moves all scopes in the Selected window to the Available window.
Selected Displays the names of the scopes applied to the component.
If a tick ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this indicates that
this component can be used when this scope is applied to a design.
In this case, this component cannot be used when any scopes of the
same category listed in the Available window are applied to a
design.
If a no entry icon ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this
indicates that this component cannot be used when this scope is
applied to a design. In this case, this component can be used when
any scopes of the same category listed in the Available window are
applied to a design.

Related Topics
Applying Scopes to a Component

340 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Seal Attributes Tab

Seal Attributes Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Backshell Seal.
The fields in this tab are used to specify attributes for a backshell seal.
Objects

Table 6-30. Seal Attributes Tab Contents

Field Description
Min. Total C.S.A. The minimum wire cross-sectional area for which the backshell
seal can be used. Mandatory.
Max. Total. C.S.A. The maximum wire cross-sectional area for which the backshell
seal can be used. Mandatory.
Pre Cut Specifies whether the backshell seal has pre-cut wire holes
(selected) or requires wire holes to be cut during the harness
manufacture (unselected). Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Detached Backshell Seal
Editing the Seal Attributes of a Backshell Seal

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 341

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Single Terminations Tab

Single Terminations Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name from the following: Cavity
Seal, IDC Connector and Terminal.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the single wire sizes and material configurations that fit
the cavities or terminals in a component.
Objects

Table 6-31. Single Terminations Tab Contents

Field Description
Wire Size Table Lists the wire sizes and material configurations that fit the
cavities or terminals of the component. Click on a row in the
table to select that material and wire size configuration; the
fields on this tab, below, are updated to display the existing
values.
New Adds a new row to the Wire Size Table, which can than be
populated by specifying values in the fields on this tab and
clicking Apply to specify a wire size and material configuration.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means
that:
• If you are specifying a new wire size and material
configuration, all fields are cleared or returned to their
default selection.
• If you are editing an existing wire size and material
configuration, the fields are returned to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Wire Size Table. This change
is not written to the database until you click Apply; before this
point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Delete.
Wire Group Name Select a wire group definition from the drop-down list to
populate the Wire Size Table with all of the wire sizes specified
for that group. Upon selection of a wire group, all other fields on
this tab are disabled. Optional.
Description The descriptive text attached to the selected Wire Group Name.
Read-only.
Wire Specification If None is selected in the Range Specification section, the fields
in this Wire Specification section specify that you are adding a
single wire size and material configuration to the table. Optional.

342 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Single Terminations Tab

Table 6-31. Single Terminations Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Material Code The wire material. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to access the Material Codes Selection Dialog Box where
you select a material code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Material Code” on page 237.
Mandatory.
Specification The wire specification. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right
of this field to display the Wire Specification Selection Dialog
Box. The wire specification must have been created already.
See“Creating a Wire Size” on page 243. Mandatory when Wire
Specification is selected. Disabled when Range Specification is
selected.
CSA. The cross-sectional area for the single wire. Updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only when
Wire Specification is selected. Disabled when Range
Specification is selected.
Outside Diameter The outside diameter of the wire, calculated using the insulation
thickness defined for the wire code and its C.S.A. Updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only when
Wire Specification is selected. Disabled when Range
Specification is selected.
Range Specification If you use the fields in this section, you are adding multiple wire
sizes for multiple cavities to the Wire Size Table at one time,
either by Outside Diameter or C.S.A. minimum and maximum
value. If either of the following settings are selected, the
Specification, CSA and Outside Diameter fields in the Wire
Specification section are disabled. Optional.
• Outside Diameter
Select the Outside Diameter option and specify a minimum
and maximum value for single wires that fit the component.
Mandatory when Range Specification is selected. Disabled
when Wire Specification is selected.
• C.S.A.
Select the C.S.A. option and specify a minimum and
maximum cross-sectional area for single wires that fit the
component. Mandatory when Range Specification is
selected. Disabled when Wire Specification is selected.

Related Topics
Creating a Cavity Seal
Specifying Valid Terminations of Single Wires for a Component
Specifying Valid Terminations of Wire Combinations for a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 343

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Single Terminations Tab

Deleting a Multiple Terminations Configuration

344 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab

Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name from the following: Assembly,
Connector, IDC Connector, In-House Assembly, Other, and Terminal.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the single wire sizes and material configurations that fit
the cavities in a component.
Objects

Table 6-32. Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab Contents

Field Description
Cavity Table Lists the cavities of the component and the wire sizes that fit them.
Click on a row in the table to select that cavity and wire size; the
fields on this tab are updated to display the existing values.
Add Wire Range Displays the Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box that enables
you to add multiple wire sizes for multiple cavities to the Cavity
Table at one time.
New Adds a new row to the Cavity Table, which can than be populated by
specifying values in the fields on this tab and clicking Apply to
specify a wire size and material configuration.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are specifying a new wire size and material configuration,
all fields are cleared or returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing an existing wire size and material
configuration, the fields are returned to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Cavity Table. This change is not
written to the database until you click Apply; before this point, the
deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Cavity The component cavity. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
this field to display the Choose Multiple Cavities dialog box where
you can select multiple cavities that fit the same wire size. A Cavity
Table row is created for each specified cavity when you click Apply.
Mandatory.
No. Cavities The number of cavities on the component, as specified on the Base
Tab. Read-only.
Wire Group Name Select a wire group definition from the drop-down list to populate all
rows of the Cavity Table (relating to the specified cavity) with all of
the wire sizes specified for that group. Upon selection of a wire
group, all other fields on this tab (with the exception of Cavity) are
disabled. Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 345

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab

Table 6-32. Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Description The descriptive text attached to the selected wire group Wire Group
Name. Read-only.
Material Code The wire material. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to access the Material Codes Selection Dialog Box where you
select a material code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Material Code” on page 237.
Mandatory.
Specification The wire specification. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
this field to display the Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box.
The wire specification must have been created already. See“Creating
a Wire Size” on page 243. Mandatory.
CSA The cross-sectional area for the wire size. This is updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.
Outside Diameter The outside diameter of the wire, calculated using the insulation
thickness defined for the wire code and its CSA. This is updated
automatically when you select a Specification. Read-only.

Related Topics
Specifying the Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component

346 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Sleeve Attributes Tab

Sleeve Attributes Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Solder Sleeve.
The fields on the Sleeve Attributes Tab are used to specify attributes for a solder sleeve.
Objects

Table 6-33. Sleeve Attributes Tab Contents

Field Description
Min. Total C.S.A. The minimum total wire cross-sectional area to which the solder
sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Max. Total C.S.A. The maximum total wire cross-sectional area to which the solder
sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Min. Single Wire The minimum single wire cross-sectional area to which the solder
C.S.A. sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Max. Single Wire The maximum single wire cross-sectional area to which the solder
C.S.A. sleeve can be applied. Mandatory.
Min. No. Wires (Total) The minimum number of wires to which the solder sleeve can be
applied. Mandatory.
Max. No. Wires (Total) The maximum number of wires to which the solder sleeve can be
applied. Mandatory.
Auto Selectable Specifies whether the solder sleeve is selected automatically during
the Harness Calculations, Composite Breakdown and DSI Import
procedures (selected) or not (unselected).

Related Topics
Creating a Solder Sleeve
Editing the Sleeve Attributes of a Solder Sleeve

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 347

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Splice Attributes Tab

Splice Attributes Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Splice.
The fields on the Splice Attributes Tab are used to specify attributes for a splice.
Objects

Table 6-34. Splice Attributes Tab Contents

Field Description
Min. Total C.S.A. The minimum total wire cross-sectional area to which the splice
can be applied. Mandatory.
Max. Total C.S.A. The maximum total wire cross-sectional area to which the splice
can be applied. Mandatory.
Min. Single Wire C.S.A. The minimum single wire cross-sectional area to which the splice
can be applied. Mandatory.
Max. Single Wire C.S.A. The maximum single wire cross-sectional area to which the splice
can be applied. Mandatory.
L/R C.S.A. Ratio The ratio of the cross-sectional area of all wires attached on both
sides of the splice to determine a C.S.A. ratio of 1 or more.
Optional.
Min. No. Wires (Total) The minimum number of wires to which the splice can be applied.
Mandatory.
Max. No. Wires (Total) The maximum number of wires to which the splice can be applied.
Mandatory.
Max. No. Wires (Per When combined with a design rule check, this allows the system to
Side) verify the maximum number of wires attached on either side of the
splice. Optional.
Auto Selectable Specifies whether the splice is selected automatically during the
Harness Calculations, Composite Breakdown and DSI Import
procedures (selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Splice
Editing the Attributes of a Splice

348 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spot Tape Selection Tab

Spot Tape Selection Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Tape.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the attributes for tape when it is applied as spot tape at
different insulation layers.
Objects

Table 6-35. Spot Tape Selection Tab Contents

Field Description
Spot Tape Attributes Lists the attributes for the tape when it is applied as spot tape at
Table different insulation layers. Click on a row in the table to select the
attributes for that insulation layer; the fields on this tab, below, are
updated to display the existing values.
New Adds a new row to the Spot Tape Attributes Table, which can than
be populated by specifying values in the fields on this tab and
clicking Apply.
Reset Returns the fields on this tab to their previous state. This means
that:
• If you are specifying attributes for spot tape in a new insulation
layer, all fields are cleared or returned to their default selection.
• If you are editing the attributes for spot tape in an existing
insulation layer, the fields are returned to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Spot Tape Attributes Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Layer The insulation layer at which the spot tape is applied. Mandatory.
Overlaps The number of turns of the spot tape required at the insulation
layer. Mandatory.
Min. Total C.S.A. The minimum total wire cross-sectional area to which the spot tape
can be applied at the insulation layer. Optional.
Max. Total C.S.A. The maximum total wire cross-sectional area to which the spot tape
can be applied at the insulation layer. Optional.
Min. Single Wire C.S.A. The minimum single wire cross-sectional area to which the spot
tape can be applied at the insulation layer. Optional.
Max. Single Wire C.S.A. The maximum single wire cross-sectional area to which the spot
tape can be applied at the insulation layer. Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 349

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Spot Tape Selection Tab

Table 6-35. Spot Tape Selection Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Min. No. Wires (Total) The minimum number of wires to which the spot tape can be
applied at the insulation layer. Optional.
Max. No. Wires (Total) The maximum number of wires to which the spot tape can be
applied at the insulation layer. Optional.
Auto Selectable Specifies whether the spot tape is selected automatically at the
insulation layer during the Harness Calculations, Composite
Breakdown and DSI Import procedures (selected) or not
(unselected). Mandatory.

Related Topics
Specifying the Spot Tape Attributes of a Tape

350 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Supplier Tab (Component Details)

Supplier Tab (Component Details)

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
The fields in the Supplier tab are used to assign one or more supplier part numbers to a
component.
Objects

Table 6-36. Supplier Tab (Component Details) Contents

Field Description
Supplier Part Number Lists the supplier part numbers that have been associated with the
Table component. You can click a column header to sort the rows by the
column contents. Click on a row to select an associated customer
part number; the fields below the table are updated to display the
existing values. The Internal Part Number for the component is
displayed also.
New Adds a new row to the Supplier Part Number Table, which can then
be populated by specifying a Supplier Part Number before clicking
Apply to create a new symbol association.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Supplier Part
Number Table, since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Supplier Part Number Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Supplier Part Number The part number used by the supplier for the component.
Mandatory.
Group Name The group name for the component group to which the component
belongs. Read-only.
Supplier Name The supplier who uses the part number. Mandatory.
Reel Length If the component is measured on a per roll or per reel basis (as with
wire or tape), this specifies the size of the reel that the supplier
uses. Up to 12 decimal numerals. Optional.
Preferred If you have multiple supplier part numbers for the component, this
specifies whether the part number is the preferred supplier part
number (selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory.
Specification Any extra notes that you want to record for the supplier part
number. Enter an unlimited number of alphanumeric characters.
Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 351

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Supplier Tab (Component Details)

Related Topics
Specifying a Supplier Part Number for a Component
Deleting a Supplier Part Number for a Component

352 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Symbol Tab

Symbol Tab
To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for any component.
The fields in the Symbol tab are used to associate one or more graphical symbols (previously
created in Capital Symbol) to the component.
Objects

Table 6-37. Symbol Tab Contents

Field Description
Symbol Name Table Lists the symbols that have been assigned to the component. The
symbols are listed alphabetically and you can reverse the order by
clicking the column header. Click on a symbol name to select it; the
symbol is displayed to the right of the list and the fields below the list
are updated to display the existing values for that symbol.
Default Specifies whether the symbol is the default symbol for the component
(selected) or not (unselected). Mandatory for an electrical Symbol,
disabled for a comment symbol.
Reconcile Pins Refreshes the symbol if has been edited in Capital Symbol and
reconciles the symbol pins with those of the component. Optional,
disabled for a comment symbol.
New Adds a new row to the Symbol Name Table, which can then be
populated by specifying a Symbol Name before clicking Apply to
create a new symbol association.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Symbol Name Table,
since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Symbol Name Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Mode Specifies whether the symbol represents an electrical device
(Electrical) or not (Comment). The list of symbols displayed for
selection in the Symbol Name field is restricted according to this
selection. Mandatory.
Symbol Library Specifies the symbol library from which you are selecting the symbol.
Symbols from this library only are displayed for selection in the
Symbol Name field. Mandatory.
Symbol Name Specifies the symbol. The symbols available for selection are
restricted according to the values in the Mode and Symbol Name
fields. Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 353

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Symbol Tab

Table 6-37. Symbol Tab Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Type Specifies the symbol type (for example, IEEE, ANSI) for the symbol
selected in the Symbol Name Table list. Enter the symbol type in this
field and click Apply to save the value. Optional.

Related Topics
Assigning a Graphical Symbol to a Component
Deleting a Symbol from a Component

354 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Termination Names Tab

Termination Names Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Backshell.
The fields in this tab are used to specify the names of the terminations on a backshell.
Objects

Table 6-38. Termination Names Tab Contents

Field Description
Termination Name Table Lists the termination names. You can click a column header to sort
the rows by the column contents. Click on a row to select a
termination name; the fields below the table are updated to display
the existing values.
The Sort Order column controls the order in which the
termination names are displayed in the design applications. If you
want to change the position of a termination name in the sort order,
select its row and click the arrow buttons to the right of the

table:
New Adds a new row to the Termination Name Table, which can then
be populated by specifying a name before clicking Apply to create
a termination name.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Termination
Name Table, since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Termination Name Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Symbol Associated Indicates whether a symbol is associated with the backshell
(selected) or not (unselected). Read-only.
No. Terminations The number of terminations on the backshell. Read-only.
Name The termination name. Mandatory.
Analysis Model Cavity The name of a Capital Analysis model if one is attached to the
backshell. Read-only.

Related Topics
Creating a Backshell

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 355

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Termination Names Tab

Editing a Termination Name on a Backshell

Adding a Termination to a Backshell
Deleting a Termination from a Backshell

356 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Ultrasonic Welds Tab

Ultrasonic Welds Tab

To access: Displayed in the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog
Box. This tab is enabled for components with a group name of Ultrasonic Weld.
The fields on this tab are used to specify the combinations of wires that can enter an ultrasonic
weld from the left, center and right directions.
Objects

Table 6-39. Ultrasonic Welds Tab Contents

Field Description
Wire Combination Table Lists the wires that can enter the ultrasonic weld from the left,
center and right cavities. Click on a row to select a wire; the fields
below the table are updated to display the existing values. In the
center section of the table, the Strip Length displays the strip
length of a center strip wire.
New Adds a new row to the Wire Combination Table section selected
in the Orientation field. The row can then be populated by
specifying values in the fields below the table before clicking
Apply.
Reset Any changes made to the selected field(s) in the Wire
Combination Table, since the last update, will be undone.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Wire Combination Table.
Orientation Specifies whether the wire enters the ultrasonic weld from the
left, center or right cavity and controls which Wire Combination
Table section contains the wire. Select the required value from the
drop-down list. Mandatory.
Material Code The wire material. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to access the Material Codes Selection Dialog Box where
you select a material code. These codes must have been created
previously. See “Creating a Material Code” on page 237.
Mandatory.
Specification The wire specification. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of
this field to display the Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box.
The wire specification must have been created already.
See“Creating a Wire Size” on page 243. Mandatory.
Center Strip The strip length of a center strip wire. Optional, disabled if
Position is Left or Right.

Related Topics
Creating an Ultrasonic Weld

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 357

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Ultrasonic Welds Tab

Adding a Wire to an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

Deleting a Wire from an Ultrasonic Weld Definition

358 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

To access: Select Actions > Configure Library GUI from the menu.
Offers the optional capability to configure the Capital Library user interface to your own
specification.
Objects

Table 6-40. Configure Library GUI Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Browser Tree The browser tree is split into different nodes for each application
for configuring:
• How the Component Maintenance Dialog Box and Part
Selection Dialog Box interfaces appear in Capital Library
• How the Part Selection Dialog Box interface appears in other
applications (such as Capital Logic, Capital Project, and so on)
Beneath each application node, there are component group nodes
for configuring how the dialog boxes appear for components
belonging to each component group.
Applicable Groups Select this node to display settings that enable you to specify
(Application Level) which component group types are available for selection in an
Displayed under an application.
application name node in See “Applicable Groups (Application Level)” on page 61 for
the browser tree. information about this concept.
Under the Library node, these settings apply to both the
Component Maintenance Dialog Box and Part Selection Dialog
Box in Capital Library.
Under the other application nodes, they apply to the Part Selection
Dialog Box in that particular application.
For example, wires, clips, grommets and connectors are used
within the Capital HarnessXC application but not in Capital Logic.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 359

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Table 6-40. Configure Library GUI Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Criteria Attributes Select this node to display settings that enable you to specify the
(Application Level) attributes that are available as search criteria when searching for a
Displayed under an component in the Part Selection Dialog Box or Component
application name node in Maintenance Dialog Box without a component group name
the browser tree. specified.
See “Criteria Attributes (Application Level)” on page 63 for an
explanation of this concept.
The Removed Search Criteria Attributes table displays the
attributes that are not available as search criteria.
To add another attribute to this table (and therefore make it not
available), click Add restriction ( ); an attribute is added.
Double-click that attribute and select the appropriate one from the
drop-down list.
To remove an attribute from the table (and therefore make it
available), select it and click Remove restriction(s) ( ).
To revert to the default selections, click Revert to initial criteria
( ).
Component Table Select this node to display settings that enable you to specify
(Application Level) which columns are visible (and their order) in the Internal Part No.
Displayed under an table of the Internal tab in the Component Selection Section of
application name node in the Component Maintenance Dialog Box (in Capital Library) and
the browser tree. Part Selection Dialog Box (in each application).
See “Component Table (Application Level)” on page 65 for more
information about this concept.

360 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Table 6-40. Configure Library GUI Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Tab Pages (under Library Select this node to specify the tabs and fields that are displayed in
Node at Application the Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance
Level) Dialog Box and Part Selection Dialog Box (in Capital Library)
Displayed under the when no component has been selected in the Component Selection
Library node in the Section.
browser tree. See “Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application Level)” on
page 67 for more information about this concept.
The currently visible tabs are displayed on the right of the dialog
box. To edit the tabs that appear, right-click on a tab; a list of
available tabs is displayed. Select the tabs that you want to appear
and deselect those that you want to hide.
To edit the fields on a tab, click on the tab name.
The top half of the tab displays the currently visible fields.
The bottom half of the tab displays the hidden fields.
To make a field visible, select it and select the option.
To hide a field, select it and deselect the Visible? option.
To change the position of a visible field, select it and click the
arrows (for example, , ) as required; the Row and Column
fields display the current row and column position of it.
Click Copy to copy the current tab/field configuration to a
similar node in another application. For example, you could copy
it from the Library > Tab Pages node to the Device > Tab Pages
node under the Integrator Design node. To paste it, right-click the
target node and click Paste.
Click Click to embed another tab into this tab to embed
another tab into this tab. A list of available tabs is displayed. You
cannot specify which fields are displayed on the embedded tab
here. You must specify those for the original tab before
embedding it.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 361

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Table 6-40. Configure Library GUI Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Criteria Attributes Select this node to display settings that enable you to specify the
(Component Group Level attributes that are available as search criteria when searching for a
Displayed under a component in the Part Selection Dialog Box or Component
Component Group node Maintenance Dialog Box with a component group name specified.
in the browser tree. See “Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level)” on page 69
for an explanation of this concept.
The Removed Search Criteria Attributes table displays the
attributes that are not available as search criteria.
To add another attribute to this table (and therefore make it not
available), click Add restriction ( ); an attribute is added.
Double-click that attribute and select the appropriate one from the
drop-down list.
To remove an attribute from the table (and therefore make it
available), select it and click Remove restriction(s) ( ).
To revert to the default selections, click Revert to initial criteria
( ).
Component Tables For components belonging to a particular component group, select
(Component Group this node to specify which columns are visible (and their order) in
Level) the Internal Part No. table of the Internal tab in the Component
Displayed under a Selection Section of the Component Maintenance Dialog Box (in
component group node in Capital Library) and Part Selection Dialog Box (in each
the browser tree. application).
For example, if you edit these settings for the component group
Device under the Logical Design node, the specified columns are
displayed when you search based on the group name Device from
within Capital Logic.
See “Component Tables (Component Group Level)” on page 71
for more information about editing these.

362 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Table 6-40. Configure Library GUI Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Tab Pages (Component For components belonging to a particular component group, select
Group Level) this node to specify the tabs and fields that are displayed in the
Displayed under a Component Details Section of the Component Maintenance
component group node in Dialog Box (in Capital Library) and Part Selection Dialog Box (in
the browser tree. each application).
For example, if you edit these settings for the component group
Device under the Logical Design node, the specified tabs and
fields are displayed when you select a device in the Internal Part
No. table of the Internal tab in Capital Logic.
See “Tab Pages (Component Group Level)” on page 73 for more
information about this concept.
The currently visible tabs are displayed on the right of the dialog
box. To edit the tabs that appear for the component group, right-
click on a tab; a list of available tabs is displayed. Select the tabs
that you want to appear and deselect those that you want to hide.
To edit the fields on a tab, click on the tab name.
The top half of the tab displays the currently visible fields.
The bottom half of the tab displays the hidden fields.
To make a field visible, select it and select the option.
To hide a field, select it and deselect the Visible? option.
To change the position of a visible field, select it and click the
arrows (for example, , ) as required; the Row and Column
fields display the current row and column position of it.
Click Copy to copy the current tab/field configuration to a
similar node in another application. For example, you could copy
it from the Device > Tab Pages node listed under Logical Design
to the Device > Tab Pages node under the Integrator Design node.
To paste it, right-click the target node and click Paste.
Click Click to embed another tab into this tab to embed
another tab into this tab. A list of available tabs is displayed. You
cannot specify which fields are displayed on the embedded tab
here. You must specify those for the original tab before
embedding it.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 363

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

Table 6-40. Configure Library GUI Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Type Codes (Component Component type codes provide a method of categorizing
Group Level) components beyond that offered by the system-defined component
Displayed under a groups. You create them manually.
component group node in See “Component Type Codes” on page 239 for more information
the browser tree. about this concept.
They are not listed in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box
automatically but this node enables you to add them to the browser
tree.
When a type code is added to the browser tree, you can configure
Component Tables (Component Group Level) and Tab Pages
(Component Group Level) for it (just as you can for a component
group). See “Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree
in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box” on page 76.

Related Topics
Editing the Applicable Groups for an Application
Editing the Criteria Attributes for an Application
Editing the Component Table Columns for an Application
Editing the Tabs and Fields Displayed in the Component Details Section in Capital Library
Editing the Criteria Attributes for a Component Group
Editing the Component Table Columns for a Component Group
Editing the Tabs and Fields for Components Belonging to a Component Group
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box

364 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Copy Component Details Dialog Box

Copy Component Details Dialog Box

To access: Select Components > Update Components > Copy Component Details from the
Components Main Menu.
Used to copy attributes from one source component to other target components. Target
components can be an existing component or a new component.
Objects

Table 6-41. Copy Component Details Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Copy From Displays details for the component from which you are copying
attributes.
Part Number The internal part number for the source component from which you are
copying attributes. Click Select to the right of the field to access the
Part Selection Dialog Box where you select the component. When you
select a component, the Copy From section displays the attributes that
can be copied. Mandatory.
Status The status of the component. Indicates whether the component can be
selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or whether it
can be deleted from the database (Obsolete). Read-only.
Group Name The component group to which the component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the component
groups. Read-only.
Copy To Table Displays details for the components to which you are copying
attributes. To add a new component that you want to create, click New
to display the Copy Component Details Dialog Box where you specify
the internal part number and component group. To add existing
components, click Add to display the Part Selection Dialog Box where
you select existing components. To remove a component, select it and
click Remove. To remove all components in the table, click Remove
All. Mandatory.
Copy Selected Lists the type of attributes that can be copied from the source
Object component in a tree. This is empty until you select a part number in the
Copy From section. Select the attributes that you want copied to the
target components. Deselect those that you do not want copied.
Mandatory.
Apply Copies the specified attributes from the source component to the target
components.

Related Topics
Copying Details from a Component to a New Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 365

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Copy Component Details Dialog Box

Copying Details from a Component to Other Existing Components

366 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Create New Part Dialog Box

Create New Part Dialog Box

To access: Click New on the Copy Component Details Dialog Box.
Used to specify an internal part number and group name for a new component that you want to
create by copying attributes from an existing component.
Objects

Table 6-42. Create New Part Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Part Number Specifies the internal part number for the new part. Mandatory.
Group Name The component group to which the new component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the component
groups. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Copying Details from a Component to a New Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 367

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Export Library Dialog Box

Export Library Dialog Box

To access: Select File > Export from the menu.
Used to export component parts in XML, or custom specified, format so that they can be
imported into another installation of this application suite.
Note
Library export is unaffected by any customized configuration settings. Even if some fields
are not displayed on a dialog box, the corresponding attributes are included when the library
is exported.

Objects

Table 6-43. Export Library Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Export File Specifies the location, name and file type of the exported XML, or
custom specified, file. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to display the Library Export File Name dialog box in which
you navigate to the location where you want to save the XML file
and specify a file name. Mandatory.
Log File Specifies the location and name of the log file for the export. Click
the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to display the Library
Export Error Log File Name dialog box in which you navigate to the
location where you want to save the log file and specify a file name.
Mandatory.
Export entire library Specifies whether you want to export the entire library (selected) or
not (unselected). When selected, the other fields related to selecting
specific parts are disabled. Optional, disabled if Export codes only is
selected.
Include scoping? Specifies whether the Scope Tab settings for components and the
Scoped values for sub-components in housing are exported (selected)
or not (unselected). Optional, disabled if Export codes only is
selected.
Export codes only Specifies whether only codes (and no component parts) are exported
(selected) or whether component parts are exported alongside codes
(unselected). Optional, disabled if Export entire library is selected.
Export All Revisions With this option not selected (the default setting) only the latest
revision of any selected parts are included in the export. With this
option selected, all revisions of a part are exported. Optional,
disabled if Export entire library or Export codes only is selected.

368 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Export Library Dialog Box

Table 6-43. Export Library Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Include Modification Specifies whether Modification History notes from the History tab
History? are exported with the component library parts (selected) or whether
the modification history notes are not exported (unselected).
Selected Component Lists the parts selected for export. To select parts, click the Add
Parts Table button to the right of the table to display the Part Selection Dialog
Box where you select them. To remove a part, select it in the table
and click Remove. To remove all selected parts, click Remove All.
Export Exports the data to the XML file and displays a progress bar to
indicate whether the export has finished.

Related Topics
Exporting the Entire Library
Exporting Selected Component Parts
Exporting all Codes from the Library

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 369

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box

Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box

To access: Select File > Export GUI Configuration from the menu.
Used to navigate to and select a GUI Configuration Library XML file to be exported into
selected applications.
Objects

Table 6-44. Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Look in Defaults to your library folder. Mandatory.
Window listing files Displays the library configuration files in your library folder. Select
the library configuration file to be exported to an application.
Mandatory.
Select Application Select the application(s) for which you wish to export a GUI
configuration. Alternatively tick the Select All option to import the
GUI configuration to all Capital applications.
File name Displays the name of the library configuration file.
Files of type Specify which types of file you want to display in the Window listing
files. Mandatory.
Export Configuration Click this to begin exporting the customized Library GUI interface.

Related Topics
Exporting the User Interface Configuration
Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box

370 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box

Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box

To access: Select File > Enterprise Assets Configuration from the menu.
Use this dialog box to schedule the sending and receiving of component library data, symbol
library data or design data changes between different Capital installations.
Objects

Table 6-45. Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Scheduled Tasks Lists the currently scheduled tasks for sending and receiving
library changes between different Capital installations.
To add an task, expand the drop-down list on the Create
Import Task button or Create Export Task button and select
the appropriate task:

• Import Library
• Import Symbol
• Import Design

Export Library
Export Symbol
Export Design
Select a task and click the Delete Task ( ) button to delete
it.
Name Specify the name of the scheduled import or export task. For
example, OEM1 to OEM2 export.
User Enter a user name that can be used to connect with Capital
Integration Server.
Password Enter the password for the specified user name.
Scheduling Expression Enter a cron expression to specify when you want the task to
run. For example: 0/5***? means fire every 5 minutes every
day. CronMaker is a free on-line utility that can be used to
build cron expressions (see http://www.cronmaker.com/).
Configuration Displays the task configuration details taken from the
configuration file that was selected by clicking the Import
Configuration button.
Run Now Immediately runs the task selected in the Scheduled Tasks
table.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 371

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box

Table 6-45. Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Import Configuration Displays a Enterprise Assets Configuration File Name
dialog box where you navigate to the configuration file that
you want to use. After you have selected the file, the
configuration details are displayed in the Configuration
window.

Related Topics
Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation

372 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box

Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box

To access: From the Housing Tab, click the ellipsis (...) to the right of the Scoped field.
Optional.
This tab is used to apply scope codes to a sub-component.
Objects

Table 6-46. Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Available Displays a list of available scope codes. You can select scopes in this
list.
Add Moves the selected scopes in the Available window to the Selected
window.
Add All Moves all scopes in the Available window to the Selected window.
Remove Moves the selected scopes in the Selected window to the Available
window.
Remove All Moves all scopes in the Selected window to the Available window.
Selected Displays the names of the scopes applied to the component.
If a tick ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this indicates that
this sub-component can be used when this scope is applied to a
design. In this case, this sub-component cannot be used when any
scopes of the same category listed in the Available window are
applied to a design.
If a no entry icon ( ) is displayed next to a scope category, this
indicates that this sub-component cannot be used when this scope is
applied to a design. In this case, this sub-component can be used
when any scopes of the same category listed in the Available window
are applied to a design.

Related Topics
Housing
Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 373

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Import Library Dialog Box

Import Library Dialog Box

To access: Select File > Import from the menu.
Used to import component and code data either from an XML, or custom specified, file
(exported from another Capital Library session or another component management system) or
from a Capital Harness Classic comma-separated variable text file (*.txt).
Note
Library import and export is unaffected by any customized configuration settings. Even if
some field have been set not to display on a page the corresponding attributes will not be
ignored while importing or exporting a library.

All revisions belonging to a part are also imported, and the revision history is maintained

Objects

Table 6-47. Import Library Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Library file Specifies the location, name and file type of the file containing the
data to be imported. Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field to display the Component Import File Name dialog box
where you navigate to the location of the file and select it.
Mandatory.
Parts Specifies how the system resolves conflicts between internal part
numbers in the imported data and in the existing library.
Mandatory.
• Replace
Specifies that the data for an existing component in the library
is truncated and overwritten with the data from the component
with the same internal part number in the import file. Ultrasonic
welds are always imported in this mode regardless of whether
this option is selected.
• Merge
Specifies that the component data for an internal part number in
the import file is merged with the component data for an
existing component with that part number in the library. For
further information and usage examples for Library Data
Merging see Usage Examples for Library Data Merging.
• Ignore
Components from the import file with internal part numbers
matching components already in the library are not imported.
Other components in the import file are still imported.

374 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Import Library Dialog Box

Table 6-47. Import Library Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Modify existing code Specifies how the system resolves conflicts between code
descriptions descriptions in the imported data and the existing library data.
Optional.
The import behavior is as follows:
• If selected, this option specifies that the existing description in
the library will be modified and the code with the same
description in the import data is added to the library.
For example, the import file contains the color code RD with a
description Red and the database contains a color code R with a
description Red. With this option selected, the description for
the color code R is modified to R_Red and the color code RD
is imported with the description Red.
• If unselected, this option specifies that all existing codes in the
library retain their descriptions and an import file containing
conflicting codes and descriptions will be rejected.
Import scoping Specifies whether the Scope Tab settings for components and the
Scoped values for sub-components in housing are imported
(selected) or not (unselected).
Import modification Specifies whether Modification History notes from the History
history tab are imported with the component library parts (selected) or
whether the modification history notes are not imported
(unselected).
Log file Specifies the location and name of the log file for the import. Click
the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field to display the
Component Import Error Log File Name dialog box in which
you navigate to the location where you want to save the log file and
specify a file name. Mandatory.
Import Imports the data to the XML file and displays a progress bar to
indicate whether the import has finished.

Related Topics
Importing Component Parts and Codes into the Library
Importing Codes into the Library
Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 375

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box

Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box

To access: Select File > Import GUI Configuration.
Used to navigate to and select a GUI Configuration Library XML file to be imported into
selected applications.
Objects

Table 6-48. Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Look in Defaults to your library folder. Mandatory.
Window listing files Displays the library configuration files in your library folder. Select
the library configuration file to be imported into an application.
Mandatory.
File name Displays the name of the library configuration file.
Files of type Specify what types of file you want to display in the Window listing
files. Mandatory.
Import Configuration Click this to begin importing the customized Library GUI interface.
The GUI configuration will overwrite any existing configuration
using the Replace mode.

Related Topics
Importing the User Interface Configuration
Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box

376 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Library Usages Dialog Box

Library Usages Dialog Box

To access: Click Library Usages / Project Usages on the Component Maintenance Dialog Box
with a component selected in the Internal Part No. table, Customer Part No. table or
Supplier Part No. table.
Used to view where a component has been used with other components in the library.

Description
This dialog box contains a table with columns that can be filtered by selecting an item from the
drop-down list below the column header.

Objects

Table 6-49. Library Usages Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
PartNumber The component part with which the selected component has been
used.
Group Name The component group to which the component belongs. See
“Component Groups” on page 83 for descriptions of the component
groups.
Type Code The type code for the component. See “Component Type Codes” on
page 239.
Part Status The status of the component. Indicates whether the component can
be selected for use in other applications (New or Current) or
whether it can be deleted from the database (Obsolete).
Usage Name The name used for the selected part where it is used with the other
component.
Usage Type Where or how the selected part has been used with the other
component (for example, in its housing definition).

Related Topics
Finding Where a Component Is Used

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 377

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Part Selection Dialog Box

Part Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) to the right of any field where you enter a component part
number.
Used to select component part numbers that you want to enter in a field on another dialog box.
Description
Enter search criteria on the tabs as required to find part numbers and click Search. Select the
required part number in the table at the top of the dialog box and click Insert to use that part
number.

Objects
• The following are available:
o Internal tab
o Customer tab
o Supplier tab
See the appropriate table rows under “Component Selection Section” on page 284 for
descriptions of the individual sections on the dialog box.
Also see “Component Details Section” on page 288.
Related Topics
Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog Box

378 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Plugins Dialog

Plugins Dialog
To access: Select File > Plugins.
Used to view the details of any extensibility plugins that you have installed, to reload
extensibility plugins and to select an extensibility plugin when specifying one in a field.
Objects

Table 6-50. Plugins Dialog Contents

Field Description
Available Plugins Lists the details for the extensibility plugins that you have
installed.
Name The name of the plugin. Read-only.
Version The version of the plugin. Read-only.
Type The type of plugin (for example, Constraint or DRC). Read-only.
Language The language of the plugin, either Java or Script. Read-only.
Path The absolute path of the parent folder for the script plug-in or the
absolute path of the JAR file for a Java plugin). Read-only.
File The file name for a script or the class name for Java plugin. Read-
only.
Details Click this to view the details along with a description and the
implemented plugin interfaces for the currently selected plugin in
the Plugin Details Dialog Box. Optional.
Reload All Click this to reload the installed extensibility plugins if you have
changed a plugin and do not want to restart the application in
which you are working. Optional.
OK Click this to exit the dialog box after selecting an extensibility
plugin. Optional.

Related Topics
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins
Reloading Extensibility Plugins

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 379

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Plugin Details Dialog Box

Plugin Details Dialog Box

To access: Select a plugin and click Details on the Plugins Dialog.
Used to view the details of any extensibility plugins that you have installed and to reload
extensibility plugins.
Objects

Table 6-51. Plugin Details Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Name The name of the plugin. Read-only.
Version The version of the plugin. Read-only.
Type The type of plugin (for example, Constraint or DRC). Read-only.
Language The language of the plugin, either Java or Script. Read-only.
Path The absolute path of the parent folder for the script plug-in or the
absolute path of the JAR file for a Java plugin). Read-only.
File The file name for a script or the class name for Java plugin. Read-
only.
Url The URL value for the script plugin or the Java plugin. Read-only.
Description A description of the plugin. Read-only.
Classpath The absolute paths to the Java plugin classes. Read-only.
Implemented plugin A list of the plugin interfaces. Read-only.
interfaces

Related Topics
Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins
Reloading Extensibility Plugins

380 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Project Usages Dialog Box

Project Usages Dialog Box

To access: There are two ways to access this dialog box.
• Click Library Usages / Project Usages on the Component Maintenance Dialog Box with
a component selected in the Internal Part No. table, Customer Part No. table or Supplier
Part No. table

• Click Show Usage on the Component Deletion Dialog Box

Used to view where a component has been used in projects.
Description
This dialog box contains a table with columns that can be filtered by selecting an item from the
drop-down list below the column header.

Objects

Table 6-52. Project Usages Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Project The project in which the component is used.
Design The design in which the component is used.
Design Type The type of design in which the component is used.
Release Level The release level of the design in which the component is used.
Object Name The name of the object instance where the component is used.
Object Type The type of object where the component is used.

Related Topics
Finding Where a Component Is Used

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 381

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box

Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box

To access: Click Add Wire Range on the Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab.
Used to add multiple wire sizes for multiple cavities to the Cavity Table on the Single Wire Fits
Cavity tab.
Objects

Table 6-53. Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Cavity Name Specifies the cavities for which you are adding multiple wire sizes.
Click the ellipsis (...) button to the left of the field to display the
Cavity Selection Dialog Box where you can select multiple cavities
that fit the same wire sizes. Mandatory.
Material Code Specifies the material code for the wires. Click the ellipsis (...) button
to the right of the field to access the Material Codes Selection Dialog
Box. This code must have been created previously. See “Creating a
Material Code” on page 237. Optional.
Range Specification Select whether you want to use outside diameters or cross-sectional
areas to specify the range of wire sizes. Mandatory.
From / To Specifies the minimum (From) and maximum (To) wire outside
diameters permitted in the cavities. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component
Single Wire Fits Cavity Tab

382 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Validation Report

Validation Report
To access: Displayed if there are validation errors when you click Apply.
Used to view details of validation errors.
Objects

Table 6-54. Validation Report Contents

Field Description
Source Specifies the object for which there is an error.
Error Message Specifies details of the error.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 383

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
View Pin Mapping details Dialog Box

View Pin Mapping details Dialog Box

To access: On the Footprints Tab of the Component Maintenance Dialog Box, select a footprint
and click the View All Pin Mapping ( ) button.
Use this dialog box to view all of the pin mappings for the selected footprint.
Objects

Table 6-55. View Pin Mapping details Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Pin Name The name of the device pin.
Connector Name The name of the connector to which the pin is mapped. This
name is the one given to the connector in the context of this
footprint.
Cavity Name The name of the connector cavity to which the device pin is
mapped.
Connector Part The internal part number of the connector.

Related Topics
Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device
Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device
Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint
Deleting a Footprint from a Device

384 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Help Button Landing Pages for Component Dialog Boxes

Help Button Landing Pages for Component

Dialog Boxes
The following topics are displayed when you click the Help button or press F1 for a dialog box
in the software.
Component Deletion Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Component Maintenance Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Configure Library GUI Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Copy Component Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Create New Part Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Export Library Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Export GUI Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Enterprise Assets Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Housing Scope Selection Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Import Library Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Import GUI Configuration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Library Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Part Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Plugins Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Plugin Details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Project Usages Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Select Wire Spec by Range Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
View Pin Mapping details Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Component Deletion Help

What do you need help with?
• The Component Deletion Dialog Box fields
• Deleting Components

Component Maintenance Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Component Groups
• The Component Maintenance Dialog Box fields

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 385

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Configure Library GUI Help

• Creating and maintaining particular types of Components

• Searching for Components
• Copying Components
• Deleting Components
• Importing and Exporting Components
• Finding Where a Component Is Used

Configure Library GUI Help

What do you need help with?
• The Configurable User Interface concept
• The Configure Library GUI Dialog Box fields
• Editing Applicable Groups (Application Level)
• Editing Criteria Attributes (Application Level)
• Editing Component Table (Application Level)
• Editing Tab Pages (under Library Node at Application Level)
• Editing Criteria Attributes (Component Group Level)
• Editing Component Tables (Component Group Level)
• Editing Tab Pages (Component Group Level)
• Editing Type Codes (Component Group Level)

Copy Component Details Help

What do you need help with?
• The Copy Component Details Dialog Box fields
• Copying Details from a Component to a New Component
• Copying Details from a Component to Other Existing Components

Create New Part Help

What do you need help with?
• The Create New Part Dialog Box fields

386 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Export Library Help

• Copying Details from a Component to a New Component

Export Library Help

What do you need help with?
• The Export Library Dialog Box fields
• Exporting the Entire Library
• Exporting Selected Component Parts
• Exporting all Codes from the Library

Export GUI Configuration Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Configurable User Interface concepts
• The Export GUI Configuration Dialog Box fields
• Exporting the User Interface Configuration
• Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box

Enterprise Assets Configuration Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Enterprise Assets concepts
• The Enterprise Assets Configuration Dialog Box fields
• Creating an Enterprise Assets Import or Export Task in a Capital Installation

Housing Scope Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Scope Code
• Understanding Housing concepts
• The Housing Scope Selection Dialog Box fields
• Specifying the Scope of a Sub-Component in Housing for a Component

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 387

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Import Library Help

Import Library Help

What do you need help with?
• The Import Library Dialog Box fields
• Importing Component Parts and Codes into the Library
• Importing Codes into the Library
• Usage Examples for Library Data Merging

Import GUI Configuration Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Configurable User Interface concepts
• The Import GUI Configuration Dialog Box fields
• Importing the User Interface Configuration

Library Usages Help

What do you need help with?
• The Library Usages Dialog Box fields
• Finding Where a Component Is Used

Part Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Search Criteria
• The Part Selection Dialog Box fields
• Selecting a Component Part Number in the Part Selection Dialog Box

Plugins Help
What do you need help with?
• Understanding Extensibility Plugins
• The Plugins Dialog fields
• Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins

388 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
Plugin Details Help

• Reloading Extensibility Plugins

Plugin Details Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Extensibility Plugins
• The Plugins Dialog fields
• Viewing the Details of Installed Extensibility Plugins
• Reloading Extensibility Plugins

Project Usages Help

What do you need help with?
• The Project Usages Dialog Box fields
• Finding Where a Component Is Used

Select Wire Spec by Range Help

What do you need help with?
• The Select Wire Spec by Range Dialog Box fields
• Specifying a Range of Single Wire Sizes that Fit Cavities on a Component

View Pin Mapping details Help

What do you need help with?
• Understanding Footprint
• The View Pin Mapping details Help fields
• Adding a Harness Connector Footprint to a Device
• Adding a Device Connector Footprint to a Device
• Copying a Footprint to Use as a Template for a New Footprint
• Deleting a Footprint from a Device

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 389

February 2016
Component Dialog Box and Field Reference
View Pin Mapping details Help

390 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 7
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field
Reference

The following sections offer a description of the input dialog boxes available within Capital
Library for the creation and maintenance of, and reporting on, library codes and companies. For
each dialog box, all fields are listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Code Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Choose Color Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Color Codes Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Component Type Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box (Configurable Library GUI) . . . . . . . . . . 399
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Material Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Pitch Definitions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Pitch Tables Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Property Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Scope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Usage Report Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Wire Group Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Wire Sizes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Code Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Color Code Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Material Codes Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Property Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Company Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Customers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Suppliers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Help Button Landing Pages for Codes and Companies Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Color Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Component Type Codes Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Component Type Codes Selection Help (Configurable Library GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Customer Color Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Manufacturing Sites Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Material Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 391

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference

Pitch Definitions Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Pitch Tables Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Property Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Properties for Type Code Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Scope Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Usage Report Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Wire Group Definition Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Wire Insulation Thickness Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Wire Sizes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Color Code Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Component Type Codes Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Material Codes Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Property Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Wire Specification Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Customers Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Suppliers Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

392 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Code Dialog Boxes

Code Dialog Boxes

This section offers a description of all input dialog boxes used in the creation and maintenance
of library codes. For each dialog box, all fields are listed, along with a full description of the
field’s function.
Choose Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Color Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Component Type Codes Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box (Configurable Library GUI). . . . . . . . . 399
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Material Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Pitch Definitions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Pitch Tables Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Property Codes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Scope Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Usage Report Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Wire Group Definition Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Wire Sizes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 393

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Choose Color Dialog Box

Choose Color Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) next to a Color Definition field.
Used to define a color.
Objects
Use one of the tabs to define the required color and click OK.

394 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Color Codes Dialog Box

Color Codes Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Color Codes from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create, edit and delete color codes.
Objects

Table 7-1. Color Codes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Color Codes Table Lists the color codes that exist within the library. Click on a row in
the table to select that color code; the Color Code and Description
fields, below, are updated to display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Color Codes table, which can than be
populated by specifying a Color Code and Description to create a
new color code.
Reset Returns the Color Code and Description fields to their previous state.
This means that:
• If you are creating a new color code, both fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing color code, the Description field is
returned to its previous value.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Color Codes table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Color Code The name of the color code. This field is limited to 4 characters, so
you should use an abbreviated name or code as the names of most
colors exceed the field length. A fuller description of the color can be
entered in the Description field, below. Mandatory.
Description The color(s) the code represents. This field supports up to 30
characters, so descriptions such as Light-green can be entered.
Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 395

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Color Codes Dialog Box

Table 7-1. Color Codes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Color Definition Defines the precise color using either swatches, HSB or RGB values.
Click the ellipsis (...) next to this field to display the Choose Color
Dialog Box where you define the color.

Related Topics
Creating a Color Code
Editing a Color Code
Deleting a Color Code

396 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Type Codes Dialog Box

Component Type Codes Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Component Type Codes from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create, edit and delete component type codes.
Objects

Table 7-2. Component Type Codes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns.
To remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove
restriction(s) ( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial
criteria ( ). These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Component Type Codes Lists the component type codes that exist within the library. Click
Table on a row in the table to select that component type code; the Type
Code, Description and Group Code fields, below, are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Component Type Codes table, which can
than be populated by specifying a Type Code, Description and
Group Code to create a new component type code.
Reset Returns the Type Code, Description and Group Code fields to
their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new component type code, all fields are
cleared.
• If you are editing an existing component type code, the
Description and Group Code fields are returned to their
previous value.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Component Type Codes table.
This change is not written to the database until you click Apply;
before this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore
(the Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Type Code The name of the component type code. This field is limited to 4
characters. Mandatory.
Description The type of component the code represents. This field supports up
to 30 characters. Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 397

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Type Codes Dialog Box

Table 7-2. Component Type Codes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Group Code Specifies a component group code with which to associate the
component type code. The type code you are creating will only be
available for selection against components belonging to this
group. Optional.

Related Topics
Creating a Component Type Code
Editing a Component Type Code
Deleting a Component Type Code

398 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box (Configurable Library GUI)

Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box

(Configurable Library GUI)
To access: In the browser tree on the left of the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box, expand the
appropriate application node and component group node. Right-click the Type Codes node
and select Add type code.
Used to add a component type code to the browser tree so that you can configure component
tables (component group level) and tab pages (component group level) for that component type
code (just as you can for a component group).
Note
The component group node must be the component group that is associated with the
component type code that you want to add.

Objects

Table 7-3. Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Customer Color Codes Lists the customer component type codes that are associated with
Table the component group. Select the component type that you want to
add to the browser tree of the Configure Library UI dialog box and
click OK.

Related Topics
Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI Dialog Box
Component Tables (Component Group Level)
Tab Pages (Component Group Level)

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 399

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box

Customer Color Codes Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Customer Color Codes from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create, edit and delete customer color codes, linking customer color identifiers with the
internal color codes already in the library.
Note
The selection of an Internal Color Code is a mandatory step of creating a customer color
code, hence the internal code must have been created, before you can select it. See “Creating
a Color Code” on page 235 for more information.

Objects

Table 7-4. Customer Color Codes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Customer Color Codes Lists the customer color codes that exist within the library. Click on
Table a row in the table to select that customer color code; the Customer
Name, Customer Color Code, Description and Internal Color Code
fields are updated to display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Customer Color Codes Table, which can then
be populated by specifying a Customer Name, Customer Color
Code, Description and Internal Color Code to create a new customer
color code.
Reset Returns the Customer Name, Customer Color Code, Description and
Internal Color Code fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new customer color code, all fields are
cleared or returned to their default value.
• If you are editing an existing customer color code, the Customer
Name, Customer Color Code and Internal Color Code fields are
returned to its previous values.

400 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customer Color Codes Dialog Box

Table 7-4. Customer Color Codes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Delete Removes a selected row from the Customer Color Codes Table.
This change is not written to the database until you click Apply;
before this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore
(the Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Customer Name The customer to whom the color code applies. Select the customer
from the drop-down list (customers are created and maintained
using the Customers Dialog Box). Mandatory.
Customer Color Code The name of the color code. This field is limited to 4 characters, so
you should use an abbreviated name or code as the names of most
colors exceed the field length. A fuller description of the color can
be entered in the Description field, below. Mandatory.
Description The color(s) the code represents. This field supports up to 30
characters, so descriptions such as Light-green can be entered.
Mandatory.
Internal Color Code The color code with which the customer color code is associated.
Either type the code into the field, or click the ellipsis (...) button to
the right of the field and select a code from the Color Code Selection
Dialog Box. In either case, the color code must already have been
created in the library; see “Creating a Color Code” on page 235 for
more information. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Customer Color Code
Editing a Customer Color Code
Deleting a Customer Color Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 401

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box

Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Manufacturing Sites from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create, edit and delete manufacturing site records.
Objects

Table 7-5. Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Manufacturing Sites Lists the manufacturing sites that exist within the library. Click on a
Table row in the table to select that site; the fields below are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Manufacturing Sites Table, which can then be
populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new
manufacturing site.
Copy Creates a new row in the Manufacturing Sites Table, pre-populated
with all of the field values belonging to the site selected in the table
when the button was clicked.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new manufacturing site, all fields are
cleared.
• If you are editing an existing manufacturing site, the fields are
returned to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Manufacturing Sites Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Name Enter a name to identify the manufacturing site. This name must be
unique within the library; if the name matches that of an existing
manufacturing site, upon clicking Apply, a message will be
displayed to inform you, and you will not be permitted to proceed
with the update until you have edited the name. Mandatory.

402 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box

Table 7-5. Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Address [1-4] Enter the manufacturing site’s postal address across one or more of
these free-text fields. Optional.
Post Code Enter the site’s postal (zip) code. Optional.
Country Enter the name of the country in which the site is located. Optional.
Internal Ref If you have an internal name or code for this manufacturing site,
enter it here. Optional.
Contact Enter the name of the primary contact person at the site. Optional.
Telephone Number Enter the contact telephone number for the site. Optional.
Fax Number If the site can be contacted via fax, enter the fax machine number
here. Optional.

Related Topics
Creating a Manufacturing Site
Editing a Manufacturing Site
Deleting a Manufacturing Site

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 403

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Material Codes Dialog Box

Material Codes Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Material Codes from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create, edit and delete material codes.
Objects

Table 7-6. Material Codes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Material Codes Table Lists the material codes that exist within the library. Click on a row
in the table to select that material code; the Material Code and
Description fields, below, are updated to display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Material Codes Table, which can than be
populated by specifying a Material Code and Description to create a
new material code.
Reset Returns the Material Code and Description fields to their previous
state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new material code, both fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing material code, the Description field
is returned to its previous value.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Material Codes Table. This change
is not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Material Code The name of the material code. This field is limited to 4 characters.
Mandatory.
Description The material(s) the code represents. This field supports up to 30
characters. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Material Code

404 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Material Codes Dialog Box

Editing a Material Code

Deleting a Material Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 405

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pitch Definitions Dialog Box

Pitch Definitions Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Pitch Definitions from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create a numeric code that can later be used to associate a wire specification with a
length ratio (using the Pitch Tables dialog box) when calculating the true length of a twisted pair
multicore.
Objects

Table 7-7. Pitch Definitions Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Pitch Definitions Table Lists the pitch definitions that exist within the library. Click on a
row in the table to select that definition; the Pitch Definition field,
below, is updated to display the existing value.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Pitch Definitions Table, which can than be
populated by specifying a Pitch Definition to create a new pitch
definition record.
Reset Returns the Pitch Definition field to its previous state. This means
that:
• If you are creating a new pitch definition, the field is cleared.
• If you are editing an existing pitch definition, the field is
returned to its previous value.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Pitch Definitions Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Pitch Definition Enter a value for the pitch definition, from 1-6 numeric characters
in length. This value can represent the pitch, or “tightness” of the
twist applied to two wires, or it can be an arbitrary value used to
identify an association between a wire specification and a twisted
pair length calculation. Mandatory.

406 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pitch Definitions Dialog Box

Related Topics
Creating a Pitch Definition
Editing a Pitch Definition
Deleting a Pitch Definition
Pitch Tables Dialog Box

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 407

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pitch Tables Dialog Box

Pitch Tables Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Pitch Tables from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create associations between wire specifications and length ratios - linked by a pitch
definition - that allow the calculation of the true length of twisted pair multicores.
Note
Before you can create a pitch table, the pitch definitions you want to use must already exist
in the library. See “Creating a Pitch Definition” on page 263 for more information.

Objects

Table 7-8. Pitch Tables Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Pitch Tables Lists the pitch tables that exist within the library. Click on a row in
the table to select that pitch table; the fields below are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Pitch Tables table, which can than be
populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new pitch
table.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new pitch table, all fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing pitch table, the fields are returned
to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Pitch Tables table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Pitch Definition Select a definition from the drop-down list. This value - created
using the Pitch Definitions Dialog Box - defines the amount of twist
applied to wires in a twisted pair multicore. Mandatory.

408 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Pitch Tables Dialog Box

Table 7-8. Pitch Tables Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Wire CSA Specifies the cross-sectional area of the wire to which the pitch table
applies. Either type a value directly into the field, or click the ellipsis
(...) button to the right of the field and select a wire csa from the
Wire Specification Selection dialog box. Upon selection, the first
wire size (as defined in the Wire Sizes Dialog Box) matching that
value is found, and the Material Code and Wire Spec. fields are
updated accordingly. These can be overridden if required.
Mandatory.
Twisted Length This value, along with the Actual Length, defines the ratio used to
calculate the true length of the wire specification twisted together at
this pitch. This field specifies the length of the wire when twisted
together into a multicore. Mandatory.
Actual Length This value, along with the Twisted Length, defines the ratio used to
calculate the true length of the wire specification twisted together at
this pitch. This field specifies the length of the wire before it is
twisted together into a multicore. Mandatory.
Material Code Specifies the material from which the wire, to which the pitch table
applies, is made. Either type a value directly into the field, or click
the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field and select a material
from the Material Codes Selection Dialog Box. If you selected a
Wire CSA, above, this field is completed using the material defined
for the selected wire, but this can be overridden. Mandatory.
Wire Spec. The specification of the wire to which the pitch table applies. Either
type a value directly into the field, or click the ellipsis (...) button to
the right of the field and select a specification from the Wire
Specification Selection Dialog Box. It is not possible to select a
specification unless a Material Code has been entered, above, as
specifications are dependent upon material codes, as defined in the
Wire Sizes Dialog Box. If you selected a Wire CSA, above, this
field is completed using the specification defined for the selected
wire, but this can be overridden. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Pitch Table
Editing a Pitch Table
Deleting a Pitch Table

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 409

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Property Codes Dialog Box

Property Codes Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Property Codes from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create properties that can be applied to components. These properties are then exposed
when the component is added to a logical, topological or harness design.
Objects

Table 7-9. Property Codes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Properties Table Lists the properties that exist within the library. Click on a row in
the table to select that property; the fields below are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Properties Table, which can than be
populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new property.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new property, all fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing property, the fields are returned to
their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Properties Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Property A unique identifier for the property. Mandatory.
Pin Property Selecting this option restricts the property for use against device
pins only. Pin properties are only exposed on the Pin Attributes Tab
of the Component Maintenance Dialog Box when editing devices.
Optional.
Description A longer description of the property’s purpose. Mandatory.

410 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Property Codes Dialog Box

Table 7-9. Property Codes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Data Type The type of values that can be entered for the property when it is
applied to a component (on the Properties Tab of the Component
Maintenance Dialog Box). Select one of the following data types
from the drop-down list:
• String
A mix of letters, number or special characters.
• Integer
A whole number.
Float
A number including a decimal (floating) point.

Related Topics
Creating a Property Code
Editing a Property Code
Deleting a Property Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 411

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box

Properties for Type Code Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Properties for Type Code from the Components Main Menu.
Used to associate property codes with component types, ensuring that property lists in other
dialog boxes only offer properties appropriate to the type of component being edited.
Objects

Table 7-10. Properties for Type Code Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Part Type Properties Lists the properties for type codes that exist within the library.
Table Click on a row in the table to select that code; the fields below are
updated to display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Part Type Properties Table, which can than
be populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new code.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new properties for type code, all fields are
cleared.
• If you are editing an existing code, the fields are returned to
their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Part Type Properties Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Type Code Specify a component type, either by entering an existing type
directly into the field, or by clicking the ellipsis (...) button to the
right of the field and selecting one from the Component Type
Codes Selection Dialog Box. Mandatory.

412 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Properties for Type Code Dialog Box

Table 7-10. Properties for Type Code Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Property Specify a property to associate with the component type, either by
entering an existing property directly into the field, or by clicking
the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the field and selecting one
from the Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box.
Mandatory.
Description Displays the description text for the selected property. Read-only.

Related Topics
Creating a Properties for Type Code
Editing a Properties for Type Code
Deleting a Properties for Type Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 413

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Scope Dialog Box

Scope Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Scopes from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create and edit scopes in the library.
Objects

Table 7-11. Scope Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Scopes Table Lists the scope codes that exist within the library. Click on a row in
the table to select that code; the fields below are updated to display
the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Scopes Table, which can than be populated
by completing the fields, below, to create a new code.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new scope code, all fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing code, the fields are returned to their
previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Scopes Table. This change is not
written to the database until you click Apply; before this point, the
deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button is
relabeled as Restore).
Category Specify the category of the scope, this can be something like
Customer, Market, Manufacturing Site, and so on. Mandatory.
Name Specify a name for the scope. This could be something like a
customer name, a market area or a manufacturing site name.
Mandatory.
Description Enter a description text for the scope. Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Scope Code

414 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Scope Dialog Box

Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping

Editing a Scope Code Description
Deleting a Scope Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 415

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Usage Report Dialog Box

Usage Report Dialog Box

To access: Click the View Code Usages ( ) button on a Codes dialog box.
Used to find which components or projects are using a code or company code in the library.
Objects

Table 7-12. Usage Report Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Used In The part number of a component or name of a project using the
code.
Type The type code for the component using the code or Project Usage
(when used in a project). See “Component Type Codes” on
page 239.

Related Topics
Finding Which Components Use a Code
Finding Which Components Use a Company Code

416 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Group Definition Dialog Box

Wire Group Definition Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Wire Group Definition from the Components Main Menu.
Used to specify a selection of wires of similar size.
Objects

Table 7-13. Wire Group Definition Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Wire Group Codes Lists the wire groups that exist within the library. Click on a row in
Table the table to select that record; the fields below are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Wire Group Codes Table, which can than be
populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new code.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new wire group, all fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing record, the Description field and
selection of Wire Sizes are returned to their previous value.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Wire Group Codes Table. This
change is not written to the database until you click Apply; before
this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the
Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Name A unique identifier for the wire group. Mandatory.
Description A longer description of the wire group’s contents. Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 417

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Group Definition Dialog Box

Table 7-13. Wire Group Definition Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Range Specification • None
With this option selected, the Available grid in the Wire Sizes
section lists all wire sizes in the library that you can select for
the wire group.
• Outside Diameter or C.S.A.
With either of these options selected, the Minimum and
Maximum Outside Diameter and C.S.A. fields are enabled,
allowing you to specify a range of wire sizes before clicking the
Filter button, returning all wire sizes within the specified range
into the Available grid in the Wire Sizes section. Optional.
Wire Sizes This section allows you to select the wire sizes to include in the
wire group. Wires are added by first selecting them in the Available
grid, then clicking Add. Wires are removed from the group by
selecting them in the Selected list, and then clicking Remove. The
Add All and Remove All buttons are available to speed up
selection.
• Available
This grid lists all wire sizes that can be added to the wire group:
• If Wire Sizes is selected, above, this grid shows all wire sizes
in the library.
• If Outside Diameter or C.S.A. is selected, above, this grid
shows all wire sizes falling between the Minimum and
Maximum Outside Diameter or C.S.A. values (after the
Filter button is clicked). If you have specified a range, you
may want to add all of the listed wire sizes, in which case you
can click Add All.
• Selected
This grid lists all wire sizes added to the wire group.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Group Definition
Editing a Wire Group Definition
Deleting a Wire Group Definition

418 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box

Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Wire Insulation Thickness from the Components Main Menu.
Used to associate values for the thickness of wire insulations with a range of conductor cross-
sectional areas, allowing accurate bundle diameters to be calculated based on the wires selected.
Objects

Table 7-14. Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Wire Insulation Lists the wire insulation thickness records that exist within the
Thickness Table library. Click on a row in the table to select that record; the fields
below are updated to display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected code.

New Adds a new row to the Wire Insulation Thickness Table, which can
than be populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new
code.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new wire insulation thickness record, all
fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing record, the Thickness field is
returned to its previous value.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Wire Insulation Thickness Table.
This change is not written to the database until you click Apply;
before this point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore
(the Delete button is relabeled as Restore).
Material Code Specify a material code for the conductor, either by entering an
existing code directly into the field, or by clicking the ellipsis (...)
button to the right of the field and selecting one from the Material
Codes Selection Dialog Box. Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 419

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box

Table 7-14. Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Thickness Enter a value for the thickness of the insulation applied to wires of
this conductor Material Code. This thickness applies only to wires
with a cross-sectional area falling between the Min CSA and Max
CSA values specified, below. Mandatory.
The thickness of the insulation material is based on the distance
between the surface of the conductor and the outer surface of the
insulation.
Min CSA Specify the smallest conductor cross-sectional area for which the
Thickness specified, above, is used (for conductors of the specified
Material Code). Mandatory.
Max CSA Specify the largest conductor cross-sectional area for which the
Thickness specified, above, is used (for conductors of the specified
Material Code). Mandatory.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness
Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness
Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness

420 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Sizes Dialog Box

Wire Sizes Dialog Box

To access: Select Codes > Wire Sizes from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create wire size records, linking a wire’s cross-sectional area with an insulation material
and a specification of the number, and diameter, of strands in the wire.
Objects

Table 7-15. Wire Sizes Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Wire Sizes Table Lists the wire sizes that exist within the library. Click on a row in
the table to select that wire size; the fields below are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected wire size.

New Adds a new row to the Wire Sizes Table, which can than be
populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new wire
size.
Reset Returns all fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new wire size, all fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing wire size, the CSA and Wire Usual
fields are returned to their previous value.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Wire Sizes Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button
is relabeled as Restore).
Material Code Specify a material code, either by entering an existing code directly
into the field, or by clicking the ellipsis (...) button to the right of the
field and selecting one from the Material Codes Selection Dialog
Box. Mandatory.
Specification Enter the specification for this wire size, as dictated by your
company’s available wire specifications. Mandatory.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 421

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Sizes Dialog Box

Table 7-15. Wire Sizes Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
CSA Enter the cross-sectional area of the wire size. This value is
expressed in the common units established for your library.
Mandatory.
Wire Usual Select this option to indicate which wire size should be selected by
default when two or more wire sizes share a Material Code and
CSA. Optional.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Size
Editing a Wire Size
Deleting a Wire Size

422 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Code Selection Dialog Boxes

Code Selection Dialog Boxes

This section offers a description of all input dialog boxes used in the selection of library codes
when maintaining components, companies or other codes. For each dialog box, all fields are
listed, along with a full description of the field’s function.
Color Code Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Material Codes Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Property Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 423

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Color Code Selection Dialog Box

Color Code Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of any internal color code field.
Used to select an internal color code.
Objects

Table 7-16. Color Code Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Color Codes table To select a color code, click the relevant row in the Color Codes
table then click OK. The dialog box is closed and the selected color
code is inserted into the field from which the dialog box was
launched.
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.

Related Topics
Creating a Color Code
Editing a Color Code
Deleting a Color Code

424 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box

Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of any component type field.
Used to select a component type code.
Objects

Table 7-17. Component Type Code Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Component Type Codes To select a component type code, click the relevant row in the
Table Component Type Codes table then click OK. The dialog box is
closed and the selected component type code is inserted into the
field from which the dialog box was launched.
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.

Related Topics
Creating a Properties for Type Code
Creating a Property Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 425

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Material Codes Selection Dialog Box

Material Codes Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of any material code field.
Used to select a material code.
Objects

Table 7-18. Material Code Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Material Codes Table To select a material code, click the relevant row in the Material
Codes table then click OK. The dialog box is closed and the
selected material code is inserted into the field from which the
dialog box was launched.
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.

Related Topics
Creating a Material Code

426 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Property Selection Dialog Box

Property Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of any property name field.
Used to select a property code.
Objects

Table 7-19. Property Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Properties Table To select a property, click the relevant row in the Properties table
then click OK. The dialog box is closed and the selected property is
inserted into the field from which the dialog box was launched.
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.

Related Topics
Creating a Property Code
Creating a Properties for Type Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 427

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box

Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box

To access: Click the ellipsis (...) button to the right of any wire spec. field.
Used to select a wire size based on wire specification.
Objects

Table 7-20. Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Wire Specifications To select a wire size, click the relevant row in the Wire
Table Specifications table then click OK. The dialog box is closed and
the selected wire specification is inserted into the field from which
the dialog box was launched. If a Wire CSA field is available on the
dialog box, it is updated with the csa value of the selected wire size.
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the codes listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns. To
remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove restriction(s)
( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial criteria ( ).
These criteria are applied when you press Return.

Related Topics
Creating a Wire Size

428 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Company Dialog Boxes

Company Dialog Boxes

This section offers a description of the input dialog boxes used in the creation and maintenance
of customers and suppliers. For each dialog box, all fields are listed, along with a full
description of the field’s function.
Customers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Suppliers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 429

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customers Dialog Box

Customers Dialog Box

To access: Select Companies > Customers from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create, edit and delete customer records.
Objects
• The following objects are available.
o Filter and Customers Section
o Address & Contact Details Section
o Customer Manufacturing Options Section

Table 7-21. Filter and Customers Section

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the customers listed in
this dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to
add a new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute
Name, an Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the
columns. To remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove
restriction(s) ( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial
criteria ( ). These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Customers Table Lists the customers that exist within the library. Click on a row in
the table to select that customer; the fields below are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the selected customer code.

New Adds a new row to the Customers Table, which can then be
populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new
customer.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new customer, all fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing customer, the fields are returned
to their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Customers Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this
point, the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete
button is relabeled as Restore).

430 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customers Dialog Box

Table 7-22. Address & Contact Details Section

Field Description
Name Enter a name to identify the customer. This name must be unique
within the library; if the name matches that of an existing
customer, upon clicking Apply, a message will be displayed to
inform you, and you will not be permitted to proceed with the
update until you have edited the name. Mandatory.
Address [1-4] Enter the customer’s postal address across one or more of these
free-text fields. Optional.
Post Code Enter the customer’s postal (zip) code. Optional.
Country Enter the name of the country in which the customer is located.
Optional.
Internal Ref. If you have an internal name or code for this customer, enter it
here. Optional.
Contact Enter the name of your primary contact at the customer. Optional.
Phone No. Enter the contact telephone number for the customer. Optional.
Fax Number If the customer can be contacted via fax, enter the fax machine
number here. Optional.

Table 7-23. Customer Manufacturing Options Section

Field Description
Customer Manufacturing The fields in this section can be used to override default
Options Section manufacturing values used when running engineering calculations
on a harness belonging to this customer, either in Capital Harness
Classic or Capital HarnessXC. Where a value exists for this
customer, it will be used instead of the default.
Length Addon Per Specifies the length of wire to be added to the calculated length
Junction for each junction through which a wire passes. Optional.
In Capital, any value entered, other than 0, overrides the
following:
• the default of 3 entered in the Wire Length, Add-On Per
Junction field of the Update System Parameters dialog box
in Capital Engineer (see the Capital Engineer User Guide)
• the default value of 3.0 specified for the Add-On Per
Junction harness engineering parameter set in the Project
Preferences for Capital HarnessXC (see the Capital Design
Tools - Common Functions User Guide).

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 431

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customers Dialog Box

Table 7-23. Customer Manufacturing Options Section (cont.)

Field Description
Wire Length Minimum Specifies the minimum addon amount that can be added to the
Addon calculated length of a wire based on the “Wire Length % Addon”
value. If the calculated addon amount is smaller than the value
entered here, this will be used instead. Optional.
In Capital, any value entered, other than 0, overrides the
following:
• the default of 0 entered in the Wire Length, Minimum
Percentage Add-On field of the Update System Parameters
dialog box in Capital Engineer (see the Capital Engineer User
Guide).
• the default value of 0.0 specified for the Minimum
Percentage Value harness engineering parameter set in the
Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC (see the Capital
Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide).
Wire Length Maximum Specifies the maximum addon amount that can be added to the
Addon calculated length of a wire based on the “Wire Length % Addon”
value. If the calculated addon amount is greater than the value
entered here, this will be used instead. Optional.
In Capital, any value entered, other than 0, overrides the
following:
• the default of 0 entered in the Wire Length, Maximum
Percentage Add-On field of the Update System Parameters
dialog box in Capital Engineer (see the Capital Engineer User
Guide for more information).
• the default value of 0.0 specified for the Maximum
Percentage Value harness engineering parameter set in the
Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC (see the Capital
Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide).
Wire Length Rounding Specifies the amount to which calculated wire lengths are
Value rounded, using the Rounding Method specified below. Optional.
In Capital, any value entered, other than 0, overrides the
following:
• the default of 0 entered in the Wire Length Rounding Value
field of the Update System Parameters dialog box in Capital
Engineer (see the Capital Engineer User Guide).
• the default value of 0.0 specified for the Wire Length
Rounding Value harness engineering parameter set in the
Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC (see the Capital
Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide).

432 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customers Dialog Box

Table 7-23. Customer Manufacturing Options Section (cont.)

Field Description
Wire Length % Addon Specifies a standard percentage to be added to the calculated
length of any wires on harnesses belonging to this customer.
Optional.
In Capital, any value entered, other than 0, overrides the
following:
• the default of 0 entered in the Wire Length, Percentage Add-
On field of the Update System Parameters dialog box in
Capital Engineer (see the Capital Engineer User Guide for
more information). Note that both the “Wire Length Minimum
Addon” and “Wire Length Maximum Addon” fields can be
used to restrict the calculated value.
• the default value of 0.0 specified for the Percentage Add-On
harness engineering parameter set in the Project Preferences
for Capital HarnessXC (see the Capital Project User Guide).
Use Pitch Table Specifies if pitch tables should be used to calculate the true length
of twisted pair multicore wires (selected) or not (unselected). See
“Pitch Tables” on page 265 for more information on configuring
and using pitch tables.
Datum Specifies the default point within a connector to which
terminating wires should have their lengths measured. When
creating a new harness design, either in Capital Harness Classic or
Capital HarnessXC, the option selected here is used as a default
for any harnesses belonging to this customer, however this can be
overridden. Mandatory.
• Back
Wire lengths are measured to the point at which they enter the
connector cavity.
• Front
Wire lengths are measured to the front face of the connector in
which they terminate.
• Tip. Term
Wire lengths are measured to the tip of the terminal selected
for them when the harness is processed.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 433

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Customers Dialog Box

Table 7-23. Customer Manufacturing Options Section (cont.)

Field Description
Rounding Method Specifies the method used to round calculated wire lengths to the
amount specified in the “Wire Length Rounding Value” field.
Mandatory.
• Default
With this option selected:
• calculated wire lengths in Capital Engineer are rounded
based on the method specified for the Wire Length
Rounding Method of the Update System Parameters
dialog box in Capital Engineer (see the Capital Engineer
User Guide for more information).
• calculated wire lengths in Capital HarnessXC are rounded
based on the method specified for the Wire Length
Rounding Method harness engineering parameter set in the
Project Preferences for Capital HarnessXC (see the Capital
Project User Guide).
• None
With this option selected, calculated wire lengths are used as
calculated with no rounding performed. Any value in the v
field is ignored.
• Nearest
With this option selected, calculated wire lengths are rounded
to the closest increment of the “Wire Length Rounding
Value”.
For example, if the “Wire Length Rounding Value” is 0.5:
• A wire length of 100.9 is rounded to 101.0
• A wire length of 100.7 is rounded to 100.5
• Up
With this option selected, calculated wire lengths are rounded
up to the next increment of the “Wire Length Rounding
Value”.
For example, if the “Wire Length Rounding Value” is 0.5:
• A wire length of 100.9 is rounded to 101.0
• A wire length of 100.7 is also rounded to 101.0

Related Topics
Creating a Customer
Editing a Customer
Deleting a Customer

434 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Suppliers Dialog Box

Suppliers Dialog Box

To access: Select Companies > Suppliers from the Components Main Menu.
Used to create, edit and delete supplier records.
Objects

Table 7-24. Suppliers Dialog Box Contents

Field Description
Filter Table Enables you to enter criteria that restrict the suppliers listed in this
dialog box. To enter a criteria, click Add restriction ( ) to add a
new row to the table. For that row, select an Attribute Name, an
Operator and a Value from the drop-down lists in the columns.
To remove a criteria, select that row and click Remove
restriction(s) ( ). To remove all criteria, click Revert to initial
criteria ( ). These criteria are applied when you press Return.
Suppliers Table Lists the suppliers that exist within the library. Click on a row in
the table to select that supplier; the fields below are updated to
display the existing values.
View Code Usages Opens the Usage Report Dialog Box that lists the components that
use the currently selected supplier code.

New Adds a new row to the Suppliers Table, which can then be
populated by completing the fields, below, to create a new
supplier.
Reset Returns the fields to their previous state. This means that:
• If you are creating a new supplier, all fields are cleared.
• If you are editing an existing supplier, the fields are returned to
their previous values.
Delete Removes a selected row from the Suppliers Table. This change is
not written to the database until you click Apply; before this point,
the deletion can be undone by clicking Restore (the Delete button
is relabeled as Restore).
Supplier Enter a name to identify the supplier. This name must be unique
within the library; if the name matches that of an existing supplier,
upon clicking Apply, a message will be displayed to inform you,
and you will not be permitted to proceed with the update until you
have edited the name. Mandatory.
Address [1-4] Enter the supplier’s postal address across one or more of these
free-text fields. Optional.
Post Code Enter the supplier’s postal (zip) code. Optional.

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 435

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Suppliers Dialog Box

Table 7-24. Suppliers Dialog Box Contents (cont.)

Field Description
Country Enter the name of the country in which the supplier is located.
Optional.
Internal Ref. If you have an internal name or code for this supplier, enter it here.
Optional.
Contact Enter the name of your primary contact at the supplier. Optional.
Telephone Number Enter the contact telephone number for the supplier. Optional.
Fax Number If the supplier can be contacted via fax, enter the fax machine
number here. Optional.

Related Topics
Creating a Supplier
Editing a Supplier
Deleting a Supplier

436 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Help Button Landing Pages for Codes and Companies Dialog Boxes

Help Button Landing Pages for Codes and

Companies Dialog Boxes
The following topics are displayed when you click the Help button or press F1 for a dialog box
in the software.
Color Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Component Type Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Component Type Codes Selection Help (Configurable Library GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Customer Color Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Manufacturing Sites Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Material Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Pitch Definitions Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Pitch Tables Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Property Codes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Properties for Type Code Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Scope Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Usage Report Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Wire Group Definition Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Wire Insulation Thickness Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Wire Sizes Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Color Code Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Component Type Codes Selection Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Material Codes Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Property Selection Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Wire Specification Selection Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Customers Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Suppliers Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Color Codes Help

What do you need help with?
• The Color Codes Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Color Code
• Editing a Color Code
• Deleting a Color Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 437

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Component Type Codes Help

Component Type Codes Help

What do you need help with?
• The Component Type Codes Dialog Box fields
• “Creating a Component Type Code” on page 239
• “Editing a Component Type Code” on page 239
• “Deleting a Component Type Code” on page 240

Component Type Codes Selection Help

(Configurable Library GUI)
What do you need help with?
• The Type Codes (Component Group Level) concept in the Configurable Library GUI
• The Component Type Codes concept
• The Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box (Configurable Library GUI) fields
• Adding a Component Type Code to the Browser Tree in the Configure Library GUI
Dialog Box

Customer Color Codes Help

What do you need help with?
• The Customer Color Codes Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Customer Color Code
• Editing a Customer Color Code
• Deleting a Customer Color Code

Manufacturing Sites Help

What do you need help with?
• The Manufacturing Sites Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Manufacturing Site
• Editing a Manufacturing Site
• Deleting a Manufacturing Site

438 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Material Codes Help

Material Codes Help

What do you need help with?
• The Material Codes Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Material Code
• Editing a Material Code
• Deleting a Material Code

Pitch Definitions Help

What do you need help with?
• The Pitch Definitions concept
• The Pitch Definitions Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Pitch Definition
• Editing a Pitch Definition
• Deleting a Pitch Definition

Pitch Tables Help

What do you need help with?
• The Pitch Definitions concept
• The Pitch Tables Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Pitch Table
• Editing a Pitch Table
• Deleting a Pitch Table

Property Codes Help

What do you need help with?
• The Property Codes Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Property Code
• Editing a Property Code
• Deleting a Property Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 439

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Properties for Type Code Help

Properties for Type Code Help

What do you need help with?
• The Properties for Type Code Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Properties for Type Code
• Editing a Properties for Type Code
• Deleting a Properties for Type Code

Scope Help
What do you need help with?
• The Scope Code concept
• Usage Example - How To Use Component Scoping
• The Scope Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Scope Code
• Editing a Scope Code Description
• Deleting a Scope Code

Usage Report Help

What do you need help with?
• The Usage Report Dialog Box fields
• Finding Which Components Use a Code
• Finding Which Components Use a Company Code

Wire Group Definition Help

What do you need help with?
• The Wire Group Definition concept
• The Wire Group Definition Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Wire Group Definition
• Editing a Wire Group Definition
• Deleting a Wire Group Definition

440 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Wire Insulation Thickness Help

• Usage Example for Multiple Wire Fits Cavity - Specifying a Pair of Wire Sizes that Fit
Together at Connector Cavities

Wire Insulation Thickness Help

What do you need help with?
• The Wire Insulation Thickness Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Wire Insulation Thickness
• Editing a Wire Insulation Thickness
• Deleting a Wire Insulation Thickness

Wire Sizes Help

What do you need help with?
• The Wire Sizes Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Wire Size
• Editing a Wire Size
• Deleting a Wire Size

Color Code Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Color Code Selection Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Color Code
• Editing a Color Code
• Deleting a Color Code

Component Type Codes Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Component Type Codes Selection Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Properties for Type Code
• Creating a Property Code

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 441

February 2016
Codes and Companies Dialog Box and Field Reference
Material Codes Selection Help

Material Codes Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Material Codes Selection Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Material Code

Property Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Property Selection Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Property Code
• Creating a Properties for Type Code

Wire Specification Selection Help

What do you need help with?
• The Wire Specification Selection Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Wire Size

Customers Help
What do you need help with?
• The Customers Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Customer
• Editing a Customer
• Deleting a Customer

Suppliers Help
What do you need help with?
• The Suppliers Dialog Box fields
• Creating a Supplier
• Editing a Supplier
• Deleting a Supplier

442 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Chapter 8
Troubleshooting

You can troubleshoot issues in Capital Library.

Unable to Edit Displayed Fields for Tab Embedded in Another Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Unable to Edit Displayed Fields for Tab

Embedded in Another Tab
You cannot edit the fields displayed in a tab that has been embedded in another tab using the
Configurable User Interface functionality.
Solution
Un-embed the tab by selecting it in its embedded location in the Configure Library UI dialog
box and clearing “Visible?”.

Edit the fields displayed for the previously embedded tab.

Embed the tab again.

Related Topics
Configurable User Interface

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 443

February 2016
Troubleshooting
Unable to Edit Displayed Fields for Tab Embedded in Another Tab

444 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Index

deleting multiple wire configuration, 209

Index

—A— editing name, 199

Add specifying attributes, 200
pictures, 370, 376 specifying wire size combinations, 208
Assembly specifying wire size range, 207
adding sub-component, 88 specifying wire sizes, 206
creating, 87 Cavity group
definition, 83 adding cavity component, 100
deleting a sub-component, 89 creating, 99
—B— definition, 84
Backshell deleting a cavity component, 100
adding termination, 93 Cavity plug
creating, 91 creating, 102
definition, 83 definition, 84
deleting termination, 93 Cavity seal
editing termination name, 92 creating, 104
Backshell plug definition, 84
creating, 95 Cavity Selection Dialog, 281
definition, 83 Clip
Backshell seal creating, 106
creating, 96 definition, 84
definition, 83 Code
editing seal attributes, 97 exporting, 270
Base details, 185 importing, 270
Blocked connector refresh library data, 271
blocking cavity, 116 Codes, 287
creating, 115 Color code
definition, 115 creating, 235
unblocking cavity, 116 editing, 235, 236
Blocked insulation displacement connector Color Code Selection dialog, 424
blocking cavity, 153 Color Codes dialog, 395
creating, 152 Component
definition, 151 searching, 229
unblocking cavity, 153 selecting, 231
Bundles Supported, 310 Component groups, 83
Component Maintenance dialog, 385
—C— Component type code
Cavity creating, 239
adding, 200 deleting, 240
deleting, 201 editing, 239

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 445

February 2016
Component Type Code Selection dialog, 425 —E—
Component Type Codes dialog, 397 Edit Internal Part Number, 285
Configurable User Interface, 57, 443 Export
Connector codes, 270
creating, 108 components, 220
definition, 84 Export Library dialog, 368
deleting mated part, 202 Extra details, 185
mated part, 201
Connector seal —F—
creating, 129 Footprint
definition, 84 adding device connector footprint, 139, 140
Copy adding harness connector footprint, 138
details to existing component, 216 definition, 137
details to new component, 216 deleting, 140
Copy Component Details dialog, 365 Formboard Fixtures, 84
Create New Part dialog, 367 —G—
Criteria Grommet
searching, 22 creating, 145
Customer color code definition, 84
creating, 241
deleting, 242 —H—
editing, 241 Heat shrink sleeve
Customer Color Codes dialog, 399, 400 creating, 146
Customer part number definition, 85
deleting, 187, 189 Housing
specifying, 187 adding cavity sub-component, 191
Customers dialog, 430 adding sub-component, 190
definition, 190
—D— deleting sub-component, 193
Delete specifying scope, 192
components, 217 Housing Scope Selection dialog, 373
Device
adding device connector footprint, 139, 140 —I—
adding harness connector footprint, 138 IDC connector
adding pin, 135 adding cavity to cavity group, 150
creating, 133 creating, 148
definition, 84 definition, 85, 148
deleting footprint, 140 deleting cavity from cavity group, 151
deleting pin, 136 specifying attributes, 149
editing pin attributes, 136 Image Selection dialog, 370, 376
editing pin name, 134 Import
Dressed connector codes, 270
adding route, 119 components, 220
creating, 118 Import Library dialog, 374
definition, 117 In-house assembly
deleting route, 120 adding sub-component, 156

446 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 creating, 155 adding, 135
definition, 85 deleting, 136
deleting sub-component, 157 editing attributes, 136
Introduction, 19 editing name, 134
Pin property code
—M— creating, 247
Manufacturing site Pitch definition
creating, 252 creating, 263
deleting, 253 deleting, 264
editing, 252 editing, 263
Manufacturing Sites dialog, 402 Pitch Definitions dialog, 406
Mated part Pitch table
deleting, 202 creating, 265
specifying, 201 deleting, 266
Material code editing, 266
creating, 237 Pitch Tables dialog, 408
deleting, 238 Properties for Type code
editing, 237 creating, 250
Material Code Selection dialog, 426 deleting, 251
Material Codes dialog, 404 editing, 250
Max. Bundle Width, 310 Properties for Type Code dialog, 412
Max. Wire Count, 310 Property
Min. Bundle Width, 310 adding to component, 193
Min. Wire Count, 310 deleting, 194
Modular connector editing value, 194
assigning sub-connector, 123 Property code
creating, 122 creating, 247
definition, 120 deleting, 249
deleting sub-connector, 124 editing, 248
Multicore wire Property Codes dialog, 410
adding inner core, 160 Property Selection dialog, 427
creating with outer sheath, 158
definition, 85 —R—
deleting inner core, 161 Refresh
library code data, 271
—O— symbol library data, 228
Other component Revision
creating, 163 adding to revision history, 198
definition, 85 creating, 197
Overview, 19 removing from history, 198
—P— Revision history, 198
Part Selection dialog, 378 Ring Terminal, 85
Pictures Route
adding, 370, 376 adding to dressed connector, 119
Pin deleting from dressed connector, 120

Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1 447

February 2016
—S— Tube
Scope creating, 177
housing sub-component, 192 definition, 86
Search Twisted pair
components, 229 adding inner core, 160
criteria, 22 creating, 159
Select deleting inner core, 161
component, 231
Select Wire Fit by Outside Diameter dialog, —U—
Ultrasonic weld
382
adding wire, 180
Shaft Diameter, 310
creating, 179
Solder sleeve
definition, 86
creating, 165
deleting wire, 181
definition, 85
Unit of Measure, 295
editing attributes, 166
Splice —V—
creating, 168 View Part Details, 286
definition, 85
editing attributes, 169 —W—
Spot tape Wire
specifying, 173 creating, 182
Supplier part number defin ition, 86
specifying, 188 editing attributes, 182
Suppliers dialog, 435 Wire group definition
Symbol creating, 268
assigning to component, 186 deleting, 269
deleting from component, 186 editing, 269
refreshing library data, 228 Wire Group Definition dialog, 417
Wire insulation thickness
—T— creating, 245
Tape deleting, 246
creating, 172 editing, 245
definition, 85 Wire Insulation Thickness dialog, 419
specifying spot tape, 173 Wire size
Terminal creating, 243
creating, 175 deleting, 244
definition, 85 editing, 243
Termination Wire Sizes dialog, 421
adding to backshell, 93 Wire Specification Selection dialog, 428
deleting from backshell, 93
deleting multiple configuration, 205
editing name, 92
specifying single wires, 204
specifying wire combinations, 205
Tip. Term, 433

448 Capital® Library™ User Guide, 2015.1

February 2016
 Third-Party Information

For full information on open source and third-party software that may be included in Capital products see the Third-Party
Information section in the Capital Design Tools - Common Functions User Guide. For last minute additions to this
information refer to the latest Capital Release Highlights document.
 End-User License Agreement
The latest version of the End-User License Agreement is available on-line at:
www.mentor.com/eula

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

USE OF ALL SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCTS. USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES CUSTOMER’S COMPLETE
AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT.
ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY.

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”)

This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software (as defined in Section 2) and hardware (collectively “Products”)
between the company acquiring the Products (“Customer”), and the Mentor Graphics entity that issued the corresponding
quotation or, if no quotation was issued, the applicable local Mentor Graphics entity (“Mentor Graphics”). Except for license
agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by Customer and an authorized
representative of Mentor Graphics, this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties’ entire understanding
relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements. If Customer does not agree to these
terms and conditions, promptly return or, in the case of Software received electronically, certify destruction of Software and all
accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid.

1. ORDERS, FEES AND PAYMENT.

1.1. To the extent Customer (or if agreed by Mentor Graphics, Customer’s appointed third party buying agent) places and Mentor
Graphics accepts purchase orders pursuant to this Agreement (each an “Order”), each Order will constitute a contract between
Customer and Mentor Graphics, which shall be governed solely and exclusively by the terms and conditions of this Agreement,
any applicable addenda and the applicable quotation, whether or not those documents are referenced on the Order. Any
additional or conflicting terms and conditions appearing on an Order or presented in any electronic portal or automated order
management system, whether or not required to be electronically accepted, will not be effective unless agreed in writing and
physically signed by an authorized representative of Customer and Mentor Graphics.

1.2. Amounts invoiced will be paid, in the currency specified on the applicable invoice, within 30 days from the date of such invoice.
Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one-half percent per month
or the applicable legal rate currently in effect, whichever is lower. Prices do not include freight, insurance, customs duties, taxes
or other similar charges, which Mentor Graphics will state separately in the applicable invoice. Unless timely provided with a
valid certificate of exemption or other evidence that items are not taxable, Mentor Graphics will invoice Customer for all
applicable taxes including, but not limited to, VAT, GST, sales tax, consumption tax and service tax. Customer will make all
payments free and clear of, and without reduction for, any withholding or other taxes; any such taxes imposed on payments by
Customer hereunder will be Customer’s sole responsibility. If Customer appoints a third party to place purchase orders and/or
make payments on Customer’s behalf, Customer shall be liable for payment under Orders placed by such third party in the event
of default.

1.3. All Products are delivered FCA factory (Incoterms 2010), freight prepaid and invoiced to Customer, except Software delivered
electronically, which shall be deemed delivered when made available to Customer for download. Mentor Graphics retains a
security interest in all Products delivered under this Agreement, to secure payment of the purchase price of such Products, and
Customer agrees to sign any documents that Mentor Graphics determines to be necessary or convenient for use in filing or
perfecting such security interest. Mentor Graphics’ delivery of Software by electronic means is subject to Customer’s provision
of both a primary and an alternate e-mail address.

2. GRANT OF LICENSE. The software installed, downloaded, or otherwise acquired by Customer under this Agreement, including any
updates, modifications, revisions, copies, documentation, setup files and design data (“Software”) are copyrighted, trade secret and
confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors, who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not
expressly granted by this Agreement. Except for Software that is embeddable (“Embedded Software”), which is licensed pursuant to
separate embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer, subject to payment of
applicable license fees, a nontransferable, nonexclusive license to use Software solely: (a) in machine-readable, object-code form
(except as provided in Subsection 4.2); (b) for Customer’s internal business purposes; (c) for the term of the license; and (d) on the
computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics. A site is restricted to a one-half mile (800 meter) radius. Customer
may have Software temporarily used by an employee for telecommuting purposes from locations other than a Customer office, such as
the employee’s residence, an airport or hotel, provided that such employee’s primary place of employment is the site where the
Software is authorized for use. Mentor Graphics’ standard policies and programs, which vary depending on Software, license fees paid
or services purchased, apply to the following: (a) relocation of Software; (b) use of Software, which may be limited, for example, to
execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time (such limitations may be
technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices); and (c) support services provided, including
eligibility to receive telephone support, updates, modifications, and revisions. For the avoidance of doubt, if Customer provides any
feedback or requests any change or enhancement to Products, whether in the course of receiving support or consulting services,
evaluating Products, performing beta testing or otherwise, any inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments made
by Mentor Graphics (at Mentor Graphics’ sole discretion) will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics.
3. BETA CODE.

3.1. Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation (which may be either alpha or beta,
collectively “Beta Code”), which may not be used without Mentor Graphics’ explicit authorization. Upon Mentor Graphics’
authorization, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a temporary, nontransferable, nonexclusive license for experimental use to
test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics may
choose, at its sole discretion, not to release Beta Code commercially in any form.

3.2. If Mentor Graphics authorizes Customer to use the Beta Code, Customer agrees to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal
conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics. Customer will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during Customer’s use of the
Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements. Upon completion of Customer’s evaluation and testing,
Customer will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code, including its strengths, weaknesses and
recommended improvements.

3.3. Customer agrees to maintain Beta Code in confidence and shall restrict access to the Beta Code, including the methods and
concepts utilized therein, solely to those employees and Customer location(s) authorized by Mentor Graphics to perform beta
testing. Customer agrees that any written evaluations and all inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments
that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement, including those based partly or wholly on
Customer’s feedback, will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights, title and
interest in all such property. The provisions of this Subsection 3.3 shall survive termination of this Agreement.

4. RESTRICTIONS ON USE.

4.1. Customer may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. Each copy must include all notices
and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics. All copies shall
remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors. Except for Embedded Software that has been embedded in executable
code form in Customer’s product(s), Customer shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of
Software, including copies merged with other software, and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon
request. Customer shall not make Products available in any form to any person other than Customer’s employees and on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of
confidentiality. Customer shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Products and ensure that any person
permitted access does not disclose or use Products except as permitted by this Agreement. Customer shall give Mentor Graphics
written notice of any unauthorized disclosure or use of the Products as soon as Customer becomes aware of such unauthorized
disclosure or use. Customer acknowledges that Software provided hereunder may contain source code which is proprietary and
its confidentiality is of the highest importance and value to Mentor Graphics. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics
may be seriously harmed if such source code is disclosed in violation of this Agreement. Except as otherwise permitted for
purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law, Customer shall not reverse-assemble,
disassemble, reverse-compile, or reverse-engineer any Product, or in any way derive any source code from Software that is not
provided to Customer in source code form. Log files, data files, rule files and script files generated by or for the Software
(collectively “Files”), including without limitation files containing Standard Verification Rule Format (“SVRF”) and Tcl
Verification Format (“TVF”) which are Mentor Graphics’ trade secret and proprietary syntaxes for expressing process rules,
constitute or include confidential information of Mentor Graphics. Customer may share Files with third parties, excluding
Mentor Graphics competitors, provided that the confidentiality of such Files is protected by written agreement at least as well as
Customer protects other information of a similar nature or importance, but in any case with at least reasonable care. Customer
may use Files containing SVRF or TVF only with Mentor Graphics products. Under no circumstances shall Customer use
Products or Files or allow their use for the purpose of developing, enhancing or marketing any product that is in any way
competitive with Products, or disclose to any third party the results of, or information pertaining to, any benchmark.

4.2. If any Software or portions thereof are provided in source code form, Customer will use the source code only to correct software
errors and enhance or modify the Software for the authorized use, or as permitted for Embedded Software under separate
embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement. Customer shall not disclose or permit disclosure of source
code, in whole or in part, including any of its methods or concepts, to anyone except Customer’s employees or on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, with a need to know. Customer shall not copy or compile source code in
any manner except to support this authorized use.

4.3. Customer agrees that it will not subject any Product to any open source software (“OSS”) license that conflicts with this
Agreement or that does not otherwise apply to such Product.

4.4. Customer may not assign this Agreement or the rights and duties under it, or relocate, sublicense, or otherwise transfer the
Products, whether by operation of law or otherwise (“Attempted Transfer”), without Mentor Graphics’ prior written consent and
payment of Mentor Graphics’ then-current applicable relocation and/or transfer fees. Any Attempted Transfer without Mentor
Graphics’ prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may, at Mentor Graphics’ option, result in the
immediate termination of the Agreement and/or the licenses granted under this Agreement. The terms of this Agreement,
including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions, shall be binding upon Customer’s permitted successors in
interest and assigns.

4.5. The provisions of this Section 4 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

5. SUPPORT SERVICES. To the extent Customer purchases support services, Mentor Graphics will provide Customer with updates and
technical support for the Products, at the Customer site(s) for which support is purchased, in accordance with Mentor Graphics’ then
current End-User Support Terms located at http://supportnet.mentor.com/supportterms.

6. OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE. Products may contain OSS or code distributed under a proprietary third party license agreement, to
which additional rights or obligations (“Third Party Terms”) may apply. Please see the applicable Product documentation (including
license files, header files, read-me files or source code) for details. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement
 (including any addenda) and the Third Party Terms, the Third Party Terms will control solely with respect to the OSS or third party
code. The provisions of this Section 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

7. LIMITED WARRANTY.

7.1. Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period its standard, generally supported Products, when properly installed,
will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual. Mentor Graphics does not
warrant that Products will meet Customer’s requirements or that operation of Products will be uninterrupted or error free. The
warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation, whichever first occurs. Customer must
notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty
applies only to the initial shipment of Software under an Order and does not renew or reset, for example, with the delivery of (a)
Software updates or (b) authorization codes or alternate Software under a transaction involving Software re-mix. This warranty
shall not be valid if Products have been subject to misuse, unauthorized modification, improper installation or Customer is not in
compliance with this Agreement. MENTOR GRAPHICS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND CUSTOMER’S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY SHALL BE, AT MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OPTION, EITHER (A) REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON
RETURN OF THE PRODUCTS TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR (B) MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE
PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WITH RESPECT TO: (A) SERVICES; (B) PRODUCTS PROVIDED AT NO CHARGE; OR (C) BETA CODE; ALL OF
WHICH ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.”

7.2. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 7 ARE EXCLUSIVE. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS
LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, WITH RESPECT TO
PRODUCTS PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY.

8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS) WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS’ OR ITS LICENSORS’ LIABILITY UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED FROM CUSTOMER FOR THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE LICENSE OR
SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID, MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS
LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 8
SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.

9. THIRD PARTY CLAIMS.

9.1. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics has no control over the testing of Customer’s products, or the specific
applications and use of Products. Mentor Graphics and its licensors shall not be liable for any claim or demand made against
Customer by any third party, except to the extent such claim is covered under Section 10.

9.2. In the event that a third party makes a claim against Mentor Graphics arising out of the use of Customer’s products, Mentor
Graphics will give Customer prompt notice of such claim. At Customer’s option and expense, Customer may take sole control
of the defense and any settlement of such claim. Customer WILL reimburse and hold harmless Mentor Graphics for any
LIABILITY, damages, settlement amounts, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by or awarded
against Mentor Graphics or its licensors in connection with such claims.

9.3. The provisions of this Section 9 shall survive any expiration or termination of this Agreement.

10. INFRINGEMENT.

10.1. Mentor Graphics will defend or settle, at its option and expense, any action brought against Customer in the United States,
Canada, Japan, or member state of the European Union which alleges that any standard, generally supported Product acquired
by Customer hereunder infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in such jurisdiction. Mentor Graphics
will pay costs and damages finally awarded against Customer that are attributable to such action. Customer understands and
agrees that as conditions to Mentor Graphics’ obligations under this section Customer must: (a) notify Mentor Graphics
promptly in writing of the action; (b) provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance to settle or defend the
action; and (c) grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action.

10.2. If a claim is made under Subsection 10.1 Mentor Graphics may, at its option and expense: (a) replace or modify the Product so
that it becomes noninfringing; (b) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Product; or (c) require the return of the
Product and refund to Customer any purchase price or license fee paid, less a reasonable allowance for use.

10.3. Mentor Graphics has no liability to Customer if the action is based upon: (a) the combination of Software or hardware with any
product not furnished by Mentor Graphics; (b) the modification of the Product other than by Mentor Graphics; (c) the use of
other than a current unaltered release of Software; (d) the use of the Product as part of an infringing process; (e) a product that
Customer makes, uses, or sells; (f) any Beta Code or Product provided at no charge; (g) any software provided by Mentor
Graphics’ licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics’ customers; (h) OSS, except to the extent that
the infringement is directly caused by Mentor Graphics’ modifications to such OSS; or (i) infringement by Customer that is
deemed willful. In the case of (i), Customer shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its reasonable attorney fees and other costs
related to the action.

10.4. THIS SECTION 10 IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 8 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR
GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS, AND CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, FOR DEFENSE,
 SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES, WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT
OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.

11. TERMINATION AND EFFECT OF TERMINATION.

11.1. If a Software license was provided for limited term use, such license will automatically terminate at the end of the authorized
term. Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement immediately upon
written notice if Customer: (a) exceeds the scope of the license or otherwise fails to comply with the licensing or confidentiality
provisions of this Agreement, or (b) becomes insolvent, files a bankruptcy petition, institutes proceedings for liquidation or
winding up or enters into an agreement to assign its assets for the benefit of creditors. For any other material breach of any
provision of this Agreement, Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement
upon 30 days written notice if Customer fails to cure the breach within the 30 day notice period. Termination of this Agreement
or any license granted hereunder will not affect Customer’s obligation to pay for Products shipped or licenses granted prior to
the termination, which amounts shall be payable immediately upon the date of termination.

11.2. Upon termination of this Agreement, the rights and obligations of the parties shall cease except as expressly set forth in this
Agreement. Upon termination of this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement, Customer shall ensure that
all use of the affected Products ceases, and shall return hardware and either return to Mentor Graphics or destroy Software in
Customer’s possession, including all copies and documentation, and certify in writing to Mentor Graphics within ten business
days of the termination date that Customer no longer possesses any of the affected Products or copies of Software in any form.

12. EXPORT. The Products provided hereunder are subject to regulation by local laws and European Union (“E.U.”) and United States
(“U.S.”) government agencies, which prohibit export, re-export or diversion of certain products, information about the products, and
direct or indirect products thereof, to certain countries and certain persons. Customer agrees that it will not export or re-export Products
in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local, E.U. and U.S. government agencies. If Customer
wishes to disclose any information to Mentor Graphics that is subject to any E.U., U.S. or other applicable export restrictions, including
without limitation the U.S. International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or special controls under the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR), Customer will notify Mentor Graphics personnel, in advance of each instance of disclosure, that such information
is subject to such export restrictions.

13. U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. The parties agree that all Software is
commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to U.S. FAR 48
CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. government or a U.S.
government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, which shall supersede any
conflicting terms or conditions in any government order document, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory
federal laws.

14. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. Mentor Graphics Corporation, Mentor Graphics (Ireland) Limited, Microsoft Corporation and
other licensors may be third party beneficiaries of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein.

15. REVIEW OF LICENSE USAGE. Customer will monitor the access to and use of Software. With prior written notice and during
Customer’s normal business hours, Mentor Graphics may engage an internationally recognized accounting firm to review Customer’s
software monitoring system and records deemed relevant by the internationally recognized accounting firm to confirm Customer’s
compliance with the terms of this Agreement or U.S. or other local export laws. Such review may include FlexNet (or successor
product) report log files that Customer shall capture and provide at Mentor Graphics’ request. Customer shall make records available in
electronic format and shall fully cooperate with data gathering to support the license review. Mentor Graphics shall bear the expense of
any such review unless a material non-compliance is revealed. Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all information
gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights
under this Agreement. The provisions of this Section 15 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

16. CONTROLLING LAW, JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION. The owners of certain Mentor Graphics intellectual
property licensed under this Agreement are located in Ireland and the U.S. To promote consistency around the world, disputes shall be
resolved as follows: excluding conflict of laws rules, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of
Oregon, U.S., if Customer is located in North or South America, and the laws of Ireland if Customer is located outside of North or
South America or Japan, and the laws of Japan if Customer is located in Japan. All disputes arising out of or in relation to this
Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Portland, Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply, or Dublin,
Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply, or the Tokyo District Court when the laws of Japan apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all
disputes in Asia (excluding Japan) arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration in Singapore before a
single arbitrator to be appointed by the chairman of the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (“SIAC”) to be conducted in the
English language, in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute, which rules are deemed to be
incorporated by reference in this section. Nothing in this section shall restrict Mentor Graphics’ right to bring an action (including for
example a motion for injunctive relief) against Customer in the jurisdiction where Customer’s place of business is located. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement.

17. SEVERABILITY. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void, invalid, unenforceable or
illegal, such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect.

18. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement contains the parties’ entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior
or contemporaneous agreements. Any translation of this Agreement is provided to comply with local legal requirements only. In the
event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this Agreement shall govern to the extent
not prohibited by local law in the applicable jurisdiction. This Agreement may only be modified in writing, signed by an authorized
representative of each party. Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent, waiver
or excuse.

Rev. 151102, Part No. 265968